Senographe DMR

Technical
Publications
2308530100
Revision 3
SENOGRAPHE DMR V2_P

DMR V2 upgraded with kit 2307542 or
kit 2307545
sm
Service Manual
do not duplicate
CopyrightE 2001, 2002 by General Electric Co.

ATTENTION
LES APPAREILS RAYONS X SONT DANGEREUX LA FOIS POUR LE PATIENT ET POUR LE MANIPULATEUR
SI LES MESURES DE PROTECTION NE SONT PAS STRICTEMENT APPLIQUEES
Bien que cet appareil soit construit selon les normes de scurit les plus svres, la source de rayonnement X reprsente un danger
lorsque le manipulateur est non qualifi ou non averti. Une exposition excessive au rayonnement X entrane des dommages lorganisme.
Par consquent, toutes les prcautions doivent tre prises pour viter que les personnes non autorises ou non qualifies utilisent cet
appareil crant ainsi un danger pour les autres et pour ellesmmes.
Avant chaque manipulation, les personnes qualifies et autorises se servir de cet appareil doivent se renseigner sur les mesures de
protection tablies par la Commission Internationale de la Protection Radiologique, Annales 60 : Recommandations de la Commission
Internationale sur la Protection Radiologique et les normes nationales en vigueur.
WARNING
XRAY EQUIPMENT IS DANGEROUS TO BOTH PATIENT AND OPERATOR
UNLESS MEASURES OF PROTECTION ARE STRICTLY OBSERVED
Though this equipment is built to the highest standards of electrical and mechanical safety, the useful xray beam becomes a source of
danger in the hands of the unauthorized or unqualified operator. Excessive exposure to xradiation causes damage to human tissue.
Therefore, adequate precautions must be taken to prevent unauthorized or unqualified persons from operating this equipment or exposing
themselves or others to its radiation.
Before operation, persons qualified and authorized to operate this equipment should be familiar with the Recommendations of the Interna-
tional Commission on Radiological Protection, contained in Annals Number 60 of the ICRP, and with applicable national standards.
ATENCION
LOS APARATOS DE RAYOS X SON PELIGROSOS PARA EL PACIENTE Y EL MANIPULADOR
CUANDO LAS NORMAS DE PROTECCION NO ESTAN OBSERVADAS
Aunque este aparato est construido segn las normas de seguridad ms estrictas, la radiacin X constituye un peligro al ser manipulado
por personas no autorizadas o incompetentes. Una exposicin excesiva a la radiacin X puede causar daos al organismo.
Por consiguiente, se debern tomar todas las precauciones necesarias para evitar que las personas incompetentes o no autorizadas
utilicen este aparato, lo que sera un peligro para los dems y para s mismas.
Antes de efectuar las manipulaciones, las personas habilitadas y competentes en el uso de este aparato, debern informarse sobre las
normas de proteccin fijadas por la Comisin Internacional de la Proteccin Radiolgica, Anales No 60: Recomendacines de la Comi-
sin Internacional sobre la Proteccin Radiolgica y normas nacionales.
ACHTUNG
RNTGENAPPARATE SIND EINE GEFAHR FR PATIENTEN SOWIE BEDIENUNGSPERSONAL,
WENN DIE GELTENDEN SICHERHEITSVORKEHRUNGEN NICHT GENAU BEACHTET WERDEN
Dieser Apparat entspricht in seiner Bauweise strengsten elektrischen und mechanischen Sichereitsnormen, doch in den Hnden unbe-
fugter oder unqualifizierter Personen wird er zu einer Gefahrenquelle. bermige Rntgenbestrahlung ist fr den menschlichen Orga-
nismus schdlich.
Deswegen sind hinreichende Vorsichtsmanahmen erforderlich, um zu verhindern, daunbefugte oder unqualifizierte Personen solche
Gerte bedienen oder sich selbst und andere Personen deren Bestrahlung aussetzen knnen.
Vor Inbetriebnahme dieses Apparats sollte sich das qualifizierte und befugte Bedienungspersonal mit den geltenden Kriterien fr den ge-
fahrlosen Strahleneinsatz durch sorgfltiges Studium des Hefts Nr. 60 der Internationalen Kommission fr Strahlenschutz (ICRP) vertraut
machen: Empfehlungen der Internationalen Kommission fr Strahlenschutz und anderer nationaler Normenbehrden.
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR V2_P
REV 3 sm 2308530100
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER TITLE PAGE
REVISION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
1 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
11 Chapter Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
12 Inspection for Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SECTION 2 DESCRIPTION OF DELIVERED EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SECTION 3 HOW TO USE THE CONSOLE IN INSTALLATION MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
31 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
32 Application and Installation modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
33 Description of the Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
34 Accessing the Generator or Gantry Installation Mode from the Console . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
35 Installation Menu Tree Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
36 Accessing the Different Installation Menus in the Tree Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
37 Saved Parameters and Checksum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
38 Reloading of Default (Initial) Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
39 Returning to the Application Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
310 Generator Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
3101 Gantry Present/Absent (PRS_A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
3102 Display of Parameters Following an Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
3103 Calendar and Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
3104 Visual Representation of Numerical Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
3105 Visual Display of Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
3106 Modification of a Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
3107 Entry of an AlphaNumeric Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
311 Principles of Generator Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
3111 Vocabulary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
3112 Use of the First Trigger/Second Trigger Buttons During Generator Installation . . . . . . 130
3113 Inhibit Conditions Due to Gantry Absence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
3114 Inhibit Conditions Due to Grid Absence/Presence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
3115 Displayed Messages During ExposureProducing Calibration Procedures . . . . . . . . . . 131
3116 Other Displayed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
SECTION 4 SITE PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
SECTION 5 INSTALLATION STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
i
REV 3 sm 2308530100
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
CHAPTER TITLE PAGE
2 CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
SECTION 2 GENERATOR CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
SECTION 3 GANTRY CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
SECTION 4 AEC CALIBRATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
SECTION 5 AEC CALIBRATION ON STEREOTIX 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
SECTION 6 RECALIBRATION OF REFERENCE OPTICAL DENSITY
IN NONSTEREOTIX 2 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
SECTION 7 CUSTOMER REQUESTED RECALIBRATION OF STEREOTIX 2 MODE
REFERENCE OPTICAL DENSITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3 JOB CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
JOB CARD IST 001 CALIBRATION OF HEATER CURRENT SCALE FACTOR . . . . . . . . 33
JOB CARD IST 002 CALIBRATION OF XRAY TUBE FOCAL BIAS VOLTAGE
SCALE FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
JOB CARD IST 003 CALIBRATION OF XRAY TUBE HEATER CURRENT . . . . . . . . . . 315
JOB CARD IST 004 CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL HV MEASUREMENT AND
SCALE FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
JOB CARD IST 005 CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL SENSITIVITY AS A
FUNCTION OF ITS VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
JOB CARD IST 006 SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
JOB CARD IST 007 CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A GIVEN
SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
JOB CARD IST 008 UNPACKING THE EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
JOB CARD IST 009 PHYSICAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
JOB CARD IST 010 CONNECTING THE CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
JOB CARD IST 011 CONNECTING TO THE AC SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
JOB CARD IST 012 LINE RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
JOB CARD IST 013 CALIBRATION OF FILM RECIPROCITY LAW FAILURE
COMPENSATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
JOB CARD IST 014 CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY FOR A GIVEN
SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
JOB CARD IST 015 MAGNIFICATION CORRECTION FOR A GIVEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . 397
JOB CARD IST 016 CALIBRATION OF XRAY TUBE MA MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . 3103
JOB CARD IST 017 CALIBRATION OF KV SCALE FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3107
JOB CARD IST 018 CALIBRATION OF PHOTOCELL IN STEREOTIX 2 POSITIONS . . . 3113
JOB CARD IST 019 CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY IN STEREOTIX 2
MODE FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3119
JOB CARD IST 020 AUTOMATIC XRAY TUBE WARMUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3127
JOB CARD IST 021 CHECKING AND ADJUSMENT OF LATERAL CENTERING OF
XRAY BEAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3129
ii
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHAPTER TITLE PAGE
JOB CARD IST 022 CHECKING BASIC SUPPLY VOLTAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3135

JOB CARD IST 023 CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION FORCE DETECTOR . . . . . . . . . 3137
JOB CARD IST 024 MINIMUM COMPRESSION/DECOMPRESSION FORCE TESTS . . . 3139
JOB CARD IST 025 CALIBRATION OF BREAST THICKNESS MEASUREMENT . . . . . . 3143
JOB CARD IST 026 CALIBRATION OF GRID POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3147
JOB CARD IST 027 CHECKING XRAY FILM FORMAT GEOMETRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3149
JOB CARD IST 028 LIGHT CENTERING CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3163
JOB CARD IST 029 CALIBRATION OF XRAY TUBE REFERENCE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . 3169
JOB CARD IST 030 CALIBRATION OF LATERAL, REAR, AND FRONT,
COLLIMATOR BLADE REFERENCE POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3173
JOB CARD IST 031 TEST FOR ABSENCE OF GRID LINES ON EXPOSED FILM . . . . . . 3177
JOB CARD IST 032 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF SIDE COVERS AND
PANELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3181
JOB CARD IST 033 PRELIMINARY GENERATOR AND GANTRY TESTING . . . . . . . . . 3185
JOB CARD IST 034 CHECKING SAFELIGHTING AND FILM PROCESSING . . . . . . . . 3191
JOB CARD IST 035 REPLACEMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3195
JOB CARD IST 036 ADJUSTMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3199
JOB CARD IST 037 JUMPERS AND SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3209
JOB CARD IST 038 REGULATORY AND SAFETY LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3213
JOB CARD IST 039 MANUAL DETERMINATION OF AOP STRATEGY FOR A GIVEN
SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3219
JOB CARD IST 040 SETTING OF ELEVATOR UPPER TRAVEL LIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3223
JOB CARD IST 041 GENERAL ERRORS DURING THE CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3227
JOB CARD IST 042 CONNECTING ROOM LAMPS AND ROOM DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3235
JOB CARD IST 043 DMR INSTALLATION FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3239
JOB CARD IST 044 SETTING PADDLE DEFORMATION PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . 3253
JOB CARD IST 045 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FOLLOWUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3255
JOB CARD IST 046 CHECKS ON PRE-EXPOSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3259
JOB CARD IST 047 CHECK OF VIEWBOX(ES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3265
JOB CARD IST 048 CHECK OF SENSITOMETRIC STABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3269
JOB CARD IST 050 A0 OPTIMIZATION FOR CONTACT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3273
JOB CARD IST 051 A0 OPTIMIZATION FOR THE MAGNIFICATION MODE . . . . . . . . . 3275
iii
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHAPTER TITLE PAGE
4 ERROR CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
SECTION 1 ERROR CODE STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
SECTION 2 ERROR CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
SECTION 3 ERROR CODES: KNOWN ROOT CAUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
5 SIGNAL LISTS/GLOSSARIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5I
6 RENEWAL PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6I
7 PLANNED MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7I
JOB CARD PM001 DMR PLANNED MAINTENANCE STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
JOB CARD PM002 SITE STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
JOB CARD PM003 REMOVE SYSTEM COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
JOB CARD PM004 CHECK AEC MAX EXPOSURE TIME SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
JOB CARD PM005 CHECK EMERGENCY STOP BUTTONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
JOB CARD PM006 CHECK COMPRESSION SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
JOB CARD PM008 CHECK CABLE GROUNDING AND XRAY TUBE SAFETY . . . . . . 719
JOB CARD PM009 INSPECT LEAD GLASS SHIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
JOB CARD PM010 CHECK HV UNIT AND HV CABLE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
JOB CARD PM011 CLEAN SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
JOB CARD PM012 CHECK +5V SUPPLY ON GENERATOR CPU BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
JOB CARD PM013 CHECK COLUMN UP/DOWN MOVEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
JOB CARD PM014 CHECK ARM ROTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
JOB CARD PM015 CHECK COMPRESSION FORCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
JOB CARD PM016 CHECK BREAST THICKNESS MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
JOB CARD PM018 CHECK PHOTOCELL POSITIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
JOB CARD PM019 CHECK FORMAT CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
JOB CARD PM020 CHECK TUBE HOUSING ARM DETENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
JOB CARD PM021 CHECK MAGNIFICATION SENSORS AND SID SENSORS . . . . . . . . 747
JOB CARD PM022 CHECK BUCKY AND TEST BUCKY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
JOB CARD PM023 CHECK STEREOTIX OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
JOB CARD PM024 CHECK CHAIR OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
iv
REV 3 sm 2308530100
REVISION HISTORY

$3/#&1
&12*/.
'1/- 3/ ".% /' &12*/.
6*3) '/,8
,/6*.( 40(1"%&2
&*3)&1 +*3

*' 1&0,"$&-&.3 /' 3)& 34#& #7 " 34#& ".%
40(1"%& /' 3)& 2/'36"1&
/1 +*3
*' 40(1"%& /' 3)& 2/'36"1& /.,7
/'36"1& 40(1"%& 01/5*%&2 3)& 42&1 6*3) 3)& /00/134.*37 3/ *.$1&"2& 3)&
!"7 *&,% ' *&6
34#& -*()3 #& $)".(&% 3/ #&$/-&

$/-0,*".3 1&("1%*.(
34#& /43043 ".% 2723&- 1&2/,43*/.
/5&-#&1
&5*2*/. *23/17 1&5 $/11&$3&%
&.&6", "132 %4& 3/ $)".(& '1/-
3/

".4"17

.,7 "5"*,"#,& +*3 *2
+*3

01/5*%*.( 34#& *2 ./3
*-0,&-&.3&% "2 '/1 ./6
&.&6", "132 $/11&$3*/. 3/ 1&-/5& 34#&
0%"3& /' 2/-& 2&15*$& -&.42 ."-&2 ".% 0"3)2
&03&-#&1

Generic SPR BUCge81369. Program: Optimized Planned Maintenance (Jamboree)
Create chapter 7 with PM job cards.
SPR BUCge56259: Introduce new generator interface board (400PL2)
21983693 in renewal parts.
Regulatory and Safety Labelling SPR BUCge81337
Added affix product id labels Job Card IST038
MQSA paddle adjustment. BUCge81771.

Added step 24 to ch. 1 sec. 5 Installation Steering, p. 141.
Updated ch. 6 renewal parts, reminders to order FMI 11468 when replacing
paddles in countries subject to MQSA (pages 679 and 689).
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION

NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER
Title page 3 3-1 through 3-276 3 6i & 6-ii 3
i through vi 3 4-1 through 4-20 3 6-1 through 6-94 3
1-1 through 146 3 5-i & 5-ii 3 71 through 754 3
2-1 through 24 3 5-1 through 5-54 3
NUMBER FORMAT REVISION

2308530100TPH A4 3
v
REV 3 sm 2308530100
This document is using the Conditional selection. It is a slave

document.
Note for To maintain this document it is mandatory to use the Master File
the Technical Writer 2309391100 as the Interleaf source.
This Master File contains a Read me which explains how to
proceed.
vi
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHAPTER 1 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
11 Chapter Overview
This chapter presents the Senographe DMR installation procedures. The wiring and room
layout requirements for the product are covered in the PreInstallation Manual.
12 Inspection for Damage
The Senographe DMR was completely inspected for proper operation and appearance before
shipment. However, it is necessary to inspect the product after the shipment is received. Visu-
ally inspect the packages for any apparent damage. If there are signs of damage, refer the mat-
ter to the shipping company immediately.
Open the packages and refer to the Product Delivery Instructions (PDI). Verify that items on
the list are present in the package. Carefully examine the contents for small parts.
SECTION 2
DESCRIPTION OF DELIVERED EQUIPMENT
D See the Pre-installation Manual for a description of the delivered equipment.

SECTION 3
HOW TO USE THE CONSOLE IN INSTALLATION MODE
31 Introduction
This section describes how to use the Senographe DMR console during installation.
32 Application and Installation modes
Throughout the Senographe DMR documentation, reference is made to the application mode
and to the installation mode to differentiate between normal operation of the product by a
doctor and operation of the product during installation.
Each time the Senographe DMR is turned on the software automatically starts up in applica-
tion mode.
For information on using the Senographe DMR in application mode, refer to the Operator
Manual.
Two major Senographe DMR components must be installed the generator and the gantry.
Therefore, there are two separate installation phases, one for the generator and one for the
gantry (see Section 34).
11
REV 3 sm 2308530100
33 Description of the Console

INSTALLATION
Illustration 11 shows the Senographe DMR console. When the Senographe DMR is in appli-
cation mode, the six keys below the display window correspond to the functions that their
respective symbol markings indicate (focal spot, track, filter, etc. refer to the Operator
Manual for explicit details).
On the other hand, when the Senographe DMR is in installation mode, the function of each
of these six keys depends on the procedure being performed and is displayed on the bottom
line of the display window adjacent to the corresponding key.
To enter installation mode, press the SETUP key once. To return immediately to
application mode, press the SETUP key again.
Illustration 13 shows the console before and after entry to the installation mode.
Section 1 of this illustration shows a typical console display during normal application mode
use.
Section 2 shows the appearance of the display window when, having started from application
mode, the SETUP key is pressed for the first time.
Section 4 shows the appearance of the display window when the password has already been
entered once, and starting from application mode, the SETUP key is pressed.
12
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 11
SENOGRAPHE DMR CONSOLE
INSTALLATION
13
REV 3 sm 2308530100
34 Accessing the Generator or Gantry Installation Mode from the Console

INSTALLATION
Menu access paths: SETUP/GENE/INSTAL OR SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL
To access the generator or gantry installation mode starting from application mode, follow
this sequence:
1. Press the SETUP key .
2. For access to the generator and gantry installation menus, change the position of the in-
stallation menu enable switch (switch B18 on generator CPUboard 400PL3) from its
position prior to power-up to the opposite position (see Illustration 12).
The installation menus can also be accessed by password. Select the PASSWORD key,
enter your password (given at the training course) (see Illustration 13, Section 3).
3. Select the subassembly to be installed (GENE or ARM for generator or gantry, respec-
tively).
4. For the gantry ONLY, press the VALID key.
5. Select the INSTAL menu.
Note: The MAINTENANCE menu is not accessible during installation of the Senographe
DMR.
6. You now have access to the installation menus of the subassembly selected (generator
or gantry).
Note: The position of the installation menu enable switch is memorized each time the Seno-
graphe DMR is turned on. Until the machine is again turned off (or the default parame-
ters are reloaded via the generators CLEAR menu, see Section 38), this memorized
position is the installation-menu-access-disabled position, and the opposite position is
the installation-menu-access-enabled position. The significance of the switchs position
thus depends upon its position at powerup.
When you have finished using the Senographe DMR installation mode, you must
CAUTION turn off the Senographe DMR before handing over the machine to the user. In this
way, when the machine is turned on again, access to the installation mode will be
automatically locked out (see Note above).
Illustration 13 shows the sequence for accessing generator installation mode.
14
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 12
LOCATION OF INSTALLATION MENU ENABLE SWITCH
INSTALLATION
GENE CPU BOARD 400PL3
B1
?
P1 P2
15
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 13
SEQUENCE FOR ENTERING GENERATOR INSTALLATION MODE
INSTALLATION
1
APPLICATION
SETUP
SMALL AUTO AUTO +0 A
Nb of exposures

VIEW MEDICAL LANGUAGE PASSWD
16
REV 3 sm 2308530100
INSTALLATION
APPLICATION
SETUP
Nb of exposures
ENTER YOUR PASSWORD:
1 2 3 4 5 6
PASSWORD
4
APPLICATION
SETUP
Nb of exposures

GENE MEDICAL LANGUAGE ARM CLINIC
GENE ARM

17
REV 3 sm 2308530100
5
INSTALLATION
APPLICATION
SETUP
GEMS-E VX.XX GEN DD.MM.YY
INSTAL MAINT

GENE ARM

INSTAL
6
APPLICATION
SETUP
LAST INSTAL (D/M/Y H:M) 28/03/96 10:24
CKSUM GENE
GENE ARM

INSTAL

CKSUM GENE
18
REV 3 sm 2308530100
35 Installation Menu Tree Structure
INSTALLATION
The various installation menus are accessible via a tree structure which is shown in Illustra-
tions 1-5 through 113.
19
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Blank page
INSTALLATION
110
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 14
MEDICAL
INSTALLATION MENU TREE STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
KEY
(values) indicates that several values can be displayed by rotat-
ing the kV knob.
APPLICATION MODE
(value) indicates that a single value is displayed or can be mod-
ified or entered.
indicates that rotation of the kV knob will either display

other parameter values, or modify a digit or character in
a string being entered.
These selections appear only when
indicates that the 2nd trigger button must be pressed in the password has been entered.
order to perform the calibration (see associated instruc- Select arm/gene install
tions for the calibration in question before using these
menus). GENE MEDICAL LANGUAGE ARM PASSWORD
Enter your password

1 2 3 4 5 6
installation steering step

13.b.xi
GEMS-E (gen soft version) GEN (release date) MEDICAL SETUP Select LANGUAGE ARM ACCESS
INSTAL MAINT SPEED FORCE DECOMP BEEP HEIGHT FILM FRANC ENGL DEUTS ESPAN ITALI PORTU VALID
see illustration 1-6 COMPRESSION SPEED WITH BEEP GEMS-E (Arm soft version) ARM (release date)
CASSETTE DETECTION
FAST SLOW YES NO INSTAL MAINT
YES
YES NO
MAX COMPRESS FORCE daN: (value)

+ VAL
END OF EXPOSURE DECOMP
YES NO
DECOMPRESSION HEIGHT : xx cm
+ VALID
A
see illustration 1-12
111
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 15
INSTALLATION MENU TREE STRUCTURE (contd)
SETUP
These selections appear only when the password
INSTALLATION
KEY has been entered. See illustration 15.
(values) indicates that several values can be displayed by rotat- APPLICATION MODE
Select arm/gene install
GENE MEDICAL LANGUAGE ARM PASSWORD
GENE ARM
ing the kV knob.
ified or entered.
GEMS-E (gen soft version) GEN (release date)
INSTAL MAINT
G
indicates that rotation of the kV knob will either display PADDLE PARAMETERS
18x24 24x30 MAG STEREO
A
indicates that the 2nd trigger button must be pressed in
18x24 PARAM display (2 values)
order to perform the calibration (see associated instruc-
see illustration 112 Same menu
tions for the calibration in question before using these LAST CALIB (D/M/Y H:M) CHANGE
structure
menus). CKSUM GENE as 1824
sections 37 and 38
CHECKSUM OF SAVED PARAM GENERATOR CALIBRATION

18x24 PARAM CHANGE offs= (values)
CKSUM CLEAR CONFIG GENE AOP DOSE PROD
NEXT VALID
USING THE CLEAR FUNCTION WILL ENTAIL A
COMPLETE RECALIBRATION OF THE
WARNING SENOGRAPHE DMR GENERATOR AND AEC. GENERATOR CONFIGURATION THIS MENU IS
OF NO USE TO
THIS MENU CONSISTS OF PRO- AUTOMATIC EXPOSURE AOP
DUCTION TEST PROCEDURES
THE SERVICE THAT ARE OF NO USE TO THE
CONFIG DISP IMAGE DATE EVOLUTION ENGINEER. SERVICE ENGINEER.
FILM APOLLO PELOTE
CLEAR ALL SAVED PARAM
VALID
Not used for DMR
installation steering step 13.a. G
GENERATOR CALIBRATION
section 3102 TUBE HTR_SCL BIAS KV mA_meas Not applicable
GENERATOR CONFIGURATION EXPOSURE PARAM DISPLAY GENERATOR EVOLUTION for DMR
TUBE PMAX MASMAX PRES. T_MAX RINIT YES NO 300PL3
REINITIALIZING THE TUBE
WARNING
WILL ENTAIL RECALIBRATING
THE TUBE HEATER CURRENT.
USE THE FUNCTION ONLY WHEN
YOU HAVE REPLACED THE X
B C
RAY TUBE.
TYPE OF TUBE 2foc/2met/1ang MAX AUTHORIZED POWER POWE = (value) section 3103
FOCUS ANODE MODEL DCHARG 3.0KW 3.5KW 4.0KW 4.5KW 5.0KW REINITIALISATION DATE and TIME UPDATE WITH THE BOARD 300PL3
INIT_TUBE INIT_ENERGY DAY HOUR FILM (AOP)
YES NO
CELL ALGO COPY TYPE
FOCUS SELECTION bifocus TYPE OF ANODE 2Metal MAX MAS ALLOWED mAs=(value) MAX EXPOSURE TIME T(s)=(value)
DATE DD/MM/YY (values) TIME HH:MN:SS (values)
SINGLE DUAL DM SMSA SMDA NEXT VALID NEXT VALID
NEXT VALID NEXT VALID
E
MODEL OF TUBE : (Maxiray 70THF) SUBSYSTEMS PRESENCE TUBE REINITIALISATION
Not used for DMR PRSB PRSDS PRSIDC VALID
GS412 70THF 70THD
RESET TUBE ENERGY (Reset done)

GS412 70THF 70THD
VALID VALID VALID
ARM PRESENCE
YES NO
DIGITAL STATION PRESENCE
YES NO
IMAGE DETECTOR CTRL PRES.
YES NO
VALID
D
112
REV 3 sm 2308530100
GENE
ILLUSTRATION 16
B
TUBE HTR_SCL
INSTALLATION
KEY
ing the kV knob.
(value) indicates that a single value is displayed or can be mod- TUBE HTR_SCL BIAS KV mA_meas
ified or entered.


C
Job Card IST 001
menus).
TUBE CALIBRATION
HEATER HTR_D CTUBE CTubH WarmUp
Job Card IST 020 HTR_SCL HARDWARE CALIB
TRACK1 TRACK2
WARNING
Same menu
Job Card IST 003 THE TWO MENUS CTUBE AND CTUBH ARE
TUBE WARMUP x/y kV structure as
NOT INTENDED FOR SERVICE USE. for TRACK1
HEATER: Select Foc/Track
HTR_SCL HARDWARE TRACK 1
LF/MO SF/MO LF/RH SF/RH
CALIB PARAM
HTR_DELTA Parameters HTR_SCL HARDWARE TRACK 1 PARAM HTR_SCL track 1 x=(2 values)
LF/MO SF/MO LF/RH SF/RH 1st pt 2nd pt calcul CHANGE
THIS MENU IS ONLY ACCESSIBLE WHEN

HEATER: LF/MO CALIB HEATER: SF/MO CALIB HEATER: LF/Rh CALIB HEATER: SF/Rh CALIB BOTH FILAMENT CURRENT VALUES HAVE
BEEN MEASURED AND ENTERED VIA THE
CALIB PARAM CALIB PARAM CALIB PARAM CALIB PARAM Same menu 1ST PT AND 2ND PT MENUS.
structure as
Same menu for 1st pt
structure as PARAM HTR_SCL modif track 1 x=(value)
for LF/MO VALID
NEXT VALID
HEATER: LF/MO CALIB
C_GAIN I_VALUE Same menu
structure as
for LF/MO LF/Mo HTR_DELTA display DEL_x=(3 values) HTR_SCL CALIB TRACK1 PT1 ref=(value)
CMDE CALIB Measi THE MENU ICH_M, WHICH IS USED TO ENTER
THE MEASURED FILAMENT CURRENT VALUE
FOUND IN THE CALIB MENU, IS ONLY ACCESSI-
BLE AFTER USE OF THE CALIB MENU.
Cathode Gain LF/MO GK_Ax=(3 values)
Currents LF/MO (28 values kV/A)
CHANGE CHANGE
HTR_SCL TRACK1 PT1 modif ref=(value) HTR_SCL TRACK1 1st point meas=(value)
Modif LF/MO cathode gain GK_Ax=(value) Currents LF/MO modif (value) (value)
113
REV 3 sm 2308530100
GENE
ILLUSTRATION 17
C
BIAS KV mA_meas
INSTALLATION
KEY
ing the kV knob. GENERATOR CALIBRATION
(value) indicates that a single value is displayed or can be mod- TUBE HTR_SCL BIAS KV mA_meas
ified or entered.
Job Card IST 016
other parameter values, or modify a digit or character in mA MEASUREMENT
B CALIB PARAM

order to perform the calibration (see associated instruc- Job Card IST 002
tions for the calibration in question before using these Job Card IST 017 mA MEASURE CALIBRATION
menus). kV CALIBRATION CALIB I_MEAS CALCUL
CALIB PARAM
FOCAL BIAS VOLTAGE
CALIB PARAM VOLTAGE
THIS MENU IS ONLY ACCESSIBLE WHEN X
kV PARAMETERS x=(2 values) RAY TUBE CURRENT HAS BEEN MEASURED
AND ENTERED VIA THE CALIB AND
I_MEAS MENUS.
CHANGE
FOCAL BIAS VOLTAGE CALIB
mA MEASUREMENT CALC
1st pt 2nd pt calcul FOCAL BIAS VOLT display x=(2 values)
VALID
CHANGE PARAM kV MODIF x=(value)
NEXT VALID MEASURED CURRENT meas=(value)
FOCAL BIAS VOLT 1st pt
CALIB MeasV NEXT VALID
FOCAL BIAS VOLT modif x=(value)

THIS MENU IS ONLY ACCESSIBLE WHEN NEXT VALID
1ST PT FOCAL BIAS VOLTAGE VALUE HAS
BEEN MEASURED VIA THE CALIB MENU.
kV CALIBRATION mA MEASURE CALIBRATION meas=x mA
FOCAL BIAS VOLT measure meas=(value) 1st pt 2nd pt calcul MEASUR
NEXT VALID
THIS MENU IS ONLY ACCESSIBLE WHEN THIS MENU IS ONLY ACCESSIBLE WHEN
BOTH FOCAL BIAS VOLTAGE VALUES HAVE BOTH HV VALUES HAVE BEEN MEASURED
BEEN MEASURED AND ENTERED VIA THE AND ENTERED VIA THE 1ST PT AND 2ND PRESSING THE MEASUR KEY UP-
1ST PT AND 2ND PT MENUS. PT MENUS. DATES THE DISPLAYED VALUE OF
Same menu THE THEORETICAL MEASURED X
FOCAL BIAS VOLT calcul structure as RAY TUBE CURRENT VALUE
for 1st pt
FOCAL BIAS VOLT 2nd pt VALID VALID
FOCAL BIAS VOLT 1st pt ref=70.0
CALIB MeasV mA MEASUREMENT PARAMETER f/mA=(value)
CHANGE
FOCAL BIAS VOLT Display Focus/Track kV CALIB 1st point ref=(value) kV
THIS MENU IS ONLY ACCESSIBLE WHEN
2ND PT FOCAL BIAS VOLTAGE VALUE HAS CHANGE
BEEN MEASURED VIA THE CALIB MENU. REF CALIB kV_M mA MEAS PARAM MODIF f/mA=(value)
THIS MENU IS ONLY ACCESSIBLE WHEN NEXT VALID

1ST PT KV VALUE HAS BEEN MEASURED
FOCAL BIAS VOLT 2nd pt ref=250.0 FOCAL BIAS VOLT measure meas=(value) VIA THE CALIB MENU.
NEXT VALID FOCAL BIAS VOLTAGE modif x/y (value) kV REFERENCE 1st point ref=(value) kV kV CALIB 1st point MEASURED kV 1st meas=(value)
NEXT VALID NEXT VALID NEXT VALID
114
REV 3 sm 2308530100
(GENE)
ILLUSTRATION 18
INSTALLATION MENU TREE STRUCTURE (contd) AOP
INSTALLATION
KEY D
(values) indicates that several values can be displayed by rotat- CELL COPY
ing the kV knob.
AUTOMATIC EXPOSURE AOP
CELL ALGO COPY TYPE
ified or entered.
default = A nSC > E SCR
indicates that rotation of the kV knob will either display Job Card IST 007
a string being entered. PARAMETERS DUPLICATION (fsc) (screen) > (fsc) (screen)
SOURCE TARG COPY
CELL CALIBRATION
HV/DAC PM/HV STER
E
menus).
Job Card IST 004 SOURCE CHOICE(fsc)/(scr/nscr) TARGET CHOICE (fsc)/(scr/nscr) ENABLE COPY
PM_HV/DAC CALIBRATION Job Card IST 005 SCREEN FSC SCREEN FSC VALID
FREQ/HV HV/DAC PM/PM_HV calibration

CALIB PARAM
PM_HV/DAC Calibration Job Card IST 018
CALIB PARAM SCREEN PRESENT (yes/no) SCREEN PRESENT (yes/no)
FREQUENCY/PM_HV GAIN
PM/PM_HV PARAM display x=(3 values) YES NO YES NO
CALIB PARAM
PM/PMHV calibration CHANGE
SOURCE FSC CHOICE FSC=(fsc) TARGET FSC CHOICE FSC=(fsc)
FREQ/PM_HV GAIN display F/HV=(value) PM_HV/DAC Calibration
FSC=A FSC=B FSC=C FSC=D FSC=E FSC=A FSC=B FSC=C FSC=D FSC=E
CHANGE START
PM/PM_HV PARAM change x=(value)
NEXT VALID
FREQ/PM_HV GAIN change F/HV=(value)

NEXT VALID PM_HV/DAC PARAM display x=(2 values) STEREOTIX CELL calib grid present/absent
CHANGE CALIB PARAM
FREQUENCY/PM_HV GAIN ref=(value)

REF CALIB HV_M CALC PM_HV/DAC PARAM change x=(value) STEREOTIX CELL calib STEREOTIX PARAM display x=(4 values)
NEXT VALID CELL CALIB CALC CHANGE
Send PM/HV ref FREQ/PM_HV calcul

START STOP VALID STEREOTIX PARAM change x=(value)
Cell Selection STEREOTIX CELL calib
NEXT VALID
FREQ/PM_HV REF modif ref=(value) NORMAL LEFT CENT RIGHT
NEXT VALID FREQ/PM_HV Measure meas=(value)
NEXT VALID
STEREOTIX CELL calib calc
default=+7.000E+2
VALID
115
REV 3 sm 2308530100
(GENE)
ILLUSTRATION 19
INSTALLATION MENU TREE STRUCTURE (contd) E ALGO
INSTALLATION
KEY
AUTOMATIC EXPOSURE AOP
PM YIELD REF ENERGY
ing the kV knob. CELL ALGO COPY TYPE (CELL GAIN)
ified or entered.
AEC/AOP CALIBRATION
FSC=A FSC=B FSC=C FSC=D FSC=E
a string being entered. D D STATUS: (VALUE)
indicates that the 2nd trigger button must be pressed in A B C
order to perform the calibration (see associated instruc- Same menu
tions for the calibration in question before using these structure
menus). as FSC=A
AEC/AOP CALIBRATION FSC=(fsc)
VALID NAME TYPE STRAT CALIB
Job Card IST 006
Job Card IST 006
FSC validation Job Card IST 006
Select FSC Name FSC (fsc)=(name) ALGORITHM CALIBRATION
YES NO Job Card IST 006
NEXT VALID PM_yld LNRT Energ Corr
SCREEN/FILM STRATEGY
THIS MENU IS CURRENTLY

MEDIUM SLOW FAST V_SLOW V_FAST S_FAST
NONFUNCTIONAL.
Job Cards IST 014 and IST 019
PM YIELD
Job Card IST 007 REFERENCE ENERGY
CALIB PARAM CONFIG
F
SCREEN GRID CALIB
REF_ENERGY CALIBRATION mAs=(value)
FILM/SCREEN CALIBRATION mAs CALIB OD_MS CALC CELL MODE SELECTION

SCREEN PRESENT
YES NO
CALIB PARAM F REF_ENERGY PARAM menu
GAMMA ENR_R OD_R SCALE D_STEP
NORMAL STEREO
REF ENERGY calculation for Stereotix 2 mode

FSC PARAM display REF ENERGY CALIBRATION VALID
CALIBRATION WITH GRID
CONFIG PARAM REFERENCE ENERGY display OD_x=(7 values)
YES NO
REFERENCE ENERGY display ENERG=(value) CHANGE
Measured density OD=(value)
FILM/SCREEN CALIBRATION CHANGE
NEXT VALID
THICK CALIB CALC
Select Configuration THE VALUE OF ENERG IS
CALCULATED DURING THE
Mo/Mo Mo/Al Mo/Rh Rh/Al Rh/Rh WARNING CALIBRATION PROCEDURE REFERENCE ENERGY change OD_x=(value)
AND MUST NEVER BE MODI-
FIED MANUALLY FOR ANY NEXT VALID
Select plexi thickness x cm REASON WHATSOEVER.
FSC PARAM display x=(6 values) mAs Selection mAs=(value)
2 cm 4 cm 6 cm PARAMETERS calculation
CHANGE NEXT VALID REFERENCE ENERGY display GAMMA=(value) REFERENCE ENERGY display OD_r=(value)
VALID
CHANGE CHANGE
Same menu
FILM/SCREEN PARAM change x=(value) structure as
THE VALUE OF GAMMA IS for OD_R
NEXT VALID CALCULATED DURING THE REFERENCE ENERGY change OD_r=(value)
WARNING CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
AND MUST NEVER BE MODI- NEXT VALID
FIED MANUALLY FOR ANY
REASON WHATSOEVER.
116
REV 3 sm 2308530100
(GENE)
ILLUSTRATION 110
INSTALLATION MENU TREE STRUCTURE (contd) F ALGO
INSTALLATION
KEY
(values) indicates that several values can be displayed by rotat- ALGORITHM CALIBRATION
LNRT MAG.
ing the kV knob.
PM_yld LNRT Energ Corr
(TIME RECIP. CORR.
ified or entered.
FAIL.)
indicates that rotation of the kV knob will either display E E
a string being entered. Job Card IST 015
MAGNIFICATION CORRECTION
indicates that the 2nd trigger button must be pressed in Job Card IST 013 CALIB PARAM
order to perform the calibration (see associated instruc- TIME RECIPROCITY FAILURE fsc name
tions for the calibration in question before using these HEATER REFEN LNRT PARAM
menus).
LNRT PARAM display x=(3 values) MAGNIFICATION CALIB. Config:contact/magnify

HEATER CALIBRATION MAGNIF. PARAM display x=(2 values)
CHANGE CONFIG CALIB CALC
CALIB PARAM CALIB REF_ENERGY OF LNRT CHANGE
OD_ref SCALE MAS CALIB
LNRT PARAM change x=(value) MAGNIFICATION CALIB calc
NEXT VALID VALID
MAGNIF. PARAM change x=(value)
HEATER PARAM DISPLAY Kv=(3 values) I=(value) NEXT VALID
CHANGE
CONTACT CONFIGURATION
TIME RECIPROCITY FAILURE THICK.=x cm YES NO
HEATER PARAM MODIF Kv=(value) I=(value)
CALIB OD_mea CALC
NEXT VALID REF ENERGY PARAM DISPLAY OD_x=(7 values) MAGNIFICATION CALIB. x cm
CHANGE THICK CALIB
RECIPROCITY FAIL.:calc
TIME RECIPROCITY FAILURE
VALID
REF ENERGY PARAM MODIF OD_x=(value) Select plexi thickness MAGNIFICATION CALIB.
NEXT VALID 2 CM 4 CM 6 CM
MEASURED OPTICAL DENSITY=(value)
NEXT VALID
CALIB REF_ENERGY OF LNRT mAs=(value)

REF ENERGY PARAM DISPLAY mAs=(value) CALIB OD_mea CALC
REF ENERGY PARAM DISPLAY OD_r=(value)
CHANGE
CHANGE
CALIB REF. ENERGY calc

REF ENERGY PARAM MODIF OD_r=(value) REF ENERGY PARAM MODIF mAs=(value) VALID
CALIB REF_ENERGY OF LNRT
MEASURED DENSITY OD=(value)
NEXT VALID
117
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ARM
ILLUSTRATION 111
INSTALLATION MENU TREE STRUCTURE (contd) A
INSTALLATION
KEY
Select arm/gene install
0004
INSTAL
(values) indicates that several values can be displayed by rotat- GENE MEDICAL LANGUAGE ARM
ing the kV knob.
ified or entered. 0005
ARM ACCESS
indicates that rotation of the kV knob will either display VALID
other parameter values, or modify a digit or character in THIS MENU CONSISTS OF PRODUCTION
TEST PROCEDURES THAT ARE OF NO USE
a string being entered. 5001 TO THE SERVICE ENGINEER.
GEMS-E (gen soft version) STA (release date)
indicates that the 2nd trigger button must be pressed in INSTAL
5200
menus). LAST CALIB (D/M/Y H:M) (date value) (time value) ROT. SENSOR PRESENCE
CKSUM TEST CALIB CONFIG ENDUR DMT YES NO
5210
5220 5230
CHECKSUM OF SAVED PARAM 5250
INSTALLATION TESTS ARM CONFIGURATION
ARM CALIBRATION
CHSUM CLEAR
STRENGTH CUTOFF TUBE COLLIM CASSET BUCKY CAMERA ANGLE
THICK COMP FORMAT GRID TUBE ANGLE
USING THE CLEAR FUNCTION
5211 WILL ENTAIL A COMPLETE RE 0999
CALIBRATION OF THE Not used
CHECKSUM DONE WARNING 9 CAMERA FORMAT
SENOGRAPHE DMR GANTRY. 529
0 6X6 8X8
5212
5221
BELT STRENGTH
5227
CALIB PARAM
G 5446
POWER CUTOFF TEST 18x24 / 24x30 HEIGHT DIFF.: NO
DEFAULT PARAMETERS
VALID Job Card IST 029 5310
VALID YES NO
TUBE HOUSING ANGULATION
544
THIS MENU CONSISTS OF PRODUCTION
TEST PROCEDURES THAT ARE OF NO USE
TO THE SERVICE ENGINEER.
G H J K CALIB PARAM
5
CASSETTE DETECT PRESENCE
YES NO
5311 523
HOUSING ANGULATION CALIB COLLIMATOR CONFIGURATION 2
EXPOSE MEASURE S.I.D Calcul FRONT_B TYPE MARG_L MARG_R MARG_F
5393
531
Calib Exposure mAs: (value) HOUSING ANGULATION
4 PARAM
+ VALID AREF SAME
MENU
5316
STRUC-
ARM INSTALLATION exposure
TURE
VALID Job Card IST 027 5302
5312 5313 5315 AS
TUBE ANGULAT. MEASURE mm (value) SOURCE IMAGE DISTANCE mm : (value) REFERENCE ANGLE (Rd) : (value) LATERAL COLL MARGIN (mm)
MARG_ : (value)
0006 + VALID
NEXT VALID NEXT VALID NEXT VALID L
ARM: ADJUST EXPOSURE
544
COLLIMATOR TYPE:7
V1 V2
V3 V4
544
4
FRONT BLADE PRESENCE
0005
YES NO
ARM INSTALLATION exposure end
VALID installation steering step 13.b.iv 5231
TUBE HOUSING ANGULATION
YES NO
118
REV 3 sm 2308530100
(ARMINSTAL)
ILLUSTRATION 112
INSTALLATION MENU TREE STRUCTURE (contd) CALIB
G
INSTALLATION
KEY
(values) indicates that several values can be displayed by rotat- THICK COMP
ing the kV knob. 5250
ARM CALIBRATION
ified or entered. THICK COMP FORMAT GRID TUBE ANGLE
indicates that rotation of the kV knob will either display 5251 5270
Job Card IST 025 Job Card IST 023 Job Card IST 030 5290
other parameter values, or modify a digit or character in COMPRESSION ARM ROTATION
BREAST THICKNESS CALIB COMPRESSION CALIBRATION XRAY FORMAT
CONTACT MAGNIF FORCE LIMIT CALIB PARAM CALIB PARAM
tions for the calibration in question before using these COMP. ARM ROTATION PARAM
menus). MIN MAX CALCUL
J H K A
MIN ANGLE CALIB MAX ANGLE CALIB
* Job Card IST 024 (Value) (Value)
5252 5257 5271
CONTACT MODE THICKNESS MAGNIF MODE THICKNESS FORCE DETECTOR CALIB
CALIB PARAM CALIB PARAM CALIB PARAM
5253 5258 5272 * 5172

COMP. ARM ROTATION CALIB
CONTACT MODE THICK CALIB MAGNIF MODE THICK CALIB FORCE DETECTOR CALIB FORCE DETECTOR PARAMETERS
MIN MAX CALCUL
<5daN >15daN <5daN >15daN MEASURE CALCUL MEASURE CALCUL
5276
5254 5259 5273/5283 COMP MOTOR CURRENT LIMIT
CONTACT MODE THICK PARAM MAGNIF MODE THICK PARAM FORCE DETECTOR PARAMETERS CALIB PARAM
OFFSET ELASTIC 18x24 24x30 OFFSET ELASTIC 0daN 3daN. . . . . . . . . . . .27daN
5255 Not used for DMR 5277 5278

5281
CONTACT THICK OFFSET = (value) BUCKY 24x30 THICK DELTA = (value) FORCE DETECTOR MEASURES COMPRESSION SAFETY CALIB COMP CURRENT LIMIT PARAM (value) %
NEXT VALID NEXT VALID 0daN 3daN 6daN 9daN 12daN 1>2 LIMIT_IC LIMIT_OC LIM_IC LIM_OC
5282
5279 5280
FORCE DETECTOR MEASURES
IN_COMPRESSION LIMIT % : (value) OUT OF COMP LIMIT % : (value)
5256 Not used for DMR 15daN 18daN 21daN 24daN 27daN 2>1
+ VALID + VALID
CONTACT THICK ELASTIC = (value) BUCKY 18x24 THICK DELTA = (value)
5260 5261 5274/5275

MAGNIF THICK OFFSET = (value) MAGNIF THICK ELASTIC = (value) FORCE DETECTOR PARAMETERS (value)
119
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 113 (ARMINSTAL)

INSTALLATIONMENU TREE STRUCTURE (contd)
INSTALLATION
KEY
H SET S10 TO 560 !
indicates that several values can be displayed by rotat-

X-RAY FORMAT (CALIB)
(values)
Job Card IST 030 5290
ing the kV knob.
X-RAY FORMAT
(value) indicates that a single value is displayed or can be mod- CALIB PARAM
ified or entered.
indicates that rotation of the kV knob will either display 5291

other parameter values, or modify a digit or character in X-RAY FORMAT CALIBRATION set SID to 560 !

COLLIM LIGHT
Job Card IST 028

J
order to perform the calibration (see associated instruc- 5309 5333
tions for the calibration in question before using these COLLIMATOR FORMAT CALIB LIGHT CENTRING CALIB set SID to 560 !
menus). DIFFR EXPOSE ALIGN COVERAGE
EXPOSE REF_L REF_R REF_F DIFFL
5335
MENU MENU LIGHT COVERAGE: (value in Motor Steps)
STRUC- STRUC- + VALID
TURE TURE
IDENTICAL IDENTICAL
5392 5293
TOLATERAL
REF_RXRAY FORMAT REF TO REF_R 5336
CALIB TRACK MOLY: mAs=(value)
+ VALID MEASURE S.I.D Calcul LIGHT ALIGNMENT : (value in Motor Steps)
+ VALID
5299
ARM INSTALLATION exposure 5295
VALID LATERAL REF MEASURE (mm) : (value)
NEXT VALID 5343
0006 CORR REAR FORMAT
MEASURE S.I.D Calcul
5301
SOURCE IMAGE DISTANCE mm : (value) 5345
NEXT VALID SOURCE IMAGE DISTANCE mm=(value) 5338
NEXT VALID CALIB TRACK MOLY: mAs=(value)

0005 + VALID
5339
VALID 5344 ARM INSTALLATION exposure
REAR DIFF MEASURE mm=(value) VALID
NEXT VALID
0006
5340
CORR LATERAL FORMAT

MEASURE S.I.D Calcul
5241 5342
SOURCE IMAGE DISTANCE mm : (value) 0005
LATERAL DIFF MEASURE mm=(value)
VALID NEXT VALID
VALID
120
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 114
INSTALLATION
KEY
(ARMINSTAL)
(values) indicates that several values can be displayed by rotat- J
ing the kV knob.
ified or entered.
X-RAY FORMAT (PARAMS)
indicates that rotation of the kV knob will either display Job Card IST 030 5290
other parameter values, or modify a digit or character in XRAY FORMAT REFERENCE set SID to 560 !
a string being entered. CALIB PARAM

H 5236
menus). X-RAY FORMAT PARAMETERS
Delta X COLLIM LIGHT
Job Card IST 036
5300 5305 5308

DIFFERENCE DELTA_X (mm): (value) COLLIMATOR PARAMETERS LIGHT CENT PARAMETERS
CO_L CO_R CO_F STP_L STP_R ALIGN COVERAGE
NEXT VALID
5297 5307 5349

LATERAL COLL OPENING (mm): (value) REAR COLL MOTOR STEP (mm): (value) LIGHT COVERAGE: (value in mm)
5298 5306 5344

REAR COLL OPENING (mm): (value) LAT COLL MOTOR STEP (mm): (value) LIGHT ALIGNMENT: (value in mm)
5135
FRONT COLL OPENING (mm): (value)
NEXT VALID
121
REV 3 sm 2308530100
(ARMINSTAL)
ILLUSTRATION 115
INSTALLATION MENU TREE STRUCTURE (contd) CALIB
K
INSTALLATION
KEY
(values) indicates that several values can be displayed by rotat- GRID
ing the kV knob. 5250
ARM CALIBRATION
ified or entered. THICK COMP FORMAT GRID HOUSING ANGLE

XRAY FORMAT
CALIB PARAM
menus).
G J H A G
GRID TRAVEL
CALIB PARAM
5287
GRID PARAMETERS DISPLAY
OFFSET GAIN MIN MAX TESTS
ACCEL TPOSE SPEED SYNC DELTA TP_MAX
+4.000E+0
PARAMS VMAX PARAMS SYNC
+4000E+2 +2048E+3 +0000E+0
N_MIN N_MAX V_MIN V_MAX T_VLIN T_MIN T_MAX SLOPE DELTA TD_lim
+1200E+0 +3.300E+0 +5.000E+2 +1.500E+3 +9.00E+1 +7.000E+0 +1.964E1 +1.200E+1 +8.000E2 +2.800E+2 +2.500E+3
DEFAUT VALUES, GIVEN FOR INFORMATION ONLY. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CHANGE THESE PARAMETERS!
122
REV 3 sm 2308530100
36 Accessing the Different Installation Menus in the Tree Structure
INSTALLATION
Once you have followed the installation mode access procedure given in Section 34, you
can go down into the various installation menus by selecting them progressively using the
six keys below the console display window (see Section 35).
To move upward in the tree structure, press the SETUP key once for each change
of level desired. This is useful for going from one branch of the tree structure to another dur-
ing installation procedures, or if you accidentally go into an unwanted branch.
37 Saved Parameters and Checksum
a. Parameters resulting from installation or nonproprietary maintenance procedures

are saved in two memory zones (one in the generator and one in the gantry) whose
contents are not lost when the DMR is switched off.
b. To perform a saved parameter memory checksum, go to the CKSUM menu for the
generator or gantry and run this function. You can now return to application mode
without receiving a checksum error message.
c. It is not mandatory to do a checksum each time you leave a menu. There is no risk
of losing data if you switch off the Senographe displaying checksum error from
generator (or gantry).
The only purpose of checksum error is to lock the application mode against any
random data change. When you perform the checksum you only tell the software
that you accept the data you have changed (that is, either data entered manually or
calibration data).
123
REV 3 sm 2308530100
38 Reloading of Default (Initial) Parameters

INSTALLATION
THE FUNCTIONS DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION ARE NORMALLY NEV-

WARNING ER USED AFTER THE DMR HAS LEFT THE FACTORY.
To reload the generator or gantry default parameters (prior to any installation or calibration
procedures), use the appropriate CLEAR menu. The use of this menu executes a software
powerup that is comparable to the very first hardware powerup of the generator or gantry.
When the generator CLEAR menu is used, the DMR leaves the installation menus and returns
to the application mode. In order to reaccess the installation mode after performing a genera-
tor CLEAR, you must change the position of the installation menu enable switch (see Section
34).
When the gantry CLEAR menu is used, the DMR returns to the gantry installation entry level
(SETUP/ARM/VALID).
Following use of the CLEAR menu, the software displays a CHECKSUM ERROR message.
All generator or gantry calibration procedures must be performed, followed by a CKSUM
to enable use of the new parameters.
USE OF THE GENERATOR CLEAR MENU RESETS, FROM A SOFTWARE

WARNING POINT OF VIEW, THE THERMAL CONDITION OF CRITICAL COMPO-
NENTS (TUBE, TUBE HOUSING, GENERATOR, ETC.) TO A COLD CONDI-
TION. THIS MEANS THAT THE SOFTWARE THERMAL PROTECTIONS
CAN NO LONGER DETECT AN EXCESSIVE TEMPERATURE RISE IMME-
DIATELY FOLLOWING USE OF THIS MENU.
THE GENERATOR CLEAR MENU MUST THEREFORE BE USED WITH

CARE, ESPECIALLY WHEN OPERATIONS JUST PRIOR TO ITS USE HAVE
SIGNIFICANTLY RAISED CRITICAL COMPONENT TEMPERATURES (e.g.
NUMEROUS HIGHPOWER AND/OR LENGTHY EXPOSURES).
The existing parameters are PERMANENTLY LOST when a CLEAR menu is exe-
CAUTION cuted a COMPLETE RECALIBRATION of the assembly (generator or gantry)
must therefore be performed.
124
REV 3 sm 2308530100
39 Returning to the Application Mode
INSTALLATION
To return to the application mode press the SETUP key n times, where n is the
number of levels that you have gone down the installation tree structure.
Note: If you have performed any calibration procedures, or otherwise changed any saved pa-
rameter values, you must perform a saved parameter memory checksum before return-
ing to the application mode (see Section 37) if you do not perform this checksum, then
you will receive a CHECKSUM ERROR message.
Note: If you switch off the DMR for any reason and then switch it on again, you must once
again change the position of the installation menu enable switch before being able to get
access to the installation mode (see Section 34).
310 Generator Configuration Parameters
3101 Gantry Present/Absent (PRES_B)
Menu access path: SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/CONFIG/PRES/PRES_B
The generator installation software provides access to a parameter called PRES_B (PRES-
ence_Arm), whose value can be set to either YES or NO. The value of PRES_B indicates,
from a generator software point of view, the presence or absence of the gantry, i.e. possibility
or not of communication with the gantry CPU.
The service engineer may set PRES_B to NO to isolate the generator from the gantry during
troubleshooting (from the point of view of the generator software, the gantry becomes a sim-
ple tube stand).
Following a generator CLEAR (see section 38) PRES_B takes on the value NO.
PRES_B is kept in the saved parameter memory, which means that its value is retained when
power is turned off. This means that if, during a service call, the service engineer has to set
PRES_B to NO it must be set back to YES before handing back the DMR to the customer.
The value of PRES_B can be set by following the menu access path shown above, selecting
YES or NO and performing a CKSUM.
125
REV 3 sm 2308530100
3102 Display of Parameters Following an Exposure

INSTALLATION
Menu access path: SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/DISP
To simplify the service engineers work, the software can display certain parameters follow-
ing an exposure. These parameters are displayed on the console display window in two
groups which appear alternately:
kv mAs mA Time I heater
and
offset photo-cell photo-cell corrected thickness

HV measurement photo-cell
result measurement
result
Where:
offset = offset of photo-cell measurement (dark current + electrical offset)

photo-cell measurement result = photo-cell/mA measurement
corrected photo-cell measurement result = corrected according to DMR configuration
thickness = breast thickness in equivalent cm of plexiglass.
This DISP parameter is turned on and off by following the menu access path shown above.
Select YES or NO. A CKSUM is NOT necessary because this parameter is not a saved param-
eter. When power is turned off, the value of DISP is lost and reverts to NO at the next power
up.
126
REV 3 sm 2308530100
3103 Calendar and Clock
INSTALLATION
Menu access path: SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/DATE
The generator CPU is equipped with a calendar and clock that are used for the following func-
tions:
D Thermal protection cooling algorithms, whether or not the generator is turned on.
D Memorization of the date and time of an equipment failure.
D Last date of access to the installation mode.
The last function makes it possible for a service engineer to verify the date and time of the
last service visit and also determine whether access to the installation modes was made by
unauthorized persons since that visit.
The date is modified by following the menu access path shown above, selecting DATE, then
NEXT and, finally, rotating the kv dial to obtain the desired day. Select NEXT
again and rotate the kv dial to obtain the desired month. Repeat once more to obtain the de-
sired year, then select VALID to confirm the date.
Note: The date is entered in the form DD/MM/YY (for example, if the date to be entered is Feb-
ruary 14th, 2001, you must enter 14/02/01).
The time is modified by following the menu access path shown above and then selecting
HOUR. Enter the time of day as explained above for the date, using the NEXT, kv dial and
VALID functions.
Note: The time of day is entered in 24-hour format, therefore, if the time of day is 3:13:27 pm,
you must enter 15:13:27.
Note: Following a generator CLEAR of saved parameters, the calendar and clock, as well as
the last installation mode access date, are initialized to the release date of the generator
software version at 0:00:00.
3104 Visual Representation of Numerical Parameters
When displayed on the console, most numerical values appear in the form of real numbers
in scientific notation floating point format with four significant figures.
Some examples are:
1.250E+3 = 1250.00
+4.345E1 = 0.4345
+1.000E+0 = 1.000
127
REV 3 sm 2308530100
3105 Visual Display of Parameter Values

INSTALLATION
A parameter value can be displayed on the DMR console by accessing the calibration menus
for the procedures that compute the parameter in question. Typically this is done when you
are at a menu choice between CALIB and PARAM. Select PARAM to display the parameter
value.
Note: If the calibration procedure computes more than one parameter, turning the kv
dial will display them one at a time in sequence.
As an example, looking at the values of scale factor K and offset voltage VOF of tube track
1 which are computed by the heater current scale factor calibration routine: follow the menu
access path SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/HTR_SCL/TRACK1/PARAM.
On the right of the first console display line appears the value of scale factor K. Rotate the
kv dial clockwise by one position. Now offset voltage VOF appears instead.
CAUTION DO NOT attempt to modify these calibrated parameter values.
3106 Modification of a Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement
Parameters are entered or modified in scientific notation form.
When at the parameter value modification or measurement entry level in the menu structure,
there are two possible selections: NEXT and VALID. Begin by selecting NEXT. This enables
modification of the first character to be entered. Successive selections of NEXT will enable
modification of each character to be entered.
Use the kv dial to modify the character being entered. Select VALID when all
characters are correctly entered.
NEVER modify a parameter value on a DMR that has already been calibrated un-
CAUTION less you have a specific reason. Doing so, in general, will necessitate entering the de-
fault parameter value(s) and completely recalibrating the subassembly
(generator or gantry) for the parameter value(s) in question.
128
REV 3 sm 2308530100
As an example, set the maximum exposure time to 5.7 (+5.700E+0) seconds, follow the menu
access path SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/CONFIG/T_MAX, select NEXT
INSTALLATION
and turn the kv dial to set the sign of the value to be entered (in this example,
the value is positive +). Select NEXT again. Turn the kv dial to set the value of the first digit
to 5. Continue selecting NEXT and turning the kv dial until you have input +5.700E+0 (man-
tissa sign and four digits plus exponent sign and one digit). If you make a mistake, select
NEXT repeatedly until you arrive at the faulty value, then correct it by rotating the kV dial.
If you truly wish to enter the parameter value, select VALID, keeping the above CAUTION
in mind before doing so! To exit the modification routine, press SETUP once.
Note: Pressing the VALID key is effective ONLY when the entire value, including exponent,
is displayed. This means that if you correct a digit after making a mistake, as described
above, you must press the NEXT key repeatedly until the entire parameter value is vis-
ible before being able to enter the new value using the VALID key.
3107 Entry of an AlphaNumeric Value
This is the case when entering screen pair names (seven characters maximum allowed).
The principle is identical to that used for parameter value entry as described in Section
3106 (repeated use of NEXT, kv dial and VALID).
Here, rotation of the kv dial gives access to the following characters:
The 26 letters of the alphabet
The ten digits from 0 to 9
The colon :
The choice of a screen pair name is confirmed by pressing VALID.
129
REV 3 sm 2308530100
311 Principles of Generator Calibration

INSTALLATION
3111 Vocabulary
The following key words are found throughout the generator installation menus:
CALIB designates a menu that steers you to the calibration procedure itself.
PARAM designates a menu that steers you to other menus that allow you to display and
modify parameters.
CHANGE designates a menu that allows you to modify a parameter.
REF designates a menu within a calibration procedure that allows you to modify the com-
mand input (mAs for reference energy, photo-cell HV for the frequency/HV calibration, heat-
er current for the heater current scale factor calibration, etc...).
CALCUL designates a menu that steers you to the execution of the computations necessary
to obtain the parameter values.
3112 Use of the First Trigger/Second Trigger Buttons During Generator Installation
In general, calibration computations are started by pressing the SECOND TRIGGER button
(the FIRST TRIGGER button is not used during installation).
After going down through the different menus, the final CALIB selection steers you to a
menu that has no second line displayed on the console display window (i.e. there are no more
menus to select). It is at this level that the calibration computation is started by pressing the
SECOND TRIGGER button.
This general rule does not apply, for practical reasons, when measurements on the gantry
are necessary (because the gantry and generator/console may be physically separated, the ser-
vice engineer cannot necessarily be near both at the same time). For example:
Calibration of photo-cell HV measurement. The command input is sent upon selection

of the START key and is removed upon selection of the STOP key. For this calibration
procedure, the service engineer has to measure the photo-cell HV on the photo-cell
board, which is attached to the gantry, and enter the result via the HV_M menu.
HV/DAC calibration. The computation is started upon selection of the START key and
stops automatically. A message appears on the console display to indicate the end of
the computation.
3113 Inhibit Conditions Due to Gantry Absence
The AOP calibration procedures (CELL and ALGO) need to exchange information with the
gantry CPU.
Therefore, before performing these calibration procedures, it is necessary to set the value of
PRS_A to YES (see Section 3101) otherwise, error messages indicating software absence
of the gantry will appear on the console display and access to the CALIB menus is inhibited
(only display and modification of parameters will be possible).
130
REV 3 sm 2308530100
3114 Inhibit Conditions Due to Grid Absence/Presence
INSTALLATION
Many of the AEC calibration procedures are performed with grid and without grid. For such
procedures, the gantry CPU indicates to the generator CPU whether or not the grid is present.
The calibration software will verify agreement between physical presence/absence of the
grid and the service engineers choice of calibration with grid or without grid. If there is dis-
agreement, error messages will appear and access to the CALIB menu will be inhibited.
3115 Displayed Messages During ExposureProducing Calibration Procedures
The following messages are displayed in the upper righthand corner of the console display
during calibration procedures that make Xray exposures:
Exposure number (when exposure is valid)

Arcing
Failure (return to application mode for explicit message)
Excessive temperature
End of series of exposures
Certain calibration procedures that make Xray exposures insert, in alternation with the
above messages, specific messages such as:
Too much plexi

Not enough plexi
Reduce HV, same point
3116 Other Displayed Messages
In general the software displays, as much as possible, messages indicating the phases of cal-
ibration such as:
Calibration end
Calcul done
SECTION 4
SITE PREPARATION
See the Pre-installation Manual for information on site preparation.
131
REV 3 sm 2308530100
SECTION 5
INSTALLATION STEERING
INSTALLATION
The installation of the DMR must be performed according to the CONTENT as

CAUTION well as the CHRONOLOGICAL ORDER given in this section. Failure to do so can
result in faulty calibration of the product and subsequent loss of performance.
Note: Use the installation flow chart (illustration 116) as a memo to assist you during the
installation.
Use calibration form (IST 043) to record all values obtained.
1. Unpack generator, gantry and accessories. See Job Card IST 008 UNPACKING THE
EQUIPMENT.
2. Physically place/anchor gantry, generator, console, protective glass screen, pedals, etc.
(see Job Card IST 009 PHYSICAL INSTALLATION).
3. Attach appropriate regulatory and safety labelling to the equipment according to local
regulations (see Job Card IST 038 REGULATORY AND SAFETY LABELLING).
The attachment of appropriate regulatory and safety labelling to the equipment is

CAUTION a LEGAL REQUIREMENT for operation of an Xray producing unit.
4. Remove all side covers and trim panels from generator and gantry (see Job Card IST
032 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF SIDE COVERS AND TRIM PANELS).
5. Inspect inside of generator and gantry for loose or disconnected cables, wires, connec-
tors, etc. Refer to MIS maps if necessary.
6. Connect cables between generator, console, and gantry and check the vent screw on the
HV tank(see Job Card IST 010).
7. Connect mains supply to generator and configure generator for mains voltage, frequen-
cy and number of phases (see Job Card IST 011 CONNECTION OF MAINS SUP-
PLY).
Do not attempt to turn on the DMR at this point. Continue following the Installa-
CAUTION tion Steering in the chronological order provided.
8. Measure mains line resistance and determine maximum allowable generator power (see
Job Card IST 012 LINE RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT).
Note: If a high-power installation (50 kW or more) is known to exist on the same mains circuit
as the DMR being installed, it is not necessary to measure line resistance. In this case,
set maximum generator power to 5.0 kW (maximum possible value) when you reach
step 13.a.ii below. DO NOT SET MAXIMUM GENERATOR POWER NOW. FOL-
LOW THE CHRONOLOGICAL ORDER OF THE INSTALLATION STEERING.
132
REV 3 sm 2308530100
9. Check basic supply voltages (see Job Card IST 022 CHECKING BASIC SUPPLY
VOLTAGES).
INSTALLATION
DO NOT ACCESS THE INSTALLATION SETUP MENUS DURING THIS
WARNING CHECK. FOLLOW THE PROCEDURE IN THE ORDER GIVEN. DO NOT
PERFORM ANY CHECKSUM OPERATIONS. EXTREMELY IMPORTANT
INFORMATION ABOUT THE INTEGRITY OF THE DMR RAM CONTENTS
CAN BE PERMANENTLY LOST IF THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE NOT FOL-
LOWED CORRECTLY.
10. Check jumpers and switches (see Job Card IST 037 JUMPERS AND SWITCHES).
11. Measure free space between floor and ceiling of the room.
If the available height is less than 2.5 meters (about 8.2 feet), perform job card IST 40
Setting of elevator upper travel limit.
12. Perform the initial powerup check.
VERY IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY:

WARNING
DO NOT ACCESS THE INSTALLATION SETUP MENUS UNTIL THE IN-
STRUCTIONS INDICATE TO DO SO. FOLLOW THE PROCEDURE IN THE
ORDER GIVEN. DO NOT PERFORM ANY CHECKSUM OPERATIONS. EX-
TREMELY IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THE INTEGRITY OF THE
DMR RAM CONTENTS CAN BE PERMANENTLY LOST IF THESE IN-
STRUCTIONS ARE NOT FOLLOWED CORRECTLY.
a. Turn on the DMR and wait for the autotests to execute.

b. Normally, the DMR will now be in application mode, in the exposure mode and
configuration that it was in when last turned off before leaving the factory.
THERE SHOULD NOT BE, IN ANY CIRCUMSTANCES, A CHECKSUM ER-

WARNING ROR MESSAGE ON THE CONSOLE (i.e. Checksum error (gen) AND/OR Arm
checksum error).
IF EITHER OR BOTH OF THESE MESSAGES APPEARS, COMPLETE THIS

INITIAL POWERUP CHECK AND RELOAD THE GENERATOR OR ARM
(OR BOTH) SAVED PARAMETERS USING THE DISKETTE (PN 2152250)
DELIVERED IN THE ACCESSORIES KIT. THIS DISKETTE IS LABELLED
WITH THE SAME PRODUCT LOCATOR NUMBER AS YOUR DMR. FILES
ARE IDENTIFIED GXXXX.DAT (GENERATOR) AND AXXXX.DAT (ARM),
XXXX BEING THE FACTORY SERIAL NUMBER. THERE SHOULD NOT BE
ANY CHECKSUM ERROR IMMEDIATELY AFTER THE CORRECT RE-
LOADING OF THESE PARAMETERS.
c. Change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch B18 on gener-
ator CPU board 400PL3, see section 34).
133
REV 3 sm 2308530100
d. Starting from application mode, select :

SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/DATE on the console.
INSTALLATION
e. If necessary, enter the correct date and hour.

13. Perform software configuration.
a. Perform generator software configuration.
Before beginning:
Turn on the DMR.
Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu en-
able switch (switch B1 on generator CPU board 400PL3, see section 34).
i. Choose console dialog display language:

Starting from application mode, select SETUP/LANGUAGE/language on the
console, where language is the desired console dialogue display language
(FRANC, ENGL, DEUTS, ESPAN, ITALI or PORTU).
Note: For compatibility with the information contained in this manual concerning menu paths,
select ENGL for installation of the DMR. When installation is complete, the language
will be changed to that of the country of installation.
ii. Set maximum generator output power.

Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/CONFIG/PMAX/pmax
on the console, where pmax is the maximum generator power determined from
the line resistance measurement performed in step 8. above. Possible values are
3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 4.5, and 5.0 kW.
Note: The default (and maximum possible) value is 5.0 kW.
iii. Set maximum Xray tube mAs.

Select SETUP/MASMAX on the console. Enter the maximum mAs value ac-
cording to local regulations using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the
kV dial. See sections 3105 and 3106.
Note: The default (and maximum possible) value is +6.000E+2 (600) mAs.
iv. Set maximum Xray exposure time.

Select SETUP/T_MAX on the console. Enter the maximum Xray exposure
time according to local regulations using the NEXT and VALID keys and ro-
tating the kV dial. See sections 3105 and 3106.
Note: The default (and maximum possible) value is +2.000E+1 (20) seconds.
v. Check Xray tube (model, focus, number of anode metals and anode angles)
type configuration:
134
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Select SETUP/ GENE/ INSTAL/ GENE/ CONFIG/ CONFIG/TUBE/

MODEL/XXXX. Check the type of tube installed or to be installed and set
INSTALLATION
the corresponding value:
GS412: for DMR V1 and V2
70THF: for DMR+ and V1 or V2 upgraded with Software V6.21 and DMR+
tube
70THD: only SENO 2000D
If the configuration is correct, skip directly to step vii below. Otherwise, con-
tinue with step vi.
vi. Check Xray tube type configuration:

Select SETUP/FOCUS/DUAL on the console.
Select SETUP/ANODE/DM on the console.
Select SETUP on the console, then verify that the console display now shows
the correct tube type as specified in step v above.
vii. Check AOP type configuration. Starting from step v above, select: SETUP/
SETUP/SETUP/AOP/FILM/TYPE
Check that Status shown is: A.
The following information on the choice of AOP type should be transmitted
to the physician. Three types are available:
Type A is AOP 4.01, as installed by default on DMR+ and DMR V2. It imple-
ments new AOP tables, with variable composition.
Type B is AOP 4.01, without variable composition. It is not widely used.
Type C is AOP 3.01, as installed on DMR V1. (no variable composition).
Recommended choice:
If there is already a DMR on site, select the same configuration.
If you have free choice, select AOP 4.01 with variable composition (type A).
If the physician requires it, select AOP 3.01 (type C)
b. Perform gantry software configuration.

i. Check the cassette detection presence configuration.
Starting from application mode select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/
CONFIG/CASSET/(YES or NO)
Enter NO for DMR V1
Enter YES for DMR V2 and DMR+
ii. Check the correct configuration of the 18x24 bucky.

CONFIG/BUCKY/18X24/24X30 Height diff.:YES/NO
Enter NO when buckies 18x24 have the same thickness than the bucky
24x30 (Standard choice for DMR V1 and DMR+),
Enter YES when buckies 18x24 are more higher than the bucky 24x30
(Standard choice for DMR V2).
135
REV 3 sm 2308530100
iii. Check the correct configuration of GRID acceleration.

INSTALLATION
CALIB/GRID/PARAMS/TESTS/ACCEL
Set ACCEL parameter to 1 (1.000E+0) for DMR+.
Set ACCEL parameter to 1 (4.000E+0) for DMR V1_P and V2_P.
iv. Set Xray tube housing configuration.
Starting from application mode, select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/
CONFIG/TUBE/YES on the console (the Xray tube housing is inclinable
on all DMRs).
Perform a gantry CKSUM and return to application mode. Check that NONE
of the following error messages appears on the console display:
S53 105/080 (incompatible housing configuration)
S53 105/081 (incompatible housing configuration)
S54 155/082 (incompatible tube type)
S54 155/083 (incompatible tube type)
v. Check label on collimator for type (V1 to V4).

CONFIG/COLLIM/TYPE
vi. Check the collimator front blade presence.
CONFIG/COLLIM/FRONT_B/YES or NO
In standard configuration, DMR V1 hardware has not a motorized Front
Blade.
The default setting is YES (collimator with front blade control).
vii. Set lateral margin of Xray beam. Access the arm configuration menu. Start-
ing from application mode, select:
SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CONFIG/COLLIM/MARG_L
Then use +/ keys to set margin at desired value and select VALID.
See the table below for standards and recommendations to get full film black-
ening.
Standard Lateral margin (mm) Selection *

CEI** +2 ...
UK +3 ...
AUSTRALIA** 0 ...
MQSA / CDRH +2 ...
* Note down (X) the selected value.
** Standard authorizes the full film blackening and in these tables, we indicate the
margin configuration to get it. But the user can also use margins inside the film.
136
REV 3 sm 2308530100
viii. Set rear margin of Xray beam. Select:

SETUP/MARG_R
INSTALLATION
ening.
Standard Rear margin (mm) Selection *

CEI** +2 ...
UK +2 ...
AUSTRALIA** 0 ...
MQSA** +2 ...
** Standard authorizes the full film blackening and in these tables, we indicate the
margin configuration to get it. But the user can also use margins inside the film.
For DMR V1_P and V2_P, there is a limitation preventing from having a full film
blackening. But setting the rear margin to 4 mm is acceptable.
ix. Set front margin of Xray beam. Select:

SETUP/MARG_F
ening.
Standard Front margin (mm) Selection *

CEI +2 ...
UK +2 ...
AUSTRALIA +3 ...
MQSA +2 ...
Note: For DMR V1 (in standard configuration) the adjustment of the Front Blade is manual
(the menu SETUP/MARG_F is not accessible).
For DMR V1 upgraded system with collimator V3 kit, the menu SETUP/MARG_F is
available.
x. Perform a CKSUM and return to application mode

xi. Set gantry medical parameters.
Ask the doctor for the desired paddle compression speed (fast or slow). Start-
ing from application mode, select SETUP/MEDICAL/SPEED on the con-
sole. Select FAST or SLOW on the console.
Ask the doctor for the desired maximum compression force in daN. Select
SETUP/FORCE on the console. Select + or on the console repeatedly until
the desired force value is reached (possible values range from 4 to 20 daN in
steps of 1 daN). Once the desired value is reached, select VAL on the console
to confirm the desired value.
Note: The ACR recommendation is 18daN (40lbs).
137
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Ask the doctor if automatic decompression (i.e. return of the compression

paddle to its home position) following an exposure is desired. Select SETUP/
INSTALLATION
DECOMP on the console. Select YES on the console if automatic decom-

pression is desired, or NO if it is not desired.
Ask the doctor if a beep tone is desired. Select SETUP/BEEP on the console.
Select YES on the console if a beep tone is desired, or NO if it is not desired.
Ask the doctor for the desired maximum height during automatic decompres-
sion (between 10 and 40 cm). Select SETUP/HEIGHT on the console.
Select + or on the console repeatedly until the desired height value is
reached. Then select VALID to confirm the value.
Ask the doctor for the desired cassette detection mode (default is YES).
Select SETUP/FILM on the console. Select NO ONLY if no cassette
detection is desired.
Note: The parameter film is reset to yes at each power up of the DMR.
The service engineer is not needed for selecting the abovementioned gantry medical
parameters (SPEED, FORCE, DECOMP, BEEP, HEIGHT and FILM); the doctor can
easily change them at will at any time following installation of the DMR.
xii. Set paddle deformation parameters.

See Job card IST044 Setting paddle deformation parameters.
14. Perform preliminary generator and gantry testing.

See Job Card IST 033 PRELIMINARY GENERATOR AND GANTRY TESTING.
15. Calibrate grid position.
See Job Card IST 026 CALIBRATION OF GRID POSITION.
16. Check safelighting and film processing (see Job Card IST 034 CHECKING SAFE
LIGHTING AND FILM PROCESSING).
Note 1 : For following steps :
use AEC flow chart to assist in following steering guide, see illustration NO TAG.
Note 2 : In case of error messages during the following steps, see IST 41 for explanation of these
messages.
17. Calibrate photo-cell HV measurement and scale factor.

See Job Card IST 004 CALIBRATION OF photo-cell HV MEASUREMENT AND
SCALE FACTOR.
18. Calibrate photo-cell sensitivity as a function of its voltage.
See Job Card IST 005 CALIBRATION OF photo-cell SENSITIVITY AS A FUNC-
TION OF ITS VOLTAGE.
Note: It is a good practice to backup generator data at this time.
19. Calibrate AEC for each screen pair (repeat steps a. to j. below for each screen pair).
138
REV 3 sm 2308530100
a. Choose and configure a screen pair.

Perform the procedures in Job Card IST 006 SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND
INSTALLATION
CONFIGURATION.
b. Check on preexposure in Jobcard IST046.

c. Calibrate photo-cell gain.
Perform the calibration in Job Card IST 007 CALIBRATION OF photo-cell GAIN
FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR.
d. Determine if reciprocity law failure compensation parameters (LNRT) can be en-

tered manually. If not, perform the necessary calibration to determine them.
IF the screen and film of the screen pair being calibrated appear in table Table 1
below, or IF, in your own experience installing the DMR, you have ALREADY
determined parameters A0, A1 and A2 for the SAME screen pair, go directly to
step e..
IF this is not the case, go directly to Job Card IST 013 CALIBRATION OF FILM
RECIPROCITY FAILURE COMPENSATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR.
Once this calibration is finished, write down the newlydetermined parameters
A0, A1 and A2 for the screen pair being calibrated in table Table 1 below, then
SKIP step e. and go DIRECTLY to step f.
Table 1 a0, a1 and a2 values for various screen pairs
PROCESSOR
SCREEN BRAND AND CYCLE TIME
TYPE FILM BRAND AND TYPE (SEC) A0 A1 A2
KODAK MINR KODAK MINR MA 90 +1.000E+0 +1.329E1 +1.333E2
KODAK MINR E 90 +1.000E+0 +9.797E2 +1.124E2
KODAK MINR H 90 +1.000E+0 +1.432E1 +1.880E2
KODAK MINR M 90 +1.000E+0 +1.698E1 +2.469E2
KODAK MINR 2000 90 +1.000E+0 +1.219E1 +1.491E2
3M TRIMAX HM 90 +1.000E+0 +8.479E2 +1.210E2
AGFA MR detail S AGFA MR5 150 +1.000E+0 +1.491E1 +1.796E2
MR3II 120 +1.000E+0 +1.170E1 +9.586E3
KODAK MINR 2000/2190 MINR 2000 90 +1.000E+0 +1.219E1 +1.491E2

AGFA HD/HDS AGFA HDRC 90 +1.000E+0 +7.686E2 +6.342E3
FUJI AD FUJI ADM 90 +1.000E+0 +1.576E1 +1.988E2
e. Calibrate reference energy.
139
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Enter manually the three reciprocity law failure compensation parameters (A0, A1
and A2) either from table Table 1 or from your own notes from a previous installa-
INSTALLATION
tion of the same screen pair on another DMR for the screen and film of the screen
pair being calibrated:
Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/

ALGO/FSC=x/CALIB/LNRT/PARAM on the console, where x is the screen
pair indicator (A,B,C,D,E) corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated. See
Job Card IST 006 SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND CONFIGURATION.
At this point, enter the three parameter values by using the CHANGE key, rotating
the kV dial and using the NEXT, VALID and SETUP keys. See sections 3105
and 3106.
If this is an additional DMR, at the same site, using the same processor, then as soon
as the three parameter values are correctly entered, go IMMEDIATELY to Job
Card IST 014 CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY FOR A GIVEN
SCREEN PAIR. Once this calibration is finished, go directly to step f. below.
Otherwise, go directly to Job Card IST 013 CALIBRATION OF FILM REC-
IPROCITY FAILURE COMPENSATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR. Once
this calibration is finished, write down the newlydetermined parameters A0, A1
and A2 for the screen pair being calibrated in table 1.
f. AOP strategy: this parameter is determined automatically at the end of IST013 or
IST014 reference energy calibration. So the manual setting of the AOP strategy
(IST039) is no longer necessary.
Note: However, if there are several senographe DMR installed on the same site, it may be nec-
essary to equalize all the strategies to the same value, to avoid unjustified mAs devi-
ation between identical senographes. For this purpose only, it is still possible to read/set
the strategy value. Starting from application mode, select:
SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/ALGO/FSC=x/STRAT
Where x is the screen pair indicator (A, B, C, D, or E).
See IST039 for further reference.
This equalization must only be done if the DMRs are using the same film/screen couple,
same film processor, same SID.
g. Optical density optimization, see Job Card IST 050, IST 051.
h. Calibrate photo-cell in Stereotix 2 positions.
Note: This step is not applicable for nonStereotix 2 installations.
Perform the calibration in Job Card IST 018 CALIBRATION OF photo-cell IN

STEREOTIX 2 POSITIONS.
i. Calibrate reference energy in Stereotix 2 mode.
Note: This step is not applicable for nonStereotix 2 installations.
Perform the calibration in Job Card IST 019 CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE

ENERGY IN STEREOTIX 2 MODE FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR.
140
REV 3 sm 2308530100
j. If the AEC calibration for the screen pair being calibrated is successful and com-
plete at this point (which is normally the case) be sure that this screen pair is en-
INSTALLATION
abled for use in application mode (see Job Card IST 006 SCREEN PAIR
SELECTION AND CONFIGURATION.
20. Test for absence of grid lines on exposed film.
See Job Card IST 031 TEST FOR ABSENCE OF GRID LINES ON EXPOSED FILM.
21. Change console dialog display language to that of the country of installation (if other
than English):
Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/MEDICAL/LANGUAGE/
language on the console, where language is the desired console dialog display lan-
guage (FRANC, ENGL, DEUTS, ESPAN, ITALI or PORTU).
22. At this step, a calibration backup can be done. Then, in case of a system crash, the cal-
ibration backup can be used or the system can be completely recalibrated following the
process in chapter 2.
23. Perform safety checks (collimator size for example) if applicable from local regula-
tions.
24. Switch off the DMR to disable access to installation menus.
25. Connect room lights (optional), see Job card IST042 for Senographe DMR+ and
DMR V2+. For DMR V1 consult Job Card IST010.
26. Refit all covers.
141
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 116
DMR STEERING GUIDE FLOWCHART
INSTALLATION
Note: use Calibration form (IST043) to record all obtained values
Do software configuration
* of medical menus:
Unpacking the equipment ...... Language
Compression speed
IST 008 Compression max. force ......
Decomp. auto
Beep
Physical installation Film detection
......
IST 009
Do/check software configuration
Regulatory and Safety of install menus:
Labelling ...... Generator: Pmax
IST 038 MaSMax
T. Max
Removal of side covers AOP type
IST 032 ...... Tube type ......
& general inspection Gantry:Cassette detection
Bucky settings
Tube housing
Connecting the cables + ...... Collimator settings
HV tank check IST 010 Paddle deformation settings (IST 044)
Arm Angle Check

* Check box Connection of Mains supply ...... IST 015 (Check only) ......
when step done Only for DMR+
IST 011
Preliminary generator
Line resistance measurement & gantry testing ......
......
IST 033
IST 012
First poweron for basic Check calibration of

...... grid position ......
power supplies check
IST 026
IST 022
Check safe lighting
Check jumpers & switches ...... & film processing ......
IST 037 IST 034
AEC calibration
Set elevator upper travel limit ......
...... (see AEC flow chart, illus. NO TAG)
IST 040 (optionnal)
Test for no grid lines ......
Poweron: IST 031
observe for possible ......
error codes
Clear generator & gantry error stacks
Clear generator statistics ......
Backup generator & gantry parameters
Perform safety regulation checks ......

(optional)
Checksum
error
codes MQSA paddle adjustments ......
NO (US and Canada only)
displayed
?
Switch off to disable access ......
to install menus
YES
Wire room lamps/door (IST042 or IST010 ......
for DMR V1+) and refit all covers
Restore factory data if possible, or
recalibrate the complete system
following the calibration process
shown in Chapter 2 Calibration
142
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 117
FLOW CHART OF AEC/AOP CALIBRATION
INSTALLATION
DMR : FLOW CHART OF AEC/AOP CALIBRATION
ONE NEED
FILM/SCREEN ONLY
CAUTION: ? COUPLE
ALREADY
? YES
? TO SHIFT
AVERAGE
? NO
DO NOT PERFORM IST 017
AT FIRST INSTALLATION CALIBRATED? DENSITY
NO YES
CHECK OF VIEWBOX
& SENSITOMETRIC
STABILTY IST 047 & IST 048
A
DIFFERENT
? SCREEN
?
kV SCALE FACTOR IST 017
COMMON YES
TO HV_PM INTERNAL COUPLE CHOICE NO
ALL VOLTMETER IST 004 (NAME, VALIDATION)
CALIBRATION parag.5
COUPLES IST 006
Time : 20 DAC IST 004 Time : 5
COUPLE CHOICE
CALIBRATION parag.6 (NAME, VALIDATION
IST 006
PM/HV_PM
PARAMETERS DUPLICATION Time : 5
CALIBRATION Copy only parameters without
IST 005
screen
PARAMETERS
COUPLE CHOICE IST 007 section 8 step 1 to 5
DUPLICATION IST 007
(NAME, VALIDATION Time : 5 section 8
IST 006 steps 1
Time : 5 PM YIELD See Note 1 below to 10
PM YIELD IST 007 Perform only calibration Time : 5
See Note 2 with screen
IST 007 parag. 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.10
Time : 40 and 6.11
kV RISE TIME IST 046 Time : 20

A
LNRT
PARAMS
? ALREADY
? NO
YES SEE RECOMMENDATION # 1
KNOWN COUPLE CHOICE
HEATER
ENTER KNOWN CALIBRATION AT 30 mA
PARAMETERS
(A0, A1, A2) IST 013/5.5 Time : 5
from steering Time : 10
guide table SEE RECOMMENDATION # 2
REFERENCE ENERGY
path = AOP/ALGO/FSC = x..
/CALIB/LNRT.. REFERENCE ENERGY IST 014
/PARAM/CHANGE IST 013/5.6 Time : 20
Time : 5 Time : 25
LNRT OD OPTIMIZATION
REFERENCE ENERGY SEE RECOMMENDATION # 3 Contact mode
IST 050
IST 014 IST 013/5.7 Time : 30 to 90
Time : 20 Time : 45 to 80
OD OPTIMIZATION
AOP STRATEGY Mag. mode IST 051
Automatic
Time :0 (See installation
section 5, parag.19.F) REFERENCE
ENERGY
OD OPTIMIZATION FOR STEREOTIX
Time : 30 to 90 Contact mode IST 050 (IF APPLICABLE)
OD OPTIMIZATION OPTIONAL (If required by local regulation) IST 019

Mag. mode IST 051 (e.g.: MQSA 2002) Time : 20
AOP CORRECTION END

IN MAG. MODE IST 015 ONLY FOR DMR V1_P AND V2+
Time : 15
STEREOTIX NOTE 1
? TO BE ? DO NOT FORGET : DO BOTH COPY I
CALIBRATED YES
STEREOTIX CELL E.G. : A no screen TO B no screen
CALIBRATION IST 018 AND
NO Time : 15 A with screen TO B with screen
REFERENCE ENERGY
FOR STEREOTIX IST 019
NOTE 2
Time : 20
IF LNRT PARAMS ARE UNKNOWN
PERFORM IST 13 IMMEDIATELY
CALIBRATE AFTER IST 07 (SO, WITH HOT TUBE)
END ? ANOTHER ?
NO YES
COUPLE
Time (in minutes) is an average value for indication purpose only
143
REV 3 sm 2308530100
INSTALLATION
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR AEC/AOP CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
Recommendation # 1: Selection of Reference O.D.
Whenever Reference O.D. is determined by the customer, take in account the following:
Site dedicated to cancer screening campaign. See applicable standards,
Kodak MinR 2000; recommended net O.D. > 1.4.
The value must be compatible with the quality of the viewboxes.
To perform IST 013, it is possible to use an O.D. value other than the one expected by the doctor.
In this case, once IST 013 has been performed, O.D. value must be adjusted with IST 014,
This O.D. (used to complete IST 013) needs to be chosen on the linear part of the sensitometric curve with the
recommended gamma (See Job Card IST 048). Film Reciprocity Law Failure Compensation algorithm of DMR
uses a calculation range around O.D. 0.2.
Note: Take care to have OD 0.2 range inside the same linear part (i.e. with the same slope).
Recommendation # 2: Setting of Sensitometric Scale from Senographe Console
Enter Sensitometric Scale (steps 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15),
Note: The target O.D. is between two density steps. Use these two values to calculate the gamma value:
Gamma = (D(n+1) D(n))/0.3. The DMR will do the calculation this way.
The result shall be identical or very close to the value found with Job card IST 048.
If not, modify the choice of O.D. steps, by shifting the step values.
Recommendation # 3: Calibration of Film Reciprocity Law Failure Compensation for a given

Screen/Film pair
Calibrate the Reference Energy (step 5.6 of Job Card IST 013).
Choose O.D. according to the recommendation # 1.
For a good result, it is recommended to find manually the exact mAs value to reach the expected O.D.
with 28 kV/4 cm acrylic.
Perform Film Reciprocity Law failure Compensation procedure: step 5.7 of IST 013.
CAUTION: If an error 068/xxx is displayed by the Senographe console, it means that the parameters may be
erroneous. Do not attempt to force the calibration. Reset the generator and perform again the calibration.
Check result according to step 5.9 of IST 013:
The optical density must not vary by more than 0.2 between any of the three films; if it does, the entire
calibration must be repeated.
144
REV 3 sm 2308530100
If the O.D. used in IST 013 is different from O.D. desired by customer, perform IST 014 : Calibration of
the REFERENCE ENERGY FOR A GIVEN SCREEN/FILM PAIR.
INSTALLATION
Note: Check IST 039. Verify if the strategy computed by DMR is compatible with kV and
mAs values:
If you decrease the strategy, e.g., Very Fast to Fast, for a same AOP mode configu-
ration, the choice of kV will be higher.
145
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Blank page
INSTALLATION
146
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHAPTER 2 CALIBRATION
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
This chapter is a resume of the procedures to follow when a complete recalibration of the
generator and/or gantry is deemed necessary, when a new screen pair is being introduced,
when the Stereotix 2 option is being installed after the initial installation, and when the cus-
tomer wishes to change the reference optical density in AEC and AOP modes.
CALIBRATION
This chapter is divided into 7 sections:
D Section 1 introduces the chapter.

D Section 2 describes generator calibration (except AEC calibration of a screen pair).
D Section 3 provides information for complete gantry calibration.
D Section 4 provides information for AEC calibration for a given screen pair.
D Section 5 describes AEC calibration of a Stereotix 2 installed after initial installation.
D Section 6 describes recalibration of nonStereotix 2 reference optical density in AEC
and AOP modes.
D Section 7 describes re-calibration of Stereotix 2 mode reference optical density in AEC
mode.
SECTION 2
1. Check jumpers and switches see Job Card IST 037.

2. Calibrate Xray tube heater current scale factor see Job Card IST 001.
3. Calibrate Xray tube focal bias voltage see Job Card IST 002.
4. Calibrate Xray tube mA measurement see Job Card IST 016.
5. Calibrate Xray tube kV scale factor see Job Card IST 017.
6. Calibrate XRay tube heater current see Job Card IST 003.
7. Calibrate photo cell HV measurement and scale factor see Job Card IST 004.
8. Calibrate photo cell sensitivity as a function of its voltage see Job Card IST 005.
SECTION 3
GANTRY CALIBRATION
1. Check jumpers and switches see Job Card IST 037.

2. Calibrate compression force detector see Job Card IST 023.
3. Test minimum compression/decompression force see Job Card IST 024.
4. Calibrate breast thickness measurement see Job Card IST 025.
5. Calibrate grid position see Job Card IST 026.
6. Calibrate Xray tube reference angle see Job Card IST 029.
7. Check Xray film format geometry see Job Card IST 027.
21
REV 3 sm 2308530100
8. Calibrate collimator blades reference positions see Job Card IST 030.
9. Calibrate light centering device see Job Card IST 036 and 028.
10. Test for absence of grid lines on exposed film see Job Card IST 031.
SECTION 4
AEC CALIBRATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR
When a new screen pair is being introduced, follow the sequence Calibrate AEC for each
screen pair given in the Installation Steering in chapter 1, and the AEC flow chart (see illustra-
tion NO TAG in Chapter 1).
CALIBRATION
SECTION 5
AEC CALIBRATION ON STEREOTIX 2
When the Stereotix 2 option is installed after initial installation of a Senographe DMR, follow
the sequence given below:
1. set up and calibrate the Stereotix 2 according to the Stereotix 2 Service Manual
2. calibrate photocell in Stereotix 2 positions (see Job Card IST 018)
3. Calibrate reference energy in Stereotix 2 mode (see Job Card IST 019).
FOR SAFETY REASONS IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT THE GANTRY IS AN-

WARNING CHORED TO THE FLOOR WITH 3 BOLTS WHEN A SENOGRAPHE DMR IS
EQUIPPED WITH THE STEREOTIX 2 (see Job Card IST 009).
SECTION 6
RECALIBRATION OF REFERENCE OPTICAL DENSITY IN NONSTEREOTIX 2 MODE
To recalibrate the reference optical density, follow the sequence below:
1. Set up the following exposure:

D any compression paddle installed
D contact (no magnification)
D grid installed
D 40 mm plexiglass on the cassette holder
D mode: AEC (1point)
D screen pair: select the name of the screen pair being calibrated
D focal spot: LARGE
D track: MO
D filter: MO
D manual density correction: +0
D HV: 28 kV.
2. Take an exposure using a cassette and undeveloped film corresponding to the screen
pair being calibrated. Write down the resulting mAs value.
3. Perform the section entitled Calibration of Reference Energy in Job Card IST 014, but
do not use the default mAs value for the first exposure instead, enter the mAs value
obtained in the exposure above.
22
REV 3 sm 2308530100
4. Perform the section entitled Check Results in Job Card IST 014.
SECTION 7
CUSTOMER REQUESTED RECALIBRATION OF STEREOTIX 2 MODE REFERENCE OPTICAL DENSITY
When the customer requests a recalibration of Stereotix 2 mode reference optical density,
perform Job Card IST 019 in its entirety.
CALIBRATION
23
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Blank page
CALIBRATION
24
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHAPTER 3 JOB CARDS
JOB CARD IST 001 CALIBRATION OF HEATER CURRENT SCALE FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

JOB CARD IST 002 CALIBRATION OF XRAY TUBE FOCAL BIAS VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR . . . . . . . 39
JOB CARD IST 003 CALIBRATION OF XRAY TUBE HEATER CURRENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
JOB CARD IST 004 CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL HV MEASUREMENT AND SCALE FACTOR . . . . . 319
JOB CARD IST 005 CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL SENSITIVITY AS A FUNCTION OF ITS VOLTAGE 323
JOB CARD IST 006 SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
JOB CARD IST 007 CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
JOB CARD IST 008 UNPACKING THE EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
JOB CARD IST 009 PHYSICAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
JOB CARD IST 010 CONNECTING THE CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
JOB CARD IST 011 CONNECTING TO THE AC SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
JOB CARD IST 012 LINE RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
JOB CARD IST 013 CALIBRATION OF FILM RECIPROCITY LAW FAILURE COMPENSATION
JOB CARDS
FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
JOB CARD IST 014 CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . 389
JOB CARD IST 015 MAGNIFICATION CORRECTION FOR A GIVEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
JOB CARD IST 016 CALIBRATION OF XRAY TUBE MA MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3103
JOB CARD IST 017 CALIBRATION OF KV SCALE FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3107
JOB CARD IST 018 CALIBRATION OF PHOTOCELL IN STEREOTIX 2 POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3113
JOB CARD IST 019 CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY IN STEREOTIX 2 MODE
FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3119
JOB CARD IST 020 AUTOMATIC XRAY TUBE WARMUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3127
JOB CARD IST 021 CHECKING AND ADJUSMENT OF LATERAL CENTERING OF XRAY BEAM . . . . . 3129
JOB CARD IST 022 CHECKING BASIC SUPPLY VOLTAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3135
JOB CARD IST 023 CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION FORCE DETECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3137
JOB CARD IST 024 MINIMUM COMPRESSION/DECOMPRESSION FORCE TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3139
JOB CARD IST 025 CALIBRATION OF BREAST THICKNESS MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3143
JOB CARD IST 026 CALIBRATION OF GRID POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3147
JOB CARD IST 027 CHECKING XRAY FILM FORMAT GEOMETRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3149
JOB CARD IST 027 B CHECKING XRAY FILM FORMAT GEOMETRY FOR NON MOTORIZED
FROM BLADE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3163
JOB CARD IST 028 LIGHT CENTERING CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3177
JOB CARD IST 029 CALIBRATION OF XRAY TUBE REFERENCE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3183
JOB CARD IST 030 CALIBRATION OF LATERAL, REAR, AND FRONT, COLLIMATOR BLADE
REFERENCE POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3187
JOB CARD IST 031 TEST FOR ABSENCE OF GRID LINES ON EXPOSED FILM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3191
JOB CARD IST 032 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF SIDE COVERS AND PANELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3195
JOB CARD IST 033 PRELIMINARY GENERATOR AND GANTRY TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3199
JOB CARD IST 034 CHECKING SAFELIGHTING AND FILM PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3205
JOB CARD IST 035 REPLACEMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE LAMP (NEW VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3209
31
REV 3 sm 2308530100
JOB CARD IST 035 B REPLACEMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE LAMP (OLD VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3213
JOB CARD IST 036 ADJUSTMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3217
JOB CARD IST 037 JUMPERS AND SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3227
JOB CARD IST 038 REGULATORY AND SAFETY LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3231
JOB CARD IST 039 MANUAL DETERMINATION OF AOP STRATEGY FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR . . . 3235
JOB CARD IST 040 SETTING OF ELEVATOR UPPER TRAVEL LIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3239
JOB CARD IST 041 GENERAL ERRORS DURING THE CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3243
JOB CARD IST 042 CONNECTING ROOM LAMPS AND ROOM DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3251
JOB CARD IST 043 DMR INSTALLATION FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3255
JOB CARD IST 044 SETTING PADDLE DEFORMATION PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3269
JOB CARD IST 045 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FOLLOWUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3271
JOB CARD IST 046 CHECKS ON PRE-EXPOSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3275
JOB CARD IST 047 CHECK OF VIEWBOX(ES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3281
JOB CARD IST 048 CHECK OF SENSITOMETRIC STABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3285
JOB CARD IST 050 A0 OPTIMIZATION FOR CONTACT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3289
JOB CARDS
JOB CARD IST 051 A0 OPTIMIZATION FOR MAGNIFICATION MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3291
32
REV 3 sm 2308530100
SENOGRAPHE DMR V2_P Job Card IST 001 1 of 6
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF HEATER CURRENT SCALE Version No.:

FACTOR Date :
Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D True R.M.S. AC ammeter
e.g: Fluke 8060, Fluke 87, Fluke 45. HP 3457A, Tektronix DMM 254.
JOB CARDS
D HV unit / cable adaptor, Part number 36003399.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
To ensure an accurate measurement:
D For ALL Digital Multimeters, the Autorange function MUST NOT be used, as it can lead to severe mea-
surement errors (>40% !!).
D For ALL Digital Multimeters, the Relative Measurement function MUST NOT be used to reset to zero
the natural offset displayed when there is no current measured. The offset is automatically reset to zero
by the principle of the rms measurement.
D Measurement configurations to be used are as follows:
a. Fluke 8060: used with 20A shunt in the 200mV AC range (shunt reference: 80J10).
b. Fluke 87: no shunt, in the 10A AC range.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
In case of equipment breakdown or service engineer error during this cal-

CAUTION ibration procedure, the resulting parameter values might become so unrea-
sonable as to render the Xray tube filament supply circuit unusable. This
can show up as an error message during power up, and thus inhibit use of the
calibration software. If this happens, the only way to cancel the error is to
manually reenter the default parameter values (see section 5 for default
parameter values) and switch the Senographe DMR off and back on again
before again attempting a calibration.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
33
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CALIBRATION OF HEATER CURRENT SCALE

FACTOR Job Card IST 001 2 of 6
SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF HEATER CURRENT SCALE FACTOR
The objective is to determine the scale factor K and fixed offset VOF between the Xray tube filament current
command from the software and the real filament current value obtained. Each tube track has its own filament
supply circuit, so this calibration procedure is to be performed for each of the two tracks.
DEFAULT PARAMETER VALUES ARE K = +9.450E+0 (9.45) AND VOF = +0.000E+0 (0.0).
5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR for this calibration procedure.
5.1.1 Turn off the Senographe DMR.
5.1.2 Open the HV converter control signal inputs by disconnecting flat cable WG8 from generator com-
mand board 400PL1 connector XJ7. This eliminates any possibility of energy buildup in the HV
JOB CARDS
unit during this calibration procedure.
5.1.3 Disconnect the DMR HV cable at the HV tank end.
5.1.4 Connect the HV cable to the HV unit / cable adaptor (36003399).
5.1.5 Connect the HV unit / cable adaptor to the DMR HV tank.
5.1.6 Connect the true r.m.s. AC ammeter in series with the filament being calibrated
on the HV unit / cable adaptor; and place a jumper on the other track (see illustrations 1 and 2).
Note: See important note in section 2 to ensure an accurate measurement.
Note: Keep the other filament connected in order to avoid error messages when the Senographe DMR
is switched on.
34
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 1
HV UNIT HV CABLE ADAPTOR 36003399
Track 2 (Rh): jumper or ammeter
From HV tank To X Ray tube
HV cable
shield
HT HT
TRACK 2 (Rh) C C TRACK 2 (Rh)
TRACK 1 (Mo) TRACK 1 (Mo)
L S S L
BIAS BIAS
G G
Ground (+HV) Ground (+HV)
JOB CARDS
C G
Bias measurement
Track 1 (Mo): jumper or ammeter
Note: For safety purpose, HT is permanently connected to ground
35
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 2
HV CABLE CONNECTOR PIN CONNECTION DIAGRAM
L
NOTE: THIS IS A HEADON VIEW
OF THE HV CABLE CONNECTOR
AFTER BEING DISCONNECTED
FROM THE HV UNIT.
G
POLARIZING TAB C
S
JOB CARDS
The HV cable connector is marked with the standard Xray industry markings (L, S, C and G).
However, the functions of the corresponding conductors in the Senographe DMR are as follows:
L = track 1 (Mo) filament supply
S = track 2 (Rh) filament supply
C = filament supply return and Xray tube cathode HV
G = focal bias voltage supply
5.1.7 Switch on the Senographe DMR.
Note: ERROR 007/024 is normal with 400 PL1 XJ7 disconnected.
5.1.8 Change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch B1 on generator CPU board
400PL3, see Accessing the Different Installation Menus in the Tree Structure in chapter 1).
5.2 Perform the calibration procedure for the desired Xray tube track.
5.2.1 Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/HTR_SCL/TRACK1 (or TRACK2)

/CALIB/1st pt/CALIB on the console for the first calibration point.
Note: The default filament current command value for this first point is +4.000E+00 (4.0) A.
36
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.2.2 Press the 2nd trigger button (no Xrays are produced) and hold it until the ammeter reading stabi-
lizes (this may take a few seconds).
5.2.3 Note the filament current value measured from the ammeter.
5.2.4 Release the 2nd trigger button.
5.2.5 Select SETUP/MeasI on the console.
5.2.6 Enter and validate the measured filament current value from the ammeter for this first calibration
point.
5.2.7 Select SETUP/SETUP/2nd pt/CALIB on the console for the first calibration point.
Note: The default filament current command value for this second point is +5.000E+00 (5.0) A.
JOB CARDS
5.2.11 Select SETUP/MeasI on the console.
5.2.12 Enter and validate the measured filament current value from the ammeter for this second calibration
point.
5.2.13 Select SETUP/SETUP/calcul/VALID on the console. This executes the calculation of the scale
factor and fixed offset of the filament current command from the software.
5.3 Check the calibration accuracy.
5.3.1 Select SETUP/1st pt/CALIB on the console.
Note: Again, the default filament current command value for this first point is +4.000E+00 (4.0) A.
37
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.3.5 Select SETUP/SETUP/2nd pt/CALIB on the console.
Note: Again, the default filament current command value for this second point is +5.000E+00 (5.0) A.
5.3.9 The expected results are 4.0 0.02 A for the first point and 5.0 0.02 A for the second point. If the
results are within these tolerances, the calibration for this Xray tube track is finished. If the results
are out of tolerance, repeat the calibration procedure in section 5.2 and the check procedure in sec-
tion 5.3 for the same Xray tube track.
JOB CARDS
Note: Performing the calibration procedure once is normally sufficient for correct calibration.
Note: If it is necessary to perform the calibration procedure more than once, the measured values of cur-
rent for the two points (4.0 and 5.0 A) should become increasingly accurate. If not, the procedure
is probably not being followed correctly.
5.3.10 Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/PARAM on the console. Note down the calculated values of scale
factor K and offset VOF. Each of these two values can be displayed alternately by rotating the kV
dial on the console.
If the value of K is less than +8.000E+0 (8.0), either the calibration procedure
CAUTION was done incorrectly or there is a hardware defect.
5.3.11 Repeat the calibration and check procedures on the other tube track, if necessary.
5.3.12 Perform a CKSUM, then turn the system off
5.3.13 Reconnect flat cable WG8 to generator command board 400PL1 connector XJ7, remove high
voltage cable adapter. Do not forget to secure the HV ring with the Allen screw, to insure proper
ground continuity.
38
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF XRAY TUBE FOCAL BIAS Version No.:

VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Voltmeter
D HV unit / cable adaptor, part number 36003399
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
In case of equipment breakdown or service engineer error during this cal-

CAUTION ibration procedure, the resulting parameter values might become so unrea-
sonable as to render the Xray tube focal bias voltage supply circuit
unusable. This can show up as an error message during power up, and thus
inhibit use of the calibration software. If this happens, the only way to cancel
the error is to manually reenter the default parameter values (see section 5
for these values) and switch the Senographe DMR+ off and back on again
before again attempting a calibration.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Card IST 001 CALIBRATION OF HEATER CURRENT SCALE FACTOR
39
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CALIBRATION OF XRAY TUBE FOCAL BIAS

VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR Job Card IST 002 2 of 6
SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF XRAY TUBE FOCAL BIAS VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR
The objective is to determine the scale factor alpha and offset beta between the Xray tube focal bias voltage
command from the software and the real focal bias voltage value obtained. The focal bias voltage applied to
the Xray tube electron beam concentration device establishes the focal spot width.
DEFAULT PARAMETER VALUES ARE ALPHA = +9.389E+1 (93.89) AND BETA = +3.801E2
(0.03801).
5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR+ for this calibration procedure.
5.1.1 Turn off the Senographe DMR+.
5.1.2 Open the HV converter control signal inputs by disconnecting flat cable WG8 from generator com-
mand board 400PL1 connector XJ7. This eliminates any possibility of energy buildup in the HV
JOB CARDS
unit during this calibration procedure.
5.1.3 Disconnect the DMR+ HV cable at the HV tank end.
5.1.4 Connect the HV cable to the HV unit / cable adaptor (36003399).
5.1.5 Connect the HV unit / cable adaptor to the DMR+ HV tank.
5.1.6 Connect a DC voltmeter between common (C) and the focal bias voltage wire (G) (see illustrations
1 and 2).
310
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 1
HV UNIT HV CABLE ADAPTOR 36003399
Track 2 (Rh): jumper or ammeter

From HV tank To X Ray tube
HV cable
shield
HT HT
TRACK 2 (Rh) C C TRACK 2 (Rh)
TRACK 1 (Mo) TRACK 1 (Mo)
L S S L
BIAS BIAS
JOB CARDS
G G
Ground (+HV) Ground (+HV)
C G
Bias measurement
Track 1 (Mo): jumper or ammeter
Note: For safety purpose, HT is permanently connected to ground
311
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 2
HV CABLE CONNECTOR PIN CONNECTION DIAGRAM
L
NOTE: THIS IS A HEADON VIEW
OF THE HV CABLE CONNECTOR
AFTER BEING DISCONNECTED
FROM THE HV UNIT.
G
POLARIZING TAB C
S
JOB CARDS
The HV cable connector is marked with the standard Xray industry markings (L, S, C and G).
However, the functions of the corresponding conductors in the Senographe DMR+ are as fol-
lows:
L = track 1 (Mo) filament supply
S = track 2 (Rh) filament supply
C = filament supply return and Xray tube cathode HV
G = focal bias voltage supply
5.1.7 Switch on the Senographe DMR+.

ERROR 007/024 is normal with 400 PL1 XJ7 disconnected.
400PL3, see Accessing the Different Installation Menus in the Tree Structure in chapter 1).
5.1.9 Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/BIAS/VOLTAGE on the console.
312
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.1.10 Rotate the kV dial in order to check that all four focal bias voltage command values are the same
as the values specified on the label on the X-ray tube housing:
MO/LF = . . . . . . . . . . .
RH/LF = . . . . . . . . . . . .
MO/SF = . . . . . . . . . . .
RH/SF = . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify any values that appear different from these on the tube label by using the
CAUTION CHANGE key, rotating the kV dial and using the NEXT, VALID and SETUP
keys. See Visual Display of Parameter Values and Modification of a Parameter
Value or Entry of a Measurement in chapter 1.
JOB CARDS
5.2 Perform the calibration procedure.
5.2.1 Select SETUP/CALIB/1st pt/CALIB on the console for the first calibration point.
5.2.2 Press the 2nd trigger button (no Xrays are produced) and hold it until the voltmeter reading stabi-
lizes.
5.2.3 Note the focal bias voltage value measured from the voltmeter.
5.2.5 Select SETUP/MeasV on the console.
5.2.6 Enter and validate the absolute value of measured focal bias voltage value from the voltmeter for
this first calibration point. See Entry of an AlphaNumeric Value in chapter 1 for information on
entering alphanumeric values.
5.2.7 Select SETUP/SETUP/2nd pt/CALIB on the console for the second calibration point.
lizes.
5.2.9 Note the focal bias voltage value measured from the voltmeter.
5.2.11 Select SETUP/MeasV on the console.
5.2.12 Enter and validate the measured focal bias voltage value from the voltmeter for this second calibra-
tion point.
313
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.2.13 Select SETUP/SETUP/calcul/VALID on the console. This executes the calculation of the parame-
ters alpha and beta. The message CALCUL DONE appears on the console display.
5.3.1 Select SETUP/1st pt/CALIB on the console.
lizes.
5.3.3 Note the focal bias voltage value measured from the voltmeter for the first point.
5.3.4 Release the 2nd trigger button. DO NOT ENTER THIS MEASURED VALUE.

JOB CARDS
lizes.
5.3.7 Note the focal bias voltage value measured from the voltmeter for the second point.
5.3.8 Release the 2nd trigger button. DO NOT ENTER THIS MEASURED VALUE.
5.3.9 The expected results for the first point are the value of MO/LF 5% for the first point and the value
of MO/SF 5% for the second point (see section 5.1.10 for these values). If the results are within
these tolerances, the focal bias voltage calibration is finished. If the results are out of tolerance,
repeat the calibration procedure in section 5.2 and the check procedure in section 5.3.
Note: Performing the calibration procedure once is normally sufficient for correct calibration.
Note: If it is necessary to perform the calibration procedure more than once, the measured values of focal
bias voltage for the two points should become increasingly accurate. If not, the procedure is prob-
ably not being followed correctly.
5.3.10 Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/PARAM on the console. Note down the calculated values of
parameters alpha and beta. Each of these two values can be displayed alternately by rotating the kV
dial on the console.
5.3.11 Perform a CKSUM, then turn the system off.
5.3.12 Reconnect flat cable WG8 to generator command board 400PL1 connector XJ7, remove high
voltage cable adapter. Do not forget to secure the HV ring with the Allen screw, to insure proper
ground continuity.
314
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF XRAY TUBE HEATER Version No.:

CURRENT Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
None
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION This procedure produces Xrays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
The following procedures must have been performed in the following order:
D Job Card IST 001 CALIBRATION OF HEATER CURRENT SCALE FACTOR
D Job Card IST 002 CALIBRATION OF XRAY TUBE FOCAL BIAS VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR
D Job Card IST 016 CALIBRATION OF XRAY TUBE MA MEASUREMENT
D Job Card IST 017 CALIBRATION OF kV SCALE FACTOR
315
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CALIBRATION OF XRAY TUBE HEATER

CURRENT Job Card IST 003 2 of 4
SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF XRAY TUBE HEATER CURRENT
The objective is to determine the Xray tube heater current necessary for producing the desired Xray tube
anode current at a given kV value.
The calibration procedure must be performed on each focal size/track combination. Four repetitions of the cal-
ibration procedure are therefore necessary.
Three exposures are taken automatically at different kV values. Using the results, the software calculates the
necessary parameters to determine the Xray tube heater current needed to produce the desired Xray tube
anode current for all possible kV values.
5.1.1 Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch
B1 on generator CPU board 400PL3) or enter password on console.
JOB CARDS
Note: This must only be done if the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to the
service menu.
5.1.2 Select the following menu sequence on the console: SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/

TUBE/HEATER/focal size/track/CALIB
Note: /focal size/track/ must be SF/RH for the first combination performed.
To avoid excessive X-ray doses on the photo-cell tube, place an empty cassette
CAUTION on the top of the image receptor.
5.1.3 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. The messages EXPOSURE NO 1, EXPOSURE NO
2, EXPOSURE NO 3 and CALIBRATION END appear sequentially on the console display. The
software automatically performs the three exposures and the calculations.
Note: Calibration time varies according to tube temperature. The message TOO HOT appears on the
console display when tube temperature is excessive for taking the next exposure. It is not neces-
sary to hold the 2nd trigger button down while waiting for the tube to cool. However, do not exit
the calibration menu while waiting. As soon as the TOO HOT message disappears, continue the
calibration by pressing the 2nd trigger button and holding it down.
Note: In case of arcing, the software reattempts the same exposure automatically.
Note: The calibration procedure includes an exposure at 40 kV. If for some reason this exposure is
impossible to perform (e.g. excessive arcing), tube warmup may be necessary (see Job Card
IST 020 AUTOMATIC XRAY TUBE WARMUP).
316
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.1.4 Repeat sections 5.1.2 to 5.1.3 for each of the remaining focal size/track combinations in the follow-
ing order: SF/Mo, LF/Rh, LF/Mo.
5.1.5 Perform this step only if a warning message is displayed.

The generator firmware can display the Limited Ich message on the console at the end of the
tubecurrent calibration IST 003. This message is only a warning and therefore not associated
with an error code.
Limited Ich (limited heater current) means that one or more filament heating current values were
calculated above 5.6 A (but internally limited to 5.600 A when stored in memory). To handle
this warning, proceed as follows:
1. Access the DMR installation menu to read the heater parameters (the path is: SETUP/GENE/
INSTAL/GENE/GENE/TUBE/HEATER/LF/MO/Param/IValue). If necessary, see DMR
menu structure in service manual (Ill. 17).
JOB CARDS
2. Explore the 28 kV/A combinations and note the kV values showing a current value equal to
5.600 A.
3. Repeat Step 2. for the LF/RH combination (there is a very low probability of current limitation
occurring in small focus).
4. Return to Application Mode (setup button).
5. Set the DMR for 2point exposure technique at 60 mAs. Make an exposure for each kV point
detected at 5.600 A (LF/MO and LF/RH). Allow at least 60 seconds between each exposure.
6. Repeat Steps 1. and 2.: If no more kV point are set to 5.600 A, the problem has been resolved.
If there is still one or more points showing a current value of 5.600 A make Job Card IST 001,
then restart this procedure from Step 1 above. If the problem recurs, replace the Xray tube.
5.2 Check the results.
5.2.1 Be sure that the gantry presence parameter PRES_A is set to YES before proceeding (see Gantry
Present/Absent in Chapter 1).
5.2.2 Activate the display of parameters following an exposure (see Display of Parameters Following an
Exposure in Chapter 1).
5.2.3 Perform a CKSUM and return to application mode (Path is: SETUP/GENE/INSTALL/CKSUM/
CKSUM.
5.2.4 Set up the Senographe DMR for a manual (2point) exposure at 30 kV and 63 mAs. For each of
the four focal size/track combination, take an exposure following a 3-second preparation time. Note
the resulting Xray tube anode currents displayed on the console display.
Note: A lower mAs value cannot would decrease the measurement accuracy.
317
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.2.5 The table below shows the expected Xray tube anode current for each focal size/track combina-
tion:
Value available for Maxiray 70THF tube:
LF/RH 62 mA 5% DVM accuracy
SF/RH 35 mA 5% DVM accuracy
LF/MO 100 mA 5% DVM accuracy
SF/MO 40 mA 5% DVM accuracy
Value available for GS412 tube:

LF/RH 75 mA 5% DVM accuracy
SF/RH 40 mA 5% DVM accuracy
LF/MO 100 mA 5% DVM accuracy
JOB CARDS
SF/MO 40 mA 5% DVM accuracy
5.2.6 If you are handing the machine back to the user at this point, switch the Senographe DMR off, then
on again.
318
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL HV Version No.:

MEASUREMENT AND SCALE FACTOR Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Voltmeter
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
THESE CALIBRATION PROCEDURES INVOLVE CONNECTING A

WARNING VOLTMETER TO THE PHOTO-CELL HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIR-
CUITS WHICH OPERATE AT APPROXIMATELY 800 VDC. USE
APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS WHEN IN CLOSE PROXIMITY TO
THESE CIRCUITS.
In case of equipment breakdown or service engineer error during these cal-

CAUTION ibration procedures, the resulting parameter values might become so unrea-
sonable as to render the photo-cell board unusable. This can show up as an
error message during power up, and thus inhibit use of the calibration soft-
ware. If this happens, the only way to cancel the error is to manually reenter
the default parameter value (see sections 5 and 6 for these values) and switch
the Senographe DMR off and back on again before again attempting a cal-
ibration.
These procedures must be done with cables W14 and W15 connected to
CAUTION gantry photo-cell board 800PL4 connectors XJ3 and XJ2, respectively.
Note: These two calibration procedures must always be done together and in the order presented. Follow
the procedure in section 5 and then the procedure in section 6.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
319
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL HV MEASU-

REMENT AND SCALE FACTOR Job Card IST 004 2 of 4
SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL HV MEASUREMENT
The objective is to determine the scale factor F/HV between the real photo-cell HV value and the photo-cell
HV measurement input to the software. This is accomplished by sending a theoretical photo-cell HV command
value of +7.000E+2 (700) V from the software and measuring the real voltage obtained. The measured value
is entered and the software calculates the value of F/HV.
DEFAULT PARAMETER VALUE IS F/HV = +1.797E+2 (179.7) Hz/V
B1 on generator CPU board 400PL3) or enter password on console.
Note: This must only be done if the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to SET-
JOB CARDS
UP/GENE/INSTAL or SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL
5.1.2 Carefully connect a voltmeter set to 1000 VDC to the photo-cell HV (+ve lead to the terminal lug
on the frame of the gantry photo-cell board 800PL4 connector XJ2, and ve lead to the gantry pho-
to-cell board 800PL4 test point TP1, marked HT).
5.1.3 Ensure that the gantry is present by selecting SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/CON-

FIG/PRES/PRES_B/YES on the console (see Gantry Present/Absent (PRES_A) in Chapter 1).
320
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.2.1 Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/AOP/FILM/CELL/ HV/DAC / FREQ/HV /CALIB/

CALIB/START. The message Working appears on the console display.
5.2.2 Wait for the voltmeter reading to stabilize, and note its absolute (positive) value.
5.2.3 Select STOP the message Done appears on the console display.
5.2.4 Select SETUP/HV_M on the console.
5.2.5 Enter and validate the absolute (positive) value of the voltmeter reading by using the NEXT and
VALID keys and the kV dial (see Visual Display of Parameter Values and Modification of a Parame-
ter Value or Entry of a Measurement in Chapter 1).
5.2.6 Select SETUP/CALC/VALID the message Calcul done appears on the console display.
JOB CARDS
5.3.1 Activate the display of parameters following an exposure by selecting SETUP six times, then
CONFIG/DISP/YES (see Chapter 1, Display of Parameters Following an Exposure).
5.3.2 Perform a CKSUM and return to 2-point application mode.
5.3.3 Press the 1st trigger button and hold it down until the voltmeter reading stabilizes. Note the absolute
(positive) value of the voltmeter reading. Release the 1st trigger button.
5.3.4 Check that the photo-cell HV value displayed on the console display is within 1%, 0.1V, plus
voltmeter error, of the voltmeter reading taken in step 5.3.3.
5.3.5 Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/CELL/ HV/DAC / FREQ/HV /PARAM

on the console. Note down the calculated gain factor F/HV.
5.3.6 Leave the voltmeter connected and proceed directly to section 6.
SECTION 6
CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL HV SCALE FACTOR
The objective is to determine the scale factor alpha and offset beta between the photo-cell HV command value
from the software and the real photo-cell HV value obtained. The calibration is fully automatic.
DEFAULT PARAMETER VALUES ARE ALPHA = +2.567E1 (0.2567) AND BETA = +2.184E+0 (2.184).
6.1.1 Select SETUP/SETUP/ HV/DAC /CALIB/START the messages Working, then Done appear
on the console display.
6.1.2 Select SETUP/PARAM. Write down the calculated values of scale factor alpha and offset beta.
Each of these two values is displayed alternately by rotating the kV dial on the console.
321
REV 3 sm 2308530100

6.2.1 Select SETUP/SETUP/ FREQ/HV /CALIB/REF.
6.2.2 Enter and validate a photo-cell HV reference value of +4.000E+2 (400) V by using the NEXT and
VALID keys and the kV dial (see Visual Display of Parameter Values and Modification of a Parame-
ter Value or Entry of a Measurement in Chapter 1).
6.2.3 Select SETUP/CALIB/START the message Working appears on the console display.
6.2.4 Wait for the voltmeter reading to stabilize. The voltmeter reading must be 400 5V. Do not enter
this measured value.
6.2.6 Select SETUP/REF on the console.

JOB CARDS
6.2.7 Enter and validate a photo-cell HV reference value of +6.000E+2 (600) V by using the NEXT and
VALID keys and the kV dial.
6.2.8 Select SETUP/CALIB/START the message Working appears on the console display.
6.2.9 Wait for the voltmeter reading to stabilize. The voltmeter reading must be 600 5V. Do not enter
this measured value.
6.2.11 Repeat steps 6.2.6 to 6.2.10 using a photo-cell HV reference value of +8.000E+2 (800) V. In this
case, the resulting voltmeter reading must be 800 5V.
6.2.12 Perform a CKSUM and return to application mode. If you are handing the machine back to the user
at this point, switch the Senographe DMR off, then on again.
322
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL SENSITIVITY Version No.:

AS A FUNCTION OF ITS VOLTAGE Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Plexiglass in thickness increments of 0.5 cm (minimum plexiglass dimensions 20 x 20 cm to insure com-
plete covering of the photo cell)
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Card IST 004 CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL HV MEASUREMENT AND SCALE FAC-
TOR
D Remove the protective film from bucky top plate.
Note: In case of error messages during this calibration, see IST 041 for explanations.
323
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL SENSITIVITY

AS A FUNCTION OF ITS VOLTAGE Job Card IST 005 2 of 4
SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL SENSITIVITY AS A FUNCTION OF ITS VOLTAGE
The photo cells sensitivity to light varies as a function of its voltage. This phenomenon is exploited by the
Senographe DMR to compensate for all the different possible configurations encountered in application mode
(kV, SID, etc.). The Senographe DMR determines the needed photo cell sensitivity for a given configuration
and applies the appropriate photo cell HV.
The objective here is to determine the coefficients beta and gamma that define the relationship between photo
cell HV and photo cell sensitivity. A third coefficient, alpha, is always equal to zero.
DEFAULT PARAMETER VALUES ARE ALPHA = +0.000E+0 (0), BETA = +7.377E+0 (7.377) AND
GAMMA = 4.931E+1 (49.31).
5.1.1 Calibration of heater current.

JOB CARDS
Set up the senographe DMR in the following configuration:

Mode: Manuel (2point).
Bucky 18 x 24 in place (with grid).
Focal spot: LARGE
Track: MO
Filter: MO
HV: 28 kV
mAs: 100 mAs
Take the exposure
To avoid excessive XRay doses on the photocell tube, place an empty cas-
CAUTION sette on the top of the image receptor.
B1 on generator CPU board 400PL3).
5.1.3 Set up the Senographe DMR in the following configuration:

6 cm of plexiglass
Contact (no magnification)
SID = 660 mm
No cassette
Note: To insure that the photo cell is fully covered by the plexiglass, be sure that it overlaps the front
edge of the cassette holder by about 1 cm.
324
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.2.1 Starting from application mode, select

SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/CELL/ PM/HV /CALIB on the console.
5.2.2 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A series of Xray exposures is taken. If more, or less,
plexiglass is needed to successfully perform the calibration, the message not enough plex or too
much plexi appears on the console display, and the series of exposures is halted.
If this happens:
Release the 2nd trigger button and, according to the message, either add or remove
1 cm of plexiglass,
Select SETUP/CALIB on the console,
Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down again,
JOB CARDS
Continue the procedure.
5.2.3 When the calibration is successful and complete, the series of Xray exposures halts automatically
and the message calibration end appears on the console display. At this point, release the 2nd trig-
ger button.
5.2.4 Select SETUP/PARAM on the console. Note down the calculated values of parameters beta and
gamma. Each of these values is displayed by rotating the kV dial on the console. Since the third
parameter, alpha, always has a value of zero, it is not necessary to note it down.
Note: The value of alpha MUST be zero. Do not modify it under any circumstances.
5.2.5 Perform a CKSUM and return to application mode. If youre turning the machine back over to
the user at this point, switch the Senographe DMR off, then on again.
325
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
326
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND Version No.:

CONFIGURATION Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
None
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
NEVER leave the Senographe DMR unattended during calibration of a

CAUTION screen pair.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
327
REV 3 sm 2308530100
SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND

CONFIGURATION Job Card IST 006 2 of 4
SECTION 5
SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND CONFIGURATION
The objective is to select and configure a screen pair prior to performing AEC calibrations on it.
5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR for this procedure.

Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch B1 on gen-
erator CPU board 400PL3).
5.2 Choose the screen pair to be configured and calibrated.

Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/FSC=x on the
console, where x is the screen pair indicator (A,B,C,D or E) corresponding to one of the 5 possible screen pairs
JOB CARDS
to be calibrated.
Note: Do not confuse the screen pair indicator with the screen pair name, which is chosen via the proce-
dure in section 5.6. While the 5 screen pair indicators cannot be changed and do not appear in
application mode, each of them can be assigned a screen pair name corresponding to the film/cas-
sette combination used, which appears on the console display in application AOP (0point) and
AEC (1point) modes.
5.3 Enable/disable screen pair.

Select SETUP/VALID on the console. This function gives the possibility to enable or disable the use of the
screen pair in application. Select NO to disable and YES to enable the screen pair.
D If yes is selected, then complete the entire calibration of the screen pair (see flow chart of AEC / AOP
calibration; illustration NO TAG; in the installation chapter 1).
D If no is selected, the user could not select the screen pair name which means that the entire calibration
of the screen pair was not completely done.
5.4 Choose screen type.

Screen type would be chosen by selecting TYPE on the console. However, the present version of the Seno-
graphe DMR does not provide any options for screen type. If you select TYPE, be sure to select SETUP before
proceeding to the next section.
5.5 Choose default AOP strategy.

Select STRAT/MEDIUM on the console.
Note: This default AOP strategy value will be verified and changed, if necessary, at the end of screen
pair calibration. This value has no effect on screen pair calibration.
328
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.6 Choose screen pair name.

Select SETUP/NAME on the console. Enter and validate the desired screen pair name, which can contain up
to 7 characters (A to Z, 0 to 9, and colon :) see Entry of an AlphaNumeric Value in Chapter 1 for informa-
tion on entering alphanumeric values.
This is the name that appears on the console display in application AOP (0point) and AEC (1point) modes.
Note: The default screen pair name is the screen pair indicator. See section 5.2.
Typically, this name is an abbreviation of the film and cassette type used to constitute the screen pair being
used. It is a good idea to ask the doctor for suggestions for the screen pair name.
Note: This name can be changed at any time in the future without producing the need to re-perform any
calibrations on the screen pair in question.
5.7 Proceed to the screen pair calibration procedures.
JOB CARDS
Once you have completed the procedures in this Job Card, perform a CKSUM, return to application mode and
proceed directly to Job Card IST 007, Calibration of Photo Cell Gain for a Given Screen Pair.
329
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
330
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A Version No.:

GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Date:
Time: hh min Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D Normal cassette of type used in the screen pair being calibrated (same cassette for all the procedure)
D Film of type used in the screen pair being calibrated.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Screenless cassette simulation tool OR cassette of type used in the screen pair being calibrated, but with-
JOB CARDS
out its screen (see section 5.2)
D Plexiglass in thickness increments of 10 mm (minimum plexiglass dimensions 200 x 200 mm to ensure
complete coverage of the photo-cell)
Tool reference : 45 203 014 or 46286893P1 (US pole).
Thickness accuracy of plexiglass plates is mandatory (10 0.2 mm)
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION These procedures produce Xrays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Card IST 006 SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND CONFIGURATION
D About checksum, see chapter 1, para. 37.
D kV accuracy check (if applicable) followed by kVp recalibration must be performed before this job
card (see IST 033, para. 5.1.11).
D Job Cards IST 004 and IST005 must have been successfully performed.
D In case of error messages during this calibration, see IST 041 for explanations.
331
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A

GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 007 2 of 20
SECTION 5
ADVANCE PREPARATION AND INFORMATION
5.1 Calibration steering. See illustration 1.

ILLUSTRATION 1
IST007 FLOWCHART
START
Other Film/Screen Other Film/Screen combination

First Film/Screen Calib. Combination with with the same Screen
NO another Screen type? NO
Perform section 8
step 1 through 10
JOB CARDS
YES YES
DMR+ setup for the contact mode:
Sections 6.1/6.2
Calibration without Screen Last Film/Screen

Calibration
Section 6.3 with another NO
Check without Screen
Screen type?
Section 6.4 Copy parameters
Section 8 step 1 through 5
Calibration with Screen YES
Section 6.5
Perform DMR+ setup for the contact mode:
Check with Screen
Section 7 Sections 6.1/6.2
Section 6.6
Calibration with Screen
Section 6.5
DMR+ setup for the Magnification
mode Check with Screen
Section 6.7 Section 6.6
Calibration without Screen

Section 6.8 DMR+ setup for the Magnification
mode
Check without Screen Section 6.7
Section 6.9
Section 6.10
Section 6.10
Check with Screen
Check with Screen
Section 6.11
Section 6.11
END
END
332
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.2 Information about cassettes and films used in these procedures
5.2.1 Determine whether or not the screenless cassette simulation tool can be used.
The screenless simulation tool can be used only if the cassette of the screen pair being calibrated
is among the following:
KODAK MinR 2
FUJI MA
AGFAGEVAERT MAMORAY
3M
DUPONT
KONICA
If the cassette of the screen pair being installed is not among these models, the screenless cassette
JOB CARDS
simulation tool cannot be used. In this case, a normal cassette of the type used in the screen pair
being calibrated must be used, but without its screen.
Note: If a screenless cassette simulation tool is not available, any of the cassette models listed above,
without its screen*, can be used during calibration of any screen pair that uses any of the models
in the list. For example, if youre calibrating a screen pair that uses the 3M cassette, you can use
a KODAK MinR 2 cassette without its screen. However, if you are calibrating a screen pair that
uses a cassette model that is not on this list, you must use a cassette of that exact model, without
its screen.
* When removing the screen from a cassette, be sure to leave the layer of plastic foam intact in
the cassette.
333
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.2.2 Learn how to use the screenless cassette simulation tool.

If used, the screenless cassette simulation tool must always be loaded with an undeveloped film
of the type used in the screen pair being calibrated, as shown in illustration 1.
Note: It is normal for the film not to lie flat at the rear edge of the film holding area. The rear edge of
the film holding area was in fact designed to insure that the FRONT edge of the film butts up per-
fectly against the front edge of the film holding area. This is critical, because the photo-cell is
located towards the front edge of the bucky and must be maximally covered by the film.
The loaded screenless cassette simulation tool must be installed in the Senographe DMR cassette
holder or in the bucky in the same way as an ordinary cassette.
Be sure to orient the simulation tool in the cassette holder with its front edge
CAUTION coinciding with the front edge of the bucky, as shown in illustration 1.
JOB CARDS
Note: Whenever the instructions in this Job Card instruct you to install the loaded cassette (without
screen) install the loaded simulation tool instead, if permitted (see section 5.2.1 above).
5.2.3 Each of the two cassettes (with and without screen) used in these procedures must be loaded with
undeveloped film of the type used in the screen pair being calibrated.
The same two cassettes must be used for all procedures in this Job Card.
The same undeveloped films can be left in the cassettes for all procedures in this Job
Card.
Mark the cassette without screen clearly so as not to confuse it with the cassette with
screen (not applicable if screenless cassette simulation tool is used).
5.3 Advance preparation if a new screen pair is being introduced

Select and configure a screen pair (see Job Card IST 006).
334
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 1
SCREENLESS CASSETTE SIMULATION TOOL
Screenless cassette simulation tool
Rear edge (away from patient)
Rear edge of
film does not
lie flat against
simulation tool
JOB CARDS
Front edge (towards patient)
Undeveloped film
Film must be loaded with its front edge butted

up against the front rim of the simulation tool
Note: The loaded screenless cassette simulation tool must be installed in

the cassette holder or in the bucky of the Senographe DMR, oriented
as shown.
335
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.4 General instructions to be observed during all procedures in this Job Card
5.4.1 The photo-cell must be in its most forward position (towards the patient) throughout the procedures
in this Job Card.
Note: Number the plexiglass plates from 1 to 6 and use the same plates for the same thickness.
5.4.2 When selecting plexiglass thicknesses (2, 4 or 6 cm) in the menus between exposure sequences,
never go up in the menu structure higher than indicated in the procedure being performed. Doing
so will reset stored intermediate values and ruin the calibration. Also, once all three thicknesses
have been calibrated, follow the instructions immediately for performing the calculation. Select
SETUP no more than the precise number of times indicated, again at the risk of losing intermediate
values prior to the calculation.
5.4.3 On the other hand, if an error is made during the calibration of one of the three plexiglass thicknesses
JOB CARDS
(for example, the plexiglass was incorrectly placed or is not the correct thickness), then you must
go upward in the menus (by selecting SETUP a certain number of times) at least to the level that
gives the choices GRID, SCREEN and CALIB (just below PM_YLD). Here you reset the inter-
mediate values intentionally, and you must repeat all three thickness calibrations.
5.4.4 Normally, this Job Card is used when a new screen pair is being introduced. In this case, follow the
procedures in this Job Card in the exact order shown.
5.4.5 If, however, only part of the photo-cell gain calibration is being done (e.g. because of a mistake dur-
ing a certain part of the calibration), the procedures can be performed independently of the others,
but be sure to read and carry out all preliminary preparations and procedures associated with the
procedure in question.
5.4.6 When placing plexiglass on the cassette holder or 1.5 magnification device, the plexiglass must
always overlap the front edge (towards the patient) by about 1 cm to insure that the photo-cell is
fully covered.
5.4.7 When taking a series of calibration exposures, if arcing occurs, the arcing message appears on the
console display. This does not mean that the series must be repeated (i.e. the software keeps track
of which exposures in the series were successful even if it must repeat one due to arcing). Only if
there were a serious arcing problem would the software abort the series, in which case it would have
to be repeated.
5.4.8 If you are in the middle of IST 007, and must stop, continue at another time, there are certain steps
that you need not repeat. For example:
D if you have completed step 6.4.13, then you can start with step 6.5
D if you have completed step 6.6.13, then you can start with step 6.7
D if you have completed step 6.9.12, then you can start with step 6.10.
336
REV 3 sm 2308530100

SECTION 6
CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN
The objective is to determine the Xray absorption of the screen. The calibration software achieves this by sub-
tracting the photo-cell gain obtained with a screen from the photo-cell gain obtained without a screen.
Therefore, each configuration must be calibrated twice once with and once without a screen.
6 coefficients are calculated for each of 5 track/filter combinations. Thus, 30 coefficients are calculated for
each of 4 different cases (2 configurations, each calibrated once with and once without a screen), for a total
of 120 coefficients.
6.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR for these procedures.
JOB CARDS
6.1.2 Set the SID to that used by the user, 610 mm or the most common 660 mm.
6.2 Prepare the Senographe DMR for the procedures using contact mode with grid (bucky 18 x 24 ).

18 x 24 compression paddle installed
Bucky with Grid installed
SID as indicated in section 6.1.2
6.2.2 Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/

FSC=x on the console, where x is the screen pair indicator (A,B,C,D,E) corresponding to the screen
pair being calibrated. See Job Card IST 006 SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND CONFIGU-
RATION
6.2.3 Select CALIB/PM_yld/GRID/YES on the console. This sets up the calibration for the with grid
procedure.
337
REV 3 sm 2308530100

6.3 Perform the procedure using contact mode with grid (bucky 18 x 24 ) and cassette without screen.
6.3.1 Be sure to be familiar with the advance preparation and information given in section 5 before pro-
ceeding, especially the information concerning the use, if permitted, of the screenless cassette sim-
ulation tool. Also, be sure to prepare the Senographe DMR by following sections 6.1 and 6.2 before
proceeding.
6.3.2 Select SETUP/SCREEN/NO on the console. This sets up the calibration for the cassette without
screen procedure.
6.3.3 Install the loaded cassette (without screen).
BE VERY SURE THAT THE CASSETTE WITHOUT SCREEN IS

WARNING INSTALLED BECAUSE THE CHECK IN SECTION 6.4 WILL NOT
SHOW AN ERROR DUE TO A MISTAKE HERE.
JOB CARDS
6.3.4 Put 2 cm of plexiglass on the bucky 18 x 24.
6.3.5 Lower the compression paddle onto the plexiglass.
6.3.6 Select SETUP/CALIB/CALIB/THICK/2 cm on the console. This tells the software the amount
of plexiglass present.
6.3.7 Select SETUP/CALIB on the console.
6.3.8 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A series of Xray exposures is taken (at least 25).
6.3.9 When the series of exposures is complete, the message thick plexi end appears on the console dis-
play. At this point, release the 2nd trigger button.
6.3.10 Raise the compression paddle and increase the amount of plexiglass to 4 cm. Select SETUP/
THICK/4 cm on the console.
6.3.11 Lower the compression paddle onto the plexiglass. Repeat sections 6.3.7 to 6.3.9.
6.3.14 Select SETUP/CALC/VALID on the console. This executes the calculation of the 6 coefficients
(A0, A1, A2, B0, B1, and B2) for each of 5 track/filter combinations. The message PM_yld cal end
appears on the console display.
6.3.15 Proceed immediately to section 6.4 to check calibration accuracy.
338
REV 3 sm 2308530100

6.4 Check the contact mode with grid (bucky 18 x 24 ) and cassette without screen calibration accuracy.
Note: This check must always be made immediately after performing the calibration procedure in sec-
tion 6.3.
6.4.1 Copy the without screen parameters for the screen pair being calibrated to the with screen parameter
location of an unused screen pair (generally E) by following this procedure:
FILM/COPY/SOURCE/SCREEN/NO on the console.
Select SETUP/FSC/FSC=x, where x is the screen pair indicator corresponding to the
screen pair being calibrated.
Select SETUP/SETUP/TARG/SCREEN/YES.
Select SETUP/FSC/FSC=y, where y is the indicator of the unused screen pair.
JOB CARDS
Be very sure of the choice of unused screen pair indicator y (A, B, C, D or E).
CAUTION If a mistake is made, there is a risk of erasing good parameter values on
another screen pair that is in use.
Once you are SURE that the screen pair indicator y is correct (see CAUTION above),
copy the parameters by selecting SETUP/SETUP/COPY/VALID. The message
COPY EXECUTED appears on the console display.
6.4.2 If necessary, enable use of the unused screen pair. (From application mode, select SETUP/GENE/
INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/FSC=y/VALID/YES on the console.)
6.4.3 Enable visual display of parameter values when in application mode. See Display of Parameters
Following an Exposure in chapter 1, section 3102.
6.4.4 Perform a CKSUM and go to application mode.
6.4.5 Set up the Senographe DMR in the configuration given in section 6.2.1.
6.4.7 Put 60 mm of plexiglass on the bucky.
339
REV 3 sm 2308530100

6.4.9 Set up the following exposure:

Mode: AEC (1point)
Screen pair: y (this is the indicator of the unused screen pair chosen in section 6.4.1)
Focal spot: LARGE
Track: MO
Filter: MO
HV: 30 kV
6.4.10 Take a short exposure. It is not necessary for the exposure to be complete, so the 2nd trigger button
can be released as soon as Xrays are being produced.
Note: Even if exposure is aborted due to insufficient available mAs, the thickness displayed on the con-
sole is useable. It is NOT USEFUL to wait for the tube to cool and repeat the exposure.
JOB CARDS
6.4.11 Note in the Job Card IST043 (IST007 data section) the thickness displayed on the console after the
exposure. It must be equal to the plexiglass thickness 2 mm.
6.4.12 Repeat sections 6.4.8 to 6.4.11 using 4 cm and 2 cm of plexiglass.
6.4.13 If the displayed thickness is outside the tolerance given in section 6.4.11, first check that the correct
screen pair was selected in section 6.4.9. Otherwise, the corresponding calibration procedure (con-
tact mode with grid and cassette without screen, section 6.3) was probably done incorrectly. That
procedure, as well as this check procedure immediately following it, would have to be repeated (this
can be done independently of the other procedures in this Job Card).
Note: See formula in Job card IST043 (IST007 data):

Delta (4cm) must be greater than Delta (2cm) and Delta (6cm)
absolute value(Delta (2cm) Delta (6cm)) < 1.5 mm.
6.5 Perform the procedure using contact mode with grid (bucky 18 x 24 ) and cassette with screen.
ceeding. Also, be sure to prepare the Senographe DMR by following sections 6.1 and 6.2 before
proceeding.

SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/FSC=x/CALIB/PM_yld on the console,
where x is the screen pair being calibrated. This sets up the calibration for the cassette with screen
procedure.
6.5.3 Install the loaded cassette (with screen).
BE VERY SURE THAT THE CASSETTE WITH SCREEN IS INSTALLED

WARNING BECAUSE THE CHECK IN SECTION 6.6 WILL NOT SHOW AN ERROR
DUE TO A MISTAKE HERE.
340
REV 3 sm 2308530100

6.5.4 Put 2 cm of plexiglass on the cassette holder.
6.5.6 Select CALIB/CALIB/THICK/2 cm on the console. This tells the software the amount of plexi-
glass present.
6.5.9 When the series of exposures is complete, the message thick calib end appears on the console dis-
JOB CARDS
6.6 Check the contact mode with grid (bucky 18 x 24 ) and cassette with screen calibration accuracy.
tion 6.5.
6.6.1 Enable visual display of parameter values when in application mode. Display of Parameters Fol-
lowing an Exposure in chapter 1, section 3102.
6.6.2 If necessary, enable use of the screen pair being calibrated. (From application mode, select SETUP/
GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/FSC=x/VALID/YES on the console.)
6.6.4 Select the screen pair being calibrated and verify that its name is as entered in Job Card IST 006
6.6.5 Set up the Senographe DMR in the configuration given in section 6.2.1.
341
REV 3 sm 2308530100

6.6.7 Put 6 cm of plexiglass on the cassette holder.

Mode: AEC (1point)
Screen pair: Select the name of the screen pair being calibrated
Focal spot: LARGE
Track: MO; Filter: MO
HV: 30 kV
Collimation: MAXIMAL SIZE
JOB CARDS
screen pair was selected in section 6.6.9. Otherwise, the corresponding calibration procedure (con-
tact mode with grid and cassette with screen, section 6.5) was probably done incorrectly. That pro-
cedure, as well as this check procedure immediately following it, would have to be repeated (this
can be done independently of the other procedures in this Job Card).

6.7 Prepare the Senographe DMR for the procedure using magnification mode without grid.
Set up the Senographe DMR in the following configuration:
D 18 x 24 cm compression paddle installed .
D Magnification device installed (always in the bottom holes)
Note: Magnification of 1.5 if the SID = 660 and Magnification of 1.4 if the SID = 610
D Cassette holder 18 x 24 in place ( no grid ).
D SID as indicated in section 6.1.2
D Perform all the magnification calibration (with and without screen) in maximal collimation size.
At each time you move the magnification plate, the collimation is set by default in minimal size 9x9.
342
REV 3 sm 2308530100

6.8 Perform the procedure using magnification mode without grid (cassette holder 18 x 24 ) and cassette
without screen.
ceeding, especially the information concerning the use, if permitted, of the screenless cassette sim-
ulation tool. Also, be sure to prepare the Senographe DMR by following sections 6.1 and 6.7 before
proceeding.

RATION
6.8.3 Select CALIB/PM_YLD/GRID/NO on the console. This sets up the calibration for the without
grid procedure.
JOB CARDS
6.8.4 Select SETUP/SCREEN/NO on the console. This sets up the calibration for the cassette without
screen procedure.
BE VERY SURE THAT THE CASSETTE WITHOUT SCREEN IS

WARNING INSTALLED BECAUSE THE CHECK IN SECTION 6.9 WILL NOT
SHOW AN ERROR DUE TO A MISTAKE HERE.
6.8.6 Put 2 cm of plexiglass on the magnification device.
6.8.8 Check for maximal collimation size.
Note: The small focus is automatically selected during this calibration.
6.8.13 Raise the compression paddle and increase the amount of plexiglass to 40 mm. Select SETUP/
343
REV 3 sm 2308530100

6.9 Check the magnification mode without grid (cassette holder 18 x 24 ) and cassette without screen calibra-
tion accuracy.
tion 6.8.
6.9.1 Copy the without screen parameters for the screen pair being calibrated to the with screen parameter
location of an unused screen pair (generally E) by following this procedure:
JOB CARDS

FILM/COPY/SOURCE/SCREEN/NO on the console.
Select SETUP/FSC/FSC=x, where x is the screen pair indicator corresponding to the
screen pair being calibrated.
Select SETUP/SETUP/TARG/SCREEN/YES.
Select SETUP/FSC/FSC=y, where y is the indicator of the unused screen pair.
Be very sure of the choice of unused screen pair indicator y (A, B, C, D or E).
CAUTION If a mistake is made, there is a risk of erasing good parameter values on
another screen pair that is in use.
Once you are SURE that the screen pair indicator y is correct (see CAUTION above),
copy the parameters by selecting SETUP/SETUP/COPY/VALID. The message
COPY EXECUTED appears on the console display.
Following an Exposure in chapter 1, section 3102
6.9.4 Set up the Senographe DMR in the configuration given in section 6.7.
344
REV 3 sm 2308530100


Mode: AEC (1point)
Screen pair: y (this is the indicator of the unused screen pair chosen in section 6.9.1)
Focal spot: SMALL (IMPORTANT for thickness accuracy)
Track: MO
Filter: MO
HV: 30 kV
Collimation: maximal size.
JOB CARDS
screen pair was selected in section 6.9.8. Otherwise, the corresponding calibration procedure (1.5
magnification mode without grid and cassette without screen, section 6.8) was probably done incor-
rectly. That procedure, as well as this check procedure immediately following it, would have to be
repeated (this can be done independently of the contact mode procedures in this Job Card).

6.10 Perform the procedure using magnification mode without grid (cassette holder 18 x 24 ) and cassette with
screen.
ceeding. Also, be sure to prepare the Senographe DMR by following sections 6.1 and 6.7 before
proceeding.

RATION
6.10.3 Select CALIB/PM_YLD/GRID/NO on the console. This sets up the calibration for the without
grid procedure.
345
REV 3 sm 2308530100

BE VERY SURE THAT THE CASSETTE WITH SCREEN IS INSTALLED

WARNING BECAUSE THE CHECK IN SECTION 6.11 WILL NOT SHOW AN
ERROR DUE TO A MISTAKE HERE.
6.10.7 Check for maximal collimation size.
JOB CARDS
Note: The small focus is automatically selected during this calibration.
6.11 Check the magnification mode without grid (cassette holder 18 x 24 ) and cassette with screen calibration
accuracy.
tion 6.10.
Following an Exposure in chapter 1, section 3102.
346
REV 3 sm 2308530100

6.11.2 If necessary, enable use of the screen pair being calibrated. (From application mode, select SETUP/
GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/FSC=x/VALID/YES on the console.)
6.11.4 Select the screen pair being calibrated and verify that its name is as entered in Job Card IST 006
6.11.5 Set up the Senographe DMR in the configuration given in section 6.7.
JOB CARDS
Mode: AEC (1point)
Focal spot: SMALL (IMPORTANT for thickness accuracy)
Track: MO
Filter: MO
HV: 30 kV
Collimation: maximal size.
6.11.11 Note in Job Card IST043 the thickness displayed on the console after the exposure. It must be equal
to the plexiglass thickness 2 mm.
347
REV 3 sm 2308530100

screen pair was selected in section 6.11.9. otherwise, the corresponding calibration procedure (1.5
magnification mode without grid and cassette with-screen, section 6.10) was probably done incor-
rectly. That procedure, as well as this check procedure immediately following it, will have to be
repeated (it can be done independently of the other procedures in this Job Card).

6.11.14 It is ESSENTIAL to disable the UNUSED screen pair y that was used to test the without-screen
parameters (from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/
ALGO/FSC=y/VALID/NO).
6.11.15 If necessary, disable use of the screen pair being calibrated (from application mode, select SETUP/
JOB CARDS
GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/FSC=x/VALID/NO, but see CAUTION in section

3.)
SECTION 7
CALIBRATING THE 5TH COUPLE (ONLY)
Perform this calibration only when you need to calibrate the 5th couple.
Presuming that the last free couple is E the procedure is as shown below.
7.1 Perform the no-screen/contact-mode calibration (similar to the procedure in Section 6.3)
7.2 Copy E no-screen to E with-screen and test (similar to the procedure in Section 6.4)
7.3 Repeat 7.1 and 7.2 in magnification-mode (similar to the procedure in Sections 6.8 & 6.9)
7.4 Perform the with-screen/contact-mode calibration and test (similar to the procedure in Section 6.6 & 6.5)
7.5 Repeat 7.4 in magnification-mode and test (similar to the procedure in Section 6.10 & 6.11).
Note: The above method could be applied to all couples, but is more time-consuming.
SECTION 8
COPY OF PARAMETERS FOR ANOTHER FILM/SCREEN COMBINATION
Perform this procedure VERY CAREFULLY and EXACTLY as given

CAUTION below. Failure to copy the parameters correctly could ruin the calibration of
existing calibrated screen pairs.
348
REV 3 sm 2308530100

1. Starting from application mode, select (see illustration 110)

SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/COPY/SOURCE/SCREEN/NO on the console.
2. Select SETUP/FSC/FSC=x, where x is the screen pair indicator corresponding to an existing calibrated
screen pair using the same cassette as the screen pair currently being calibrated.
3. Select SETUP/SETUP/TARG/SCREEN/NO.
4. Select SETUP/FSC/FSC=y, where y is the indicator of the screen pair being calibrated.
5. Once you are SURE that the screen pair indicator y is correct, copy the without screen parameters by select-
ing SETUP/SETUP/COPY/VALID. The message COPY EXECUTED appears on the console display.
6. Select SETUP/SOURCE/SCREEN/YES on the console.
JOB CARDS
7. Select SETUP/FSC/FSC=x, where x is the screen pair indicator corresponding to an existing calibrated
screen pair using the same cassette as the screen pair currently being calibrated.
8. Select SETUP/SETUP/TARGET/SCREEN/YES.
9. Select SETUP/FSC/FSC=y, where y is the indicator of the screen pair being calibrated.
10. Once you are SURE that the screen pair indicator y is correct, copy the with screen parameters by selecting
SETUP/SETUP/COPY/VALID. The message COPY EXECUTED appears on the console display.
349
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
350
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: UNPACKING THE EQUIPMENT Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Ratchet wrench with 22 mm socket
D 6 mm Allen wrench
JOB CARDS
D Claw hammer or other suitable tool for removing packing nails
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D Follow standard safety practices for handling and moving large machines.
CAUTION Never lift or move the gantry by its handles.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
351
REV 3 sm 2308530100
UNPACKING THE EQUIPMENT

Job Card IST 008 2 of 4
SECTION 5
The objective is to unpack the gantry, generator and accessories and move them to the mammography room.
5.1 Inspect for damage and perform initial unpacking.

The Senographe DMR was completely inspected for proper operation and appearance before shipment. How-
ever, it is necessary to inspect the product after the shipment is received. Visually inspect the packages for any
apparent damage. If there are signs of damage, refer to the Damage in Transportation statement in the front
of this manual.
Open the packages and refer to the Product Delivery Instructions (PDI). Verify that items on the list are present
in the package. Carefully examine the contents for small parts.
5.2 Perform initial unpacking.

JOB CARDS
5.2.1 Remove the outer cardboard covering from the crate.
5.2.2 Remove ramp from crate and put it in place.
5.2.3 Remove the protective screen and the other accessories from the crate and move them into the mam-
mography room.
5.3 Unpack gantry.
5.3.1 Use the 6 mm Allen wrench to remove the four gantry baseplate shipping holddown screws.
5.3.2 Thread the four special jacking bolts (provided in the accessory pouch) into their respective holes
in the gantry baseplate. Place the four flat round jack feet (provided in the accessory pouch) on the
floor of the crate with their nipples facing upwards. Continue turning the jacking bolts downwards
until their hollowed ends engage with the nipples of the jack feet.
5.3.3 Use the ratchet wrench with a 22 mm socket to progressively jack the gantry up via the four jacking
bolts.
5.3.4 When gantry baseplate is high enough to be clear of the wooden support blocks, remove these
blocks.
5.3.5 Lower the gantry progressively via the four jacking bolts until it is fully supported by the castors.
5.3.6 Leave the four special jacking bolts threaded into the gantry baseplate and keep the jack feet aside
(the jack feet will be used again when installing the gantry).
352
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.3.7 Carefully roll the gantry down the ramp and into the mammography room.
5.4 Unpack generator.
5.4.1 Remove the supports from the generator cabinet.
5.4.2 Carefully roll the generator down the ramp and into the mammography room.
JOB CARDS
353
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
354
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: PHYSICAL INSTALLATION Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Ratchet wrench with 22 mm socket
D 8 mm Allen wrench
JOB CARDS
D Drill
D Screwdrivers
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D Follow standard safety practices for handling and moving large machines.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Card IST 008 UNPACKING THE EQUIPMENT
SECTION 5
PHYSICAL INSTALLATION
The objective is to place and anchor physically the gantry in its permanent position, and to assemble the protec-
tive screen.
Note: The generator is not permanently installed in this Job Card because it must remain mobile until
the wiring between it and the gantry is complete (Job Card IST 010 WIRING). The generator
must therefore remain on its castors for the moment.
The CE marking label, located on one of the large side panels of the generator, must remain vis-
ible after installation of the generator.
355
REV 3 sm 2308530100
PHYSICAL INSTALLATION
5.1 Install and anchor the gantry into its permanent position.
D Before you proceed, it is recommended to perform a final verification of the information given in the Pre
Installation Manual, particularly concerning clearances around the gantry when installed in its permanent
position.
D If no Stereotix 2 is to be installed, the anchoring is not mandatory, only recommended (except in seismic
area).
5.1.1 Place the drilling template (provided in the installation kit) flat on the floor, align it with the desired
permanent position and mark the three gantry mounting hole centers on the floor.
5.1.2 Drill the three gantry mounting holes (depth and diameter depend on the type of insert to be used
see below).
5.1.3 Place the appropriate type of insert (not provided) into each of the three mounting holes (depending
JOB CARDS
on the type and thickness of floor). The inserts should be able to receive the 10 x 80 mm screws (pro-
vided), or, for U.S. installations, the closest U.S. equivalent (not provided).
5.1.4 Wheel the gantry so that its three baseplate mounting holes are aligned with the three holes drilled
in the floor.
5.1.5 Place the four flat round jack feet on the floor with their nipples facing upwards.
5.1.6 Turn the four jacking bolts downwards until their hollowed ends engage with the nipples of the four
jack feet.
5.1.7 Use the ratchet wrench with a 22 mm socket to progressively jack the gantry up via the four jacking
bolts until the castors are clear of the floor.
5.1.8 Use the 8 mm Allen wrench to remove the castors.
5.1.9 Lower the gantry progressively via the four jacking bolts until it is fully supported by its baseplate.
Remove the four jacking bolts completely.
Note: The four jack feet remain below the gantry baseplate. If the floor is not perfectly even, level the
DMR base using the 4 screws PN 45562657 (provided in installation kit). Insert them in place
of the jacking blots to push on the jack feet.
5.1.10 To provide access to all three gantry baseplate mounting holes (one of the holes is located inside
the gantry column), remove the two column side panels (see IST 032 if necessary).
5.1.11 Bolt the gantry to the floor with the three 10 x 80 mm diameter screws (provided) or, for U.S. instal-
lations, the closest U.S. equivalent (not provided).
5.1.12 Cover all unused gantry baseplate holes with the plastic plugs provided.
5.2 Assemble the protective screen.

See the mounting instructions delivered with the Xray shield (one to three panels). Anchoring to the floor
is not mandatory (except in seismic areas).
356
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CONNECTING THE CABLES AND Version No.:

HV TANK CHECK Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Standard set of socket wrenches and nut drivers
JOB CARDS
D Standard set of open end wrenches
D HV grease: GE P/N C333633
SECTION 3
SPECIAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
The chronological order given in Installation Steering in Chapter 1 must be followed.
357
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CONNECTING THE CABLES AND

HV TANK CHECK Job Card IST 010 2 of 12
SECTION 5
CONNECTING THE CABLES
The objective is to connect the cables between the generator, gantry and console, and to connect, if used, the
X-ray lamp, room-lamp and room-door wires to the generator.
The AC supply cable is not connected in this Job Card - that operation is performed in IST 011.
Note: If applicable and for convenience and tidiness, excessive cable length can be stored in a coil (with
a maximum diameter of 350mm) in the enclosed space underneath the generator (there is a recess
in the botom of one of the side panels that allows the cable to pass under the panel).
ILLUSTRATION 1
COILING AND STORING EXCESS CABLE
JOB CARDS
Generator cabinet
350mm maximum
5.1 Routing and connecting the cable loom to the generator

The cables are already connected to the gantry - it is only necessary to route and connect them to the generator.
Do not cable-tie the cables until they have all been routed and connected.
1. Determine the normal working positions of the gantry and the generator and position them there.
2. Remove the cable harness from the gantry and, as appropriate, either lay the cables in the floor or wall duct-
ing, or coil excessive cable length and store it under the generator (see Illustration 1).
3. Undo the four screws on the top cover of the generator cabinet and lift off the cover.
4. Lift up and remove the generators end covers (item 1 in Illustration 1) and then the side covers.
5. Bolt the cable-support bracket to the lower cross-member of the chassis adjacent to the HV unit (see
Illustration 2).
6. Referring to Table 1, identify the cables in the harness and their termination details.
358
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 2
LOCATION OF THE CABLE-SUPPORT BRACKET
Bracket mounting screws

(screwed in place for
shipment)
Mounting bracket
JOB CARDS
TABLE 1
CABLE AND TERMINATION IDENTIFICATION
Shown on
Cable Colour Connects to Illustration
Anode return (+HT) Black HV tank 3
HV cable Grey HV tank 3
Emergency stop Grey TB1 Autotransformer 7
Gantry ground Green/yellow Grounding bar 4

200-PL2 :
Gantry DC supply Brown XJ6 (+VE) XJ7 (VE) 4
400PL2: XJ6 through XJ9

Fiber-optic links Black and grey 5
Starter motor cable White 300PL2 XJ2 6

The screen of this cable is terminated with a metal grounding clip which must be securely
fixed with the screw pre-installed on the panel (see Illustration 6 for location).
359
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.2 Connecting the HV cable

1. Remove the protective covering from the HV cable connector and apply HV grease to it.
2. Plug the HV cable into the HV unit and carefully tighten the connecting ring (item 2 in Illustration 3).
3. To ensure proper grounding of the HV cable, tighten the 1.5 mm screw on the top of the cable locking ring.
Note: If the HV cable is not properly grounded, then intermittent console lock-up and random error mes-
sages could occur in such an event, check the grounding at both ends of the cable.
5.3 Connecting the anode return cable
1. Connect the X-ray tube anode return wire (marked BLOC +HT) to the threaded stud marked with a ground
symbol on the top of the HV unit (item 1 in Illustration 3).
Do not tighten the nut excessively doing so may well damage the thread or
CAUTION break off the stud and in such an event the sealed HV unit would have to be
returned to the factory for repair.
JOB CARDS
ILLUSTRATION 3
HV TANK CONNECTIONS
TB1
2 200 PL4
360
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 4
GANTRY DC SUPPLY AND GROUND CONNECTIONS
400 PL3
400 PL1 Capacitor

box
400 PL2
JOB CARDS
200 PL2
XJ6
XJ7
701 PL1
1
Power Power
Line Line
Filter Filter

5.4 Connecting the gantry power and grounding cables
1. Referring to Illustration 4, route the gantry 27v power cables to 200PL2: the +ve connector to XJ6, the
0v connector to XJ5 (cables are routed under the capacitor box, through the middle of the generator).
2. Route the green/yellow ground cable using the same way and connect it to the grounding bar (item 1 in
Illustration 4).
BE VERY CAREFUL: YOU CONNECT THE GANTRY CABLES TO XJ6

WARNING & 7 ON 200 PL2 AND NOT TO XJ6 & 7 ON 200 PL1 THE 200PL1 CON-
NECTORS CARRY LINE LEVEL AC VOLTAGES WHICH, IF CON-
NECTED TO THE GANTRY, WILL CAUSE CONSIDERABLE DAMAGE
TO THE GANTRY COMPONENTS.
361
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 5
FIBRE-OPTIC LINKS CONNECTION
400 PL3
XJ6
400 PL1 through
XJ9
400 PL2
Fibre-
optic
cables
JOB CARDS
200 PL2
701 PL1
Power Power
Line Line
Filter Filter

5.5 Connecting the fibre-optic cables
Fibre-optic cables are more fragile than ordinary coper-stranded cable and
CAUTION you must therefore treat them with greater care bend or twist them only as
much as is strictly necesary to install and connect them.
1. Route the black plastic pipe protecting the fibre-optic cables as shown in Ilustration 5, taking care to keep
a smooth radius on all bends (fibers are routed under the capacitor box, through the middle of the genera-
tor).
2. Identify the four connectors XJ6 through XJ9 on the generator interface board 400PL2 and connect the four
fibre-optic cables to their respective connectors.
362
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 6
ANODE STARTER MOTOR CABLE CONNECTION
Anode
starter 400 PL3
cable
400 PL1
400 PL2
Metal
grounding
JOB CARDS
clip here
200 PL2
701 PL1
Power
Line
Filter

5.6 Connecting the anode starter cable
1. Route the anode starter cable (marked 300 PL2 XJ2) as shown in Illustration 6 and connect it to XJ2 on
the anode starter board 300PL2.
2. Remove the metal grounding clip; pass the anode starter cable inside and bolt the metal grounding clip back
to the panel.
363
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.7 Connecting the emergency stop cable

1. Route the emergency stop 2wire cable (marked Autotransformer TB1200PL2 XJ10) as shown in
Illustration 7 and connect it to the orange connector TB1 (available for systems shipped after October,
2000) located on top of the Autotransformer (TB1 location is shown on illustration 3).
Do not over tight excessive tightening may well strip the thread in the sheet
CAUTION metal.
ILLUSTRATION 7
EMERGENCY STOP CABLE CONNECTION
JOB CARDS
400 PL3
400 PL1
400 PL2
Emergency
cable
200 PL2
XJ 10
701 PL1
Power
Line
Filter
364
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.8 X-ray ON and room door wiring

Refer to IST042 for connecting the X-ray ON and room-door wiring.
5.9 Connecting the console cable.
1. Route console cable (provided in the accessory pouch) from console to generator.
Note: Console cable goes on the inside of the middle generator cross-member.
2. Locate connector XJ8 on generator command board 400PL1 and connect this cable to it.
3. Route and connect opposite end of console cable to the console.
CAUTION Tighten the connector retaining screws finger tight only at each end of con-
sole cable.
JOB CARDS
5.10 Connecting the compression footswitch cables (See illustration 8).
5.10.1 2Pedal Footswitch basic hardware (Compression):
1. Remove gantry column left side cover to access 800 PL1 Gantry Power Board.
2. Route the two footswitch cables along gantry main harness (use ties).
3. Attach each footswitch cable to the Gantry chassis using a clamping plate (4),
4. Connect the two footswitch cables to the fixed connectors XJ10A and XJ10B on the Gantry
800PL1 Power Board (2).
365
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 8
FOOTSWITCH CABLE CONNECTION

$(&+ %*&

%&

JOB CARDS
%)( %%('*!(
"' "%$ (
#!$ &$''

366
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.11 Final cable dressing and tying

2. Secure the HV cable to the lower and middle cross-members with two cable-ties (one on each cross-mem-
ber).
3. Arrange the remaining cables, then attach them to the lower and middle cabinet cross-members with two
cable-ties (one on each cross-member).
Note: Secure the anode current return wire BLOC +HT to the lower cross-member only.
4. Secure the X-ray lamp and room lamp wires (if used) to the lower and middle cross-members with two
cable-ties (one on each cross-member).
5. Leaving sufficient slack to avoid stress on the fibre-optic connectors, attach the black plastic tubing to the
middle cross-member with a cable-tie.
JOB CARDS
6. Attach the two gantry power leads and the protective grounding cable to the lower cabinet cross-member
with a cable-tie.
367
REV 3 sm 2308530100

SECTION 6
HV TANK
1. In order to release pressure during long exposure loosen by 3mm the vent screw of the HV tank.
ILLUSTRATION 9
HV TANK
VENT SCREW
JOB CARDS
368
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CONNECTING TO THE AC SUPPLY Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D AC voltmeter
D Torque wrench (optional)
JOB CARDS
Note: The recommended torque for all lug nuts is 4 Nm
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Follow standard safety techniques and procedures for handling equipment and circuits carrying AC supply
voltages.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
You must follow the chronological order given in Installation Steering in Chapter 1.
369
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CONNECTING TO THE AC SUPPLY

SECTION 5
The objective is to determine the nominal voltage and frequency of the available power source, configure the
DMR generator accordingly, and connect it to the AC supply.
5.1 Checking the nominal line voltage and frequency

Consult the user to determine the nominal line voltage and frequency, then measure the open-circuit line volt-
age to verify that it corresponds to that nominal line voltage 10%. Allowable nominal line voltages are 200,
208, 220, 240, 380, 415 V single-phase.
5.2 Positioning the voltage selection board

Referring to llustration 1 and Table 1, install the voltage selection board IN2 on the AC Distribution board
200-PL1 according to the nominal AC supply voltage.
JOB CARDS
5.3 Configuring the DMR according to the line frequency

The DMR operates with either a 50 or 60 Hz line frequency without adjustment.
5.4 Voltage selection

Referring to llustration 1, check the position of the wire SEL on the AC Distribution board 200-PL1 it will
probably be connected to the 240v transformer tap. If this tap selection does not correspond to the nominal
(not the measured) line voltage you determined in section 5.1, then remove and reconnect the SEL wire to the
appropriate terminal.
Note: Do not make a connection to the 0V terminal for the SEL wire the terminal is reserved exclu-
sively for performing the measurement in Job Card IST 012 and the DMR cannot function nor-
mally when the SEL wire is in this position.
TABLE 1
POSITION OF VOLTAGE SELECTION BOARDS IN2 AND SEL WIRE
Nominal single-phase Position of

line voltage Position of IN2 SEL wire
415V HT 415V
380V HT 380V
240V BT 240V
220V BT 220V
208V BT 208V
200V BT 200V
440V use transformer reference : 45563370

480V and 380V configuration
370
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 1
LOCATION OF VOLTAGE SELECTION BOARD IN2 AND SEL WIRE
JOB CARDS
SEL wire
HV tank 701
200 PL1
IN2 board
position
BT for <240v HT for >380v

AC input AC input
371
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.5 Configure fuses F1, F2.

To configure these fuses (see illustration 2 for location), follow the indications on the label located on the bot-
tom of the generator cabinet, just below the AC supply switch S1.
FOR SAFE OPERATION OF THE DMR, PAY PARTICULAR ATTEN-

WARNING TION TO THE INFORMATION ON THIS LABEL. DETERMINE WHE-
THER THE AC SUPPLY CONSISTS OF TWO PHASES OF A
THREE-PHASE SYSTEM, OR A SINGLE PHASE AND NEUTRAL.
WHEN THE SUPPLY IS SINGLE-PHASE WITH NEUTRAL, A METAL

CYLINDER (delivered with the DMR) MUST BE INSTALLED INSTEAD
OF F1.
ILLUSTRATION 2
LOCATION OF THE FUSES
JOB CARDS
372
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.6 Connecting the AC supply cable.
1. Verify that generator AC supply Switch 200-S1 is in the 0 position and that AC supply is OFF.
2. Connect the AC line and neutral wires to the L & N terminals and the ground wire to the yellow/green termi-
nal as shown in illustration 3.
3. Cable-tie the cable to the lower cross-member of the cabinet using the holes provided in the cross-member.
4. Route and connect the other end of the supply cable to the AC supply source.
ILLUSTRATION 3
CONNECTING THE AC SUPPLY CABLE
AC supply cable Tie up
JOB CARDS
200 PL1
HV tank
701
200 PL4
200 PL2
373
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
374
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: LINE RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D a.c. voltmeter with MIN and MAX VOLT readout
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION During the procedures in this Job Card, you will be in close proximity to cir-
cuits operating at line voltage take appropriate precautions.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
You must follow the chronological order given in Installation Steering in Chapter 1.
Note: Make sure the console is connected to the Senographe generator.
375
REV 3 sm 2308530100
LINE RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT

SECTION 5
The objective is to determine the resistance at the line input to the Senographe generator cabinet. The result
of this measurement may have an impact on the maximum allowable generator power (which will be set in
a later procedure).
5.1 Preparation.
5.1.1 Switch off the Senographe and set the generator power switch 200S1 to the 0 position.
5.1.2 Disconnect voltage selection wire SEL from its normal lug on the generator board 200PL1, and
reconnect it to the 0V lug.
JOB CARDS
Note: The 0V position of the SEL wire is reserved exclusively for this line resistance measurement. The
Senographe cannot function normally when the SEL wire is in this position. Do not attempt to
switch on the Senographe at this point follow the instructions below.
5.1.3 Connect the ac voltmeter to the input end of the supply filter and write down the value of the open-
circuit line voltage:
V1 = ......................................
376
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.2 Procedure.
5.2.1 Turn the AC supply on, set the generator switch 200S1 to the 1 position.
Note: Read the next step completely before performing it because you will have only 3 seconds to read
the voltmeter (if you miss the reading you will have to wait about 15 minutes to re-take it).
Use MIN MAX readout mode of your voltmeter.
5.2.2 While looking at the voltmeter, press the power on switch on the generator board 200PL2. During
a period of three seconds, a resistive load (power resistors R1 and R4 on the generator board) will
be connected across the line input, causing a drop in the voltage reading on the voltmeter. Note and
write down this closed circuit voltage:
V2 = ....................................
Note: After this three-second period the red LED DE3 on the generator board will light, indicating that
heating of the resistive load prevents an immediate repeat reading. After about 15 minutes, the
JOB CARDS
LED will go out and the reading can be repeated if necessary.
5.2.3 Calculate line resistance RL according to the formula:

RL = [(V1 V2)/V2] RINT
where RINT, the internal resistive load, depends on the nominal mains voltage:
voltage (V) RINT ()
200 11
208 11
220 11
240 11
380 44
415 44
5.2.4 Having determined the line resistance RL, find the maximum generator power from table 2.
Example: The calculated line resistance is 0.41W. Table 2 shows the highest generator power
that can be delivered with a line resistance of 0.41W and an AC supply of 240v. The
maximum allowable generator power is therefore 3.5 kW.
Note: The maximum allowable generator power will be set later.
377
REV 3 sm 2308530100

TABLE 2
MAXIMUM GENERATOR POWER FOR GIVEN LINE RESISTANCE AND AC VOLTAGE
Maximum allowable generator power

Nominal AC voltage
3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
415V 1.43 1.31 1.19 1.07 0.95
380V 1.20 1.10 1.00 0.90 0.80
240V 0.48 0.44 0.40 0.36 0.32
220V 0.40 0.37 0.34 0.30 0.27
208V 0.36 0.33 0.30 0.27 0.24
200V 0.33 0.30 0.28 0.25 0.22
JOB CARDS
5.2.5 Turn off the Senographe.
5.2.6 Set the generator power switch to the 0 position and switch off the AC power.
5.2.7 Disconnect the line voltage selection wire SEL from the 0V lug on the generator board and recon-
nect it to the lug corresponding to the nominal (not measured) AC line voltage. Tighten the lug nuts
to a torque setting of 4Nm.
378
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF FILM RECIPROCITY LAW FAILURE Version No.:

COMPENSATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Normal cassette and a supply of unexposed films of type used in the screen pair being calibrated
D Sensitometer and densitometer.
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
You must strictly follow the order of AEC calibration for each screen pair given in Installation Steering in
Chapter 1. In particular, the three film reciprocity law failure compensation parameters A0, A1 and A2 for the
screen pair being calibrated must be unknown. If they are known, it is useless to follow the procedures in this
Job Card (see AEC calibration sequence and Recommendations for AEC/AOP calibration procedure
given in Installation Steering of Chapter 1).
Note: In the case of error messages during this calibration, see IST 041 for the explanation.
379
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CALIBRATION OF FILM RECIPROCITY LAW FAILURE

COMPENSATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 013 2 of 10
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE.
5.1 General instructions

D The photo cell must be in its most forward position (towards the patient) throughout the procedures in
this Job Card.
D When placing plexiglass on the cassette holder, the plexiglass must always overlap the front edge
(towards the patient) by about 10mm to ensure that the photo cell is fully covered.
D Whenever the optical density of a film is measured, the measurement is always relative to the film
base fog level (net density). Thus, you must null out the densitometer on the film base fog,(unex-
posed area of the film); then measure the Net density in the middle of the film.
D To avoid confusing results (for you and the software), take care to avoid putting the single-sided film
upside-down in the cassette.
JOB CARDS
D The minimum number of films to expose during this procedure is 9 films.
5.2 Perform a warm up of the XRay tube prior of the calibration.

Focal spot: LARGE
Track: MO
Filter: MO
HV: 30 kV
mAs: 100 mAs
Take the exposure
5.3 Calibration of XRay tube heater current
5.3.1 Perform the calibration procedure on the LF/RH focal size/track combination, then on the others
in any order (SF/RH, LF/MO, SF/MO).
5.3.3 Select the following menu sequence on the console: SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/

TUBE/HEATER/focal size/track/CALIB
380
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Note: /focal size/track/ must be LF/RH for the first combination performed.
To avoid excessive X-ray doses on the photo-cell tube, place an empty cassette
CAUTION on the top of the image receptor.
5.3.4 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. The messages EXPOSURE NO 1, EXPOSURE NO
2, EXPOSURE NO 3 and CALIBRATION END appear sequentially on the console display. The
software automatically performs the three exposures and the calculations.
Note: Calibration time varies according to tube temperature. The message TOO WARM appears on the
console display when tube temperature is excessive for taking the next exposure. It is not neces-
sary to hold the 2nd trigger button down while waiting for the tube to cool. However, do not exit
the calibration menu while waiting. As soon as the TOO WARM message disappears, continue
the calibration by pressing the 2nd trigger button and holding it down.
JOB CARDS
Note: In case of arcing, the software reattempts the same exposure automatically.
Note: The calibration procedure includes an exposure at 40 kV. If for some reason this exposure is
impossible to perform (e.g. excessive arcing), tube warmup may be necessary (see Job Card IST
020 AUTOMATIC XRAY TUBE WARMUP).
5.3.5 Repeat sections 5.3.3 to 5.3.4 for each of the remaining focal size/track combinations.
Note: This must be done only if the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to SET-
5.4 Perform film reciprocity law failure compensation calibration.

There are two objectives:
1. Calibrate the Senographe DMR for correct film blackening when in AEC (1-point) or AOP (0-point) mode.
This is done in section 5.6.
2. Determine the film reciprocity law failure compensation parameters A0, A1 and A2 for the screen pair
being calibrated. These parameters are determined jointly by the screen pair and the characteristics of the
Senographe DMR product. This determination is done in section 5.7.
381
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.5 Calibrate X-ray tube heater current at 30 mA.
Note: This calibration does not depend on the screen pair being calibrated, and thus needs to be per-
formed only once for the first screen pair to be calibrated. For subsequent screen pairs, skip this
section and go directly to section 5.6.
Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/

FSC=x/CALIB/LNRT/HEATER/CALIB on the console, where x is the screen pair indicator
(A,B,C,D,E) corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated (see Job Card IST 006). Press the 2nd trig-
ger button and hold it down. A series of 3 X-ray exposures is taken. Release the 2nd trigger button.
Note: This calibration does not depend on any particular configuration of the Senographe DMR, so it
can be performed without any particular attention paid to presence or absence of accessories such
as compression paddle, cassette, grid, etc.
JOB CARDS
5.6 Calibrate reciprocity law failure reference energy.
5.6.1 Select SETUP/SETUP/PARAM on the console. Verify the initial film reciprocity law failure com-
pensation parameters A0, A1 and A2 by rotating the kV dial through the three values. The initial
parameter values are given below:
A0init = +1.008E+0 (1.008)
A1init = +1.244E1 (0.1244)
A2init = +2.277E2 (0.02277)
If any of the parameter values are different from the initial values given above, correct them
manually by pressing the CHANGE key, then enter the correct value using the NEXT and
VALID keys and the kV dial (see Visual Display of Parameter Values and Modification of a
Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement in Chapter 1). Once the value is entered and vali-
dated, press the SETUP key once to continue checking the remaining parameter values.
Note: With experience installing several Senographe DMRs, you may find sets of initial parameter val-
ues for certain screen pair types (i.e. high or low speed films, certain screen types) that result in
fewer films being used to complete this calibration.
5.6.2 Ask the doctor for the desired reference optical density (Target net density); generally
OD_R(Optical DensityReference) is between 1.0 and 1.6.
Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/
FSC=x/CALIB/LNRT/REFEN/OD_ref/CHANGE on the console, where x is the screen pair
indicator (A,B,C,D,E) corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated (see Job Card IST 006).
Enter the desired reference optical density by rotating the kV dial and using the NEXT and
VALID keys (see Visual Display of Parameter Values and Modification of a Parameter Value or
Entry of a Measurement in Chapter 1).
382
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.6.3 Perform a sensitometry test on the fresh film (unexposed film) being used with the screen pair being
calibrated.
5.6.4 Select SETUP/SETUP/SCALE on the console. Rotate the kV dial until the value OD_3 is dis-
played on the console screen. Select CHANGE on the console.
Enter the optical density from scale number 3 of the sensitometry test by using the NEXT and
VALID keys and rotating the kV dial.
5.6.5 Press the SETUP key on the console. Rotate the kV dial until the value OD_5 is displayed on the
console screen. Select CHANGE on the console.
Enter the optical density from scale number 5 of the sensitometry test by using the NEXT and
JOB CARDS
5.6.6 Repeat section 5.6.5 for OD_7, OD_9, OD_11, OD_13 and OD_15 from the sensitometry test.
Note: If the message Scale error is displayed, the entered values of optical density did not increase as
expected; repeat the test and check that the correct values have been entered.

any compression paddle installed
contact (no magnification)
bucky 18 x 24 in place (with grid)
40 mm plexiglass on the bucky
5.6.8 Install the cassette loaded with fresh film corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated.
5.6.9 IF this is the FIRST exposure, select SETUP/SETUP/CALIB/CALIB on the console. For SUB-
SEQUENT exposures (if any) select only SETUP/CALIB on the console. Press the 2nd trigger
button and hold it down. A single X-ray exposure is taken. Release the 2nd trigger button.
Note: By default, the first exposure is taken at +7.000E+1 (70) mAs. For certain slower speed films, this
calibration can be done using fewer films if the initial mAs value is increased. To do this, prior
to pressing the 2nd trigger button, select SETUP/SETUP/MAS/CHANGE on the console and
enter the desired initial mAs value using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial. Then
select SETUP/SETUP/CALIB/CALIB on the console and proceed with the exposure.
5.6.10 Develop the film and measure its optical density.
Note: The grid is not activated during this calibration mode exposure, so it is normal to see grid lines
on the developed film.
383
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.6.11 Select SETUP/OD_mea on the console. Use the NEXT and VALID keys and the kV dial to enter
the measured optical density value (see Visual Display of Parameter Values and Modification of a
Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement in Chapter 1.
5.6.12 Select SETUP/CALC/VALID on the console to execute the calculation. At this point, either the
result is satisfactory, and the software displays CALIB END on the console display or, if another
exposure and re-calculation are necessary, the software displays ANOTHER FILM.
In the latter case, re-load the cassette with fresh film and repeat sections 5.6.8 to 5.6.12 without
manually changing the mAs value the software will have calculated a new mAs value for this
exposure. Normally, no more than 2 or 3 films need to be used before CALIB END appears on the
console display to indicate a satisfactory result.
Note: It is useful to note the updated mAs value determined by the software before taking any subsequent
exposures. This can give you an idea of the initial mAs values needed for certain film types to
reduce the number of films needed during future Senographe DMR installations (see Note in sec-
JOB CARDS
tion 5.6.9).
5.7 Calibrate film reciprocity law failure compensation parameters.

bucky 18 x 24 in place
set the SID to that used by user, 610 mm or 660 mm (most common)
5.7.2 Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/LNRT on the console.
Note: There is a delay of about 2 seconds between the moment when the LNRT key is pressed and the
appearance of the succeeding sub-menu titles. This is due to a calculation that the software per-
forms to determine, among other things, the plexiglass thickness necessary for the calibration.
5.7.3 Place the amount of plexiglass indicated on the console display on the bucky and install the cassette
loaded with fresh film corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated.
5.7.4 Press the CALIB button, then press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A single X-ray exposure
is taken. Release the 2nd trigger button.
If a message Cooling Tube or Cooling Gene is displayed, wait for cooling.

CAUTION If the message Pwr too high is displayed, one or more of the exposure pa-
rameters was not correct. Verify the maximum power setting and repeat the
procedure.
Note: The exposure time can be very short (20 ms) or very long (9 s), so be sure to hold the 2nd trigger
button down constantly until the exposure is complete.
384
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.7.5 Develop the film and measure its optical density.
5.7.6 Select SETUP/OD_mea on the console. Use the NEXT and VALID keys and the kV dial to enter
the measured optical density value (see Visual Display of Parameter Values and Modification of a
Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement in Chapter 1.
5.7.7 Select SETUP/CALC/VALID on the console to execute the calculation. At this point, either the
result is satisfactory, and the software displays CALIB END on the console display, or, if another
exposure and re-calculation is necessary, the software displays ANOTHER FILM.
In the latter case, press the SETUP key once and repeat sections 5.7.3 to 5.7.7. As many as 15 films
may have to be used before CALIB END appears on the console display following the calculation,
indicating a satisfactory result.
JOB CARDS
Note: Be sure to update the amount of plexiglass on the cassette holder (if necessary) according to the
indication on the console display.
5.7.8 Select SETUP/SETUP/PARAM on the console and note down the three film reciprocity law fail-
ure compensation parameters A0, A1 and A2 by rotating the kV dial.
Note: Keep these three parameter values with the table in Installation Steering in Chapter 1, once you
have verified them in section 5.9 below. They can be used in the future to avoid repeating this Job
Card during installation of other Senographe DMRs with the same screen pair. The Installation
Steering section explains how to perform the calibration when these parameters are known.
5.8 Set manual density correction step size.
5.8.1 Ask the doctor for the desired manual density correction step size.
For example, if the step size is chosen to be +1.000E1 (0.1), then, assuming that the reference opti-
cal density of 1.0, the available range of corrected optical density is from 0.5 to 1.5 in steps of 0.1
in both AEC and AOP application modes.
5.8.2 Select SETUP/SETUP/Energ/PARAM/D_STEP/CHANGE on the console. Use the NEXT and

VALID keys and the kV dial to enter the desired manual density correction step size value (see
Visual Display of Parameter Values and Modification of a Parameter Value or Entry of a Measure-
ment in Chapter 1).
Note: In case the message Invalid parameters is displayed on the console:

Check the results following paragraph 5.9 for verification.
If the results are correct, continue the DMR calibration / installation. Otherwise restart the job
card IST013.
385
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.9 Check results.
5.9.1 If necessary, enable use of the screen pair being calibrated by selecting SETUP/SETUP
/SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/VALID/YES on the console.
5.9.3 Set up the following exposure configuration:

mode: AEC (1point)
screen pair: Select the name of the screen pair being calibrated
focal spot: LARGE
track: MO
filter: MO
JOB CARDS
manual density correction: +0.

bucky 18 x 24 with grid in place
set the SID to that used by user, 610 mm or the most common 660 mm
5.9.5 Take three exposures, using the screen pair being calibrated, with the following kV and plexiglass
thicknesses, measuring and noting down the optical density of the film, the mAs and the time ob-
tained in Job Card IST043, (IST013 data section) for each one:
28 kV with 40 mm of plexiglass
Note: Since these exposures are taken in application mode, the grid is activated during the exposures and
thus no grid lines should be visible on the developed films.
The optical density must not vary by more than 0.2 between any two of the three films. If it does,
the entire calibration must be repeated.
Do not, in any circumstances, attempt to manually adjust any of the parame-

CAUTION ters determined by the calibration procedures in this Job Card. If the optical
density is outside the tolerance defined above , then there is an error which
must be corrected by repeating the entire calibration. A satisfactory result
must be obtained before proceeding.
386
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Once the variation in optical density between the three films is satisfactory, check that the optical
density of the 28kV/40 mm film is inside the tolerance of the reference optical density 0.1 (the ref-
erence optical density was chosen in section 5.6.2).
If the optical density is outside this tolerance, the reference energy must be calibrated as indicated
in Job Card IST 014. To do this, perform the following sequence:
1. Perform the section entitled Perform calibration of reference energy in Job Card IST 014.
Note: The reference optical density must be reentered following the menu sequence given in Job Card
IST 014.
Note: For the initial calibration attempt, do not use the default mAs value of +7.000E+1 (70). Instead,
use the mAs value obtained above from the 28 kV/40 mm check exposure.
2. Perform the section entitled Check results in Job Card IST 014.
JOB CARDS
5.9.6 If necessary, disable use of the screen pair being calibrated (from application mode, select SETUP/
GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/FSC=x/VALID/NO on the console but see CAU-
TION in section 3).
387
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
388
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY FOR Version No.:

A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D Normal cassette and a supply of unexposed films of type used in the screen pair being calibrated
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Densitometer
JOB CARDS
D Sensitometer
D plexiglasss in thickness increments of 5 mm (minimum dimensions 200 x 200 mm to ensure complete
covering of the photo cell)
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Note: In the event of error messages during this calibration, see IST 041 for an explanation.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
The chronological order of AEC calibration given in Installation Steering in chapter 1 must be strictly followed
for each screen pair.
This Job Card is used ONLY when the three reciprocity law failure
CAUTION compensation parameters given (A0, A1 and A2) have been entered manu-
ally as explained in Installation Steering in Chapter 1.
389
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY FOR

A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 014 2 of 8
For this procedure, do not, under ANY CIRCONSTANCES, attempt to

CAUTION tweak manually the GAMMA or ENR_R parameters determined by the
calibration procedures in this Job Card. If the calibration results are not sat-
isfactory, there is a reason which must be corrected; correct the problem and
repeat the entire calibration.
SECTION 5
PREPARATION
5.1 General Instructions

D The photo cell must be in its most forward position (towards the patient) throughout these procedures.
D When placing plexiglasss on the cassette holder, the plexiglasss must always overlap the front edge
(towards the patient) by about 10 mm to ensure that the photo cell is fully covered, and the plexiglasss
is set all the way to the rear of the image receptor.
JOB CARDS
D To avoid confusing results (for you and the software), take care to avoid putting the single-sided film
upside-down in the cassette.
base fog level (net density). Thus, you must null out the densitometer on the film base fog,(unex-
posed area of the film); then measure the net density in the middle of the film.
5.2 Prepare the senographe DMR for this calibration procedure
5.2.1 Calibration of heater current.

Focal spot: LARGE
Track: MO
Filter: MO
HV: 28 kV
mAs: 100 mAs
Take the exposure
D Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch B1 on genera-
tor CPU board 400PL3.
Note: This is necessary only when the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to
SETUP/GENE/INSTAL or SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL
390
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.3 Perform calibration of reference energy.

The objective is to calibrate the Senographe DMR for correct film blackening when in AEC (1-point) or AOP
(0-point) mode.
5.3.1 Ask the doctor for the desired reference optical density OD_R (Optical DensityReference, the
Target Net Density). This is generally between 1.0 and 1.6.

FSC=x/CALIB/Energ/PARAM/OD_R/CHANGE on the console, where x is the screen pair
indicator (A,B,C,D,E) corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated (see Job Card IST 006).
5.3.3 Enter the desired reference optical density by using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the
kV dial, see visual display of parameters values and modification of a parameter value or
entry of a measurement in chapter 1.
JOB CARDS
5.3.4 Perform a sensitometry test on a fresh film (unexposed film) being used with the screen pair being
calibrated.
5.3.5 Select SETUP/SETUP/SCALE on the console.
5.3.6 Rotate the kV dial until the value OD_3 is displayed on the console screen.
5.3.7 Select CHANGE on the console.
5.3.8 Enter the optical density from scale number 3 of the sensitometry test by using the NEXT and
5.3.9 Press the SETUP key on the console.
5.3.10 Rotate the kV dial until the value OD_5 is displayed on the console screen.
5.3.11 Select CHANGE on the console.
5.3.12 Enter the optical density from scale number 5 of the sensitometry test by using the NEXT and
5.3.13 Repeat section 5.3.9 through 5.3.12 for OD_7, OD_9, OD_11, OD_13 and OD_15 from the sensi-
tometry test.
5.3.14 Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/CONFIG/NORMAL on the console (this tells the software that
the calibration is being done for the normal, and not Stereotix 2, mode).

bucky 18 x 24 wiht grid in place
40 mm plexiglasss on the bucky.
set the SID to that used by user, 610 mm or the most common 660 mm.
391
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.3.16 Install the cassette loaded with fresh film corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated.
5.3.17 For an initial calibration, use the default mAs value of +7.000E+1 (70) by selecting SETUP/
CALIB/CALIB on the console. For any subsequent re-calibration, follow the instructions given
for entering a mAs value other than the default value (see IST013 Section 5.6.9).
5.3.18 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A single Xray exposure is taken. Release the 2nd
trigger button.
5.3.19 Develop the film and measure its optical density (OD) (See section 5.1).
The measured OD should be greater than or equal to (OD_R 0.2) but lower than (OD_R + 0.8),
where OD_R is the reference optical density chosen in section 5.3.1.
For example: If OD_R = 1.1 then the optical density must be between 0.9 and 1.9
JOB CARDS

If the measured value is in the required range, go to step 5.3.21 to enter the value into the DMR.
5.3.20 If the measured value is not in the required range, first change the mAs value and repeat the OD
measurement.
If the film is too dark (measured OD greater than OD_R + 0.8), the mAs must be reduced; if the
film is too light (measured OD less than OD_R 0.2), the mAs must be increased.
Calculate the required change in mAs value as 8% for each 0.1 of OD variation required.
Note: The value of 8% is based on a film gamma of 3.
For example: with an OD_R of 1.1 and 70 mAs the OD = 1.6, which you want to reduce by 0.5;
then 8% 5 = 40%, and 40% of 70 mAs = 28 mAs.
to decrease the OD by 0.5, you should enter a mAs value of (70 28) = 42 mAs.
Repeat the OD measurement with the calculated new mAs value, as follows:
1. Select SETUP/mAs on the console
2. Enter the new mAs value, using the NEXT and VALID keys and the kV dial
Note: Be careful not to press the SETUP key more than once after entering the mAs value a second
press will cause the value to revert to the default of +7.000E+1 (70).
3. Reload the cassette and install it in the cassette holder
4. Select SETUP/CALIB on the console; repeat sections 5.3.18 and 5.3.19.
5.3.21 When the measured OD value is in the correct range, select SETUP/OD_MS; use the NEXT and
VALID keys and the kV dial to enter the measured value into the DMR.
5.3.22 Select SETUP/CALC/VALID on the console to execute the calculation; Calcul Done appears
392
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.3.23 Note down the following information:

Gamma value (select SETUP/SETUP/PARAM/GAMMA on the console)
Note: This is not the film gamma, but another intermediate value calculated for internal use by the
Senographe.
The reference energy (select SETUP/ENR_R on the console)
The reference optical density (select SETUP/OD_R on the console)
The sensitometry scale densities (select SETUP/SCALE on the console and rotate the kV dial
to display the different values)
5.4 Set manual density correction step size.
5.4.1 Ask the doctor the desired manual density correction step size.
For example, if the step size is chosen to be +1.000E1 (0.1), then assuming that the reference opti-
JOB CARDS
cal density is 1.0 the available range of corrected optical density is from 0.5 to 1.5 in steps of 0.1
in AEC and AOP Application Modes.
5.4.2 Select SETUP/D_STEP/CHANGE on the console.

Use the NEXT and VALID keys and the kV dial to enter the desired manual density correction step
size value.
5.5 Check Results
5.5.1 If necessary, enable use of the screen pair being calibrated by selecting
SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/VALID/YES on the console.
5.5.2 Perform a CKSUM and go to Application Mode.

Mode: AEC (1Point).
Screen pair: Select the name of the screen pair being calibrated.
Focal spot: LARGE.
Filter: MO.
Manual density correction: +0.
28 kV.
4 cm plexiglass.
5.5.4 Keep the Senographe DMR in the same configuration as given in section 5.3.15.
5.5.5 Take an exposure, using the screen pair being calibrated, note down the resulting mAs value and
measure the optical density of the film.
Note: Since this exposure is taken in Application Mode, the grid is activated during the exposure and
thus no grid lines should be visible on the developed film.
393
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.5.6 The optical density of the film must not be outside the tolerance of the reference optical density 0.1
(the reference optical density was chosen in section 5.3.1). If the optical density is within this toler-
ance, skip directly to section 5.5.8 below.
Note: The reference optical density chosen and entered in section 5.3.1 can no longer be displayed at
this point; it was erased and replaced by the default value when the DMR was returned to Applica-
tion Mode for these checks.
5.5.7 If the optical density of the film is outside this tolerance, repeat the calibration procedure, but use
the mAs value obtained from the check exposure taken in section 5.5.5. To do this, perform the fol-
lowing sequence:
1. Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/FSC=x/CALIB/Energ./
PARAM/OD_R/CHANGE on the console. Re-enter the desired reference optical density
by using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial.
JOB CARDS
2. Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/CALIB/mAs on the console and enter the resulting mAs

value obtained from the check exposure taken in Section 5.5.5 by using the NEXT and
VALID keys and the kV dial.
Note: If the measured optical density from the check exposure is greater (less) than the desired reference
density, it is preferable to use a mAs value slightly lower (higher) than the value obtained from
the check exposure.
Note: Be careful not to press the SETUP key more than one time after entering the mAs value. Doing
so would cause this value to revert to the default mAs value.
3. Repeat Sections 5.3.15 to 5.3.23, EXCEPT THAT in Section 5.3.17, IT WILL NOW ONLY BE
NECESSARY TO SELECT SETUP/CALIB AND NOT SETUP/CALIB/CALIB ON THE
CONSOLE.
Note: The greater the difference between the optical density measured during the CALIBRATION and
the desired reference density, the greater the final error in optical density when in automatic expo-
sure Application Mode.
4. Repeat all checks in Section 5.5.
5.5.8 If you have entered the parameters A0, A1, and A2 manually, make the following check (otherwise
go to Section 5.5.9).
Take two exposures using the screen pair being calibrated with the following kV and plexiglass
thickness, measuring and noting the optical density of the film, the mAs and the time obtained in
Job Card IST043 (IST014 data section) for each one:
32 kV with 1.5 cm of pexiglass.
28 kV with 5.5 cm of plexiglass.
394
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Check the optical density value obtained previously with 4 cm, with 1.5 cm, and with 5.5 cm. It must
not vary by more than 0.2 between any two of the three films. If it does:
1. Check the reciprocity low failure compensation parameters A0, A1, and A2.
If the parameters are not correct, reenter them manually as explained in Chapter 1 of
the Installation Steering Guide, and perform this Job Card, IST 014, from the beginning.
If the parameters are correct, check Job Card IST 007.
If Job Card IST 007 does not check correct, perform the entire Job Card IST 007 before
performing Job Card IST 014 again.
2. If all the previous checks are correct, check the automatic film processor by making several sen-
sitometry tests and comparing the results (see Job Card IST 034, Section 5.2).
3. If all the previous checks are correct, perform Job Card IST 013.
JOB CARDS
5.5.9 If necessary, disable use of the screen pair being calibrated (from Application Mode, select SETUP/
GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/FSC=x/VALID/NO on the console) (see CAU-
TION in Section 3).
5.5.10 Perform a CKSUM and go to Application Mode.

Note: The strategy of AOP is automatically calculated at the end of this Job Card.
Note: To check this AOP strategy, see Job Card IST 039 MANUAL DETERMINATION OF AOP
STRATEGY FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Section 5.1.3, in function of the mAs value obtained
from the 28 kV/4 cm check exposure.
395
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
396
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: MAGNIFICATION CORRECTION FOR A Version No.:

GIVEN PAIR Date:
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION:
D This Job Card is applicable for senographe DMR V1 and DMR V2 with Carbon cassette holder
18x24 CDRH with top (45561633).
D This Job Card is NOT applicable for senographe DMR V2 with the new Plastic cassette holder
18x24 CDRH (2147919) without top.
SECTION 2
JOB CARDS
SUPPLIES
D Normal cassette loaded with one unexposed film of type used in the screen pair being calibrated
SECTION 3
TOOLS
D Plexiglass in thickness increments of 0.5 cm (minimum plexiglass dimensions 20 x 20 cm to ensure com-
plete coverage of the photo cell)
SECTION 4

SECTION 5
PREREQUISITES
You must follow the chronological order of AEC calibration given in Installation Steering in Chapter 1.
397
REV 3 sm 2308530100
MAGNIFICATION CORRECTION FOR A GIVEN

PAIR Job Card IST 015 2 of 6
SECTION 6
PREPARATION
6.1 General instructions to be observed during all procedures:

D the photo cell must be in its most forward position (towards the patient: position 1) throughout the proce-
dures in this Job Card
D when placing plexiglass on the cassette holder or 1.5 magnification device, the plexiglass must always
overlap the front edge (towards the patient) by about 10mm to ensure that the photocell is fully covered.
In addition the plexiglass is set all the way to the rear of the image receptor.
D since it is never developed, the same undeveloped film can be used repeatedly throughout the procedures
in this Job Card.
6.2 Perform magnification correction.

JOB CARDS
erator CPU board 400PL3, see Accessing the Generator or Gantry Installation Mode from the Console in
Chapter 1).
The objective is to calculate two co-efficients that correct the photocell gain when the Senographe DMR is
being used in magnification mode.

cassette holder in place (no grid).
compression paddle installed
cassette loaded with unexposed film installed.
set the SID to that user by user, 610 mm a 660 mm (most common).
6.2.2 Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/ALGO/FSC=x/

CALIB/Corr/CALIB/CONFIG/YES on the console, where x is the screen pair indicator
(A,B,C,D,E) corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated (this tells the software that the cal-
ibration in contact mode is being done).
6.2.3 Place 2 cm of plexiglass on the cassette holder.
6.2.4 Select SETUP/CALIB/THICK/2 CM on the console.
398
REV 3 sm 2308530100

6.2.6 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. One or more exposures are taken. Continue holding
the 2nd trigger button down until CALIBRATION END appears on the console display, then release
the 2nd trigger button.
6.2.7 Select SETUP/THICK/4 CM on the console.
6.2.8 Place 4 cm of plexiglass on the cassette holder.
6.2.9 Repeat steps 6.2.5 and 6.2.6.
6.2.11 Place 60 mm of plexiglass on the cassette holder.
6.2.12 Repeat steps 6.2.5 and 6.2.6.
JOB CARDS
Do NOT attempt to execute the calculation here. The calculation will be per-
CAUTION formed in section 6.2.25.

cassette holder in place (no grid).
magnification device installed (always in the botton holes)
Note: Magnification of 1.5 if the SID = 660

Magnification of 1.4 if the SID = 610
compression paddle installed
cassette loaded with undeveloped film installed.
6.2.14 Select SETUP/SETUP/CONFIG/NO on the console (this tells the software that the calibration in
1.5 magnification mode is being done).
6.2.15 Place 2 cm of plexiglass on the magnification device.
6.2.16 Select SETUP/CALIB/THICK/2 CM on the console.
6.2.18 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. One or more exposures are taken. Continue holding
the 2nd trigger button down until CALIBRATION END appears on the console display, then release
the 2nd trigger button.
6.2.20 Place 40 mm of plexiglass on the magnification device.
6.2.21 Repeat steps 6.2.17 and 6.2.18.
399
REV 3 sm 2308530100

6.2.24 Repeat steps 6.2.17 and 6.2.18.
6.2.25 Select SETUP/SETUP/CALC/VALID on the console to execute the calculation. CORR CAL
END appears on the console display.
6.3 Check results.
6.3.1 If necessary, enable use of the screen pair being calibrated by selecting SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/
SETUP/VALID/YES on the console.
6.3.2 Enable visual display of parameter values when in application mode. See Display of parameters
following an exposure in chapter 1, section 3102.
JOB CARDS
6.3.4 Remove and reinstall the 1.5 magnification device.
This is necessary because it is the changing from 1.5 magnification to contact

CAUTION mode (or vice versa) that triggers the reading of the new magnification
correction parameters by the application software. Otherwise the results of
the check procedure will be completely false.

Mode: AEC (1point)
Focal spot: LARGE (not SMALL)
Track: MO
Filter: MO
Manual density correction: +0
HV: 28 kV
6.3.6 Install the cassette loaded with undeveloped film.
6.3.8 Take an exposure and note down the estimated thickness from the console display.
3100
REV 3 sm 2308530100

6.3.11 Remove the magnification device.
6.3.12 Keep the exposure configuration given in section 6.3.5. Leave the cassette loaded with undeveloped
film installed.
6.3.17 Compare the estimated thicknesses for 20 mm of plexiglass in magnification mode and in contact
JOB CARDS
mode. The difference must be less than 1.5 mm.
6.3.18 Compare the estimated thicknesses for 40 mm of plexiglass in magnification mode and in contact
mode. The difference must be less than 1.5 mm.
6.3.19 Normally, at this point, the calibration of the screen pair is finished and the Senographe DMR can
be left to the user with the screen pair enabled. If for some reason the calibration of the screen pair
is not finished, and if the machine must be left unattended at this point, (see CAUTION in section
4) disable use of the screen pair being calibrated. (From application mode, select SETUP/GENE/
INSTAL/GENE/AOP/ALGO/FSC=x/VALID/NO on the console.)
6.3.20 If you are handing the Senographe DMR back to the user at this point, switch the Senographe DMR
off, then on again.
3101
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3102
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF XRAY TUBE mA Version No.:

MEASUREMENT Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Milliammeter
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
None
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
3103
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CALIBRATION OF XRAY TUBE mA

MEASUREMENT Job Card IST 016 2 of 4
SECTION 5
Calibration of XRT mA measurement
The objective is to determine the scale factor F/mA between the Xray tube mA measurement input to the soft-
ware and the real Xray tube mA value.
The default parameter value is F/mA = +1.000E+3 (1000) Hz/mA
DO NOT touch potentiometer P1 on generator kV/mA board 701PL1 at any

CAUTION point in this Job Card.
5.1 Preparation

JOB CARDS
5.1.2 Remove strap between terminal lugs MES_M_NEG and MES_M_POS of generator kV/mA board
701PL1.
5.1.3 Connect milliammeter between test points MES_M_NEG and MES_M_POS of generator kV/mA
board 701PL1. Set the milliammeter to its 100 mA DC scale.
5.1.4 Turn on the Senographe DMR.
400PL3, see Accessing the Generator or Gantry Installation Mode from the Console in Chapter 1).
5.2.1 Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/mA_meas/

CALIB/CALIB on the console. Press pushbutton SW2 on generator kV/mA board 701PL1
and HOLD IT DOWN. Read and note down the value measured on the milliammeter. While
still holding SW2 down, select MEASUR on the console (this request for a measurement of
Xray tube current is needed by the calibration software, but the value displayed on the console
at this point is of no importance to the service engineer). Release pushbutton SW2.
5.2.2 Select SETUP/I_MEAS on the console. Enter the value of current (in milliamperes) read from the
milliammeter by using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial. See Visual Display of
Parameter Values and Modification of a Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement in chapter 1.
Note: Only values between +4.000E+1 (40) and +6.000E+1 (60) mA are accepted by the calibration
software. An error message appears on the console display if a value outside of this range is
entered.
5.2.3 Select SETUP/CALCUL/VALID on the console to execute the calculation. If the calculated F/mA
value is between 850 and 1150 mA calib END appears on the console display if it is not, then
an error message appears.
3104
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.3 Check results.
5.3.1 Select SETUP/CALIB on the console. Press pushbutton SW2 on generator kV/mA board 701PL1
and HOLD IT DOWN. Read and note down the value measured on the milliammeter. While still
holding SW2 down, select MEASUR on the console. Verify that the measurement on the console
display now corresponds to the value read on the milliammeter 400 A milliammeter error.
Release pushbutton SW2. DO NOT ENTER THIS MEASURED VALUE.
5.3.2 Change the milliammeter scale to 200 mA DC. Press pushbutton SW1 on generator kV/mA board
701PL1 and HOLD IT DOWN. Read and note down the value measured on the milliammeter.
(The current should be approximately 120 mA.) While still holding SW1 down, select MEASUR
on the console. Verify that the difference between the measurement on the console display and the
value read on the milliammeter is less than 2.4 mA. Release pushbutton SW1. DO NOT ENTER
THIS MEASURED VALUE.
JOB CARDS
5.3.3 Select SETUP/SETUP/PARAM on the console and note down the displayed value of F/mA.
5.3.4 Perform a CKSUM and return to application mode.
5.3.6 Disconnect the milliammeter and replace the strap between terminal lugs MES_M_NEG and
MES_M_POS of generator kV/mA board 701PL1.
3105
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3106
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF KV SCALE FACTOR Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Non invasive: RMI 232 kVpmeter, calibrated with known calibration factors.
D or Invasive: Machlett Dynalyser III divider and Fluke multimeter.
JOB CARDS
Note: MQSA (US) regulation requires kVp accuracy better than 5%. It means that the tool used for the
following measurements should have an accuracy much better than 5%, and the kVp limit values
displayed by the tool should depend from its own accuracy. The table 1 is given below to detail
these limit values vs. tool accuracy.
Note: RMI 232 must be used with its calibration factors. If not its accuracy (when verified only) is not
sufficient (from 6.0% at 25 kVp to 4.5% at 40 kVp).
SECTION 3
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
Note: The Senographe DMR is calibrated at factory in accordance with MQSA requirements (5%).
Therefore, this Job Card should not be performed at the first installation of the system.
The following procedures must have been performed in the following order:
D Job Card IST 001
D Job Card IST 002
D Job Card IST 016
Recalibration of kV scale factor may require a re-calibration of IST07 for all

CAUTION film/screen couples previously adjusted.
3107
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CALIBRATION OF KV SCALE FACTOR

SECTION 5
The objective is to determine the scale factor G and offset VOF between the Xray tube kV command from
the software and the real kV value obtained.
DEFAULT PARAMETER VALUES ARE G = +6.554E+1 (65.54) and VOF = +0.000E+0 (0.0)
DO NOT touch potentiometer P1 on generator kV/mA board 701PL1 at any

CAUTION point in this Job Card.
Since MQSA requirement is 5% accuracy, the operator should take into account the accuracy of the measure-
ment method himself to define the read values not to exceed. See Table 1 which gives the limit values for each
used tool.
JOB CARDS
5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR
5.1.1 Non invasive measurement method.

Set up the Senographe DMR in the following configuration:
no compression paddle.
maximum magnification mode (the purpose here is simply to reduce the distance
between the kV peak meter and the Xray source see applicable documentation for
minimum acceptable distance from Xray source, if any).
set SID = 510 mm. It is then not possible to produce HV. (the purpose here is simply to
reduce the distance between the kV peak meter and the Xray source.
Place kV peak meter on the magnification device or cassette holder. Turn it on and set it to the
MO/MO position. Set the waveform selector to CP (constant potential).
Use the Senographe DMR light centering device to center the kV peak meter target with the Xray
zone.
Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch
(switch B1 on generator CPU board 400PL3).
5.1.2 Invasive measurement method.

Connect the HV divider to the HV TANK of generator.
Connect the multimeter to negative channel of HV divider.
Set the multimeter in DC mode, adjust RANGE function to get a display with 3 decimal digits,
then select the MIN function with a response of 100 ms.
3108
REV 3 sm 2308530100

For each displayed value on the multimeter, multiply it by 10 to get the kVp value (the divider
ratio is 10000 and the high voltage is expressed in kilovolts).
5.2.1 Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/KV/CALIB/1st pt/CALIB on the console.
Note: By default, the kV command value sent by the software for this 1st point is 25 kV.
5.2.2 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A single 1second exposure is taken. CALIBRA-
TION END appears on the console display. Release the 2nd trigger button.
. If using a RMI 232, read the displayed value, correct it by the correction factor given in the cal-
ibration factor table and note down this result. The calibration factor table gives values by 1 kV
steps; for intermediate values, use a linear interpolation.
. If using the Divider and Multimeter, read the displayed value, multiply it by 10 and note down
JOB CARDS
this result.
Note: If for some reason, this exposure has to be repeated select SETUP/CALIB on the console before
pressing the 2nd trigger button again
5.2.3 Select SETUP/kV_M on the console. Enter the kV value read from the kV peak meter by using
the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial. See Visual Display of Parameter Values and
Modification of a Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement in Chapter 1.
Note: By default, the kV command value sent by the software for this 2nd point is 40 kV. Due to DMR
software, the Mo filter remains selected.
this result.
Note: If for some reason, this exposure has to be repeated select SETUP/CALIB on the console before
pressing the 2nd trigger button again.
3109
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.2.6 Select SETUP/kV_M on the console. Enter the kV value read from the kV peak meter by using
the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial. See Visual Display of Parameter Values and
Modification of a Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement in chapter 1.
5.2.7 Select SETUP/SETUP/calcul/VALID on the console to execute the calculation. Normally, KV

CALIB END appears on the console display. If OUT OF RANGE appears on the console dis-
play, this indicates either faulty kV measurement(s) in the steps above, or a hardware failure.
5.3 Check results.
5.3.1 Leave the Senographe DMRsenographe in the same conditions as described in section 5.1 (with the
kVp meter or dividermultimeter in place), and select SETUP/1st pt/CALIB on the console.
5.3.2 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A single 1-second exposure is taken. CALIBRA-
JOB CARDS
this result.
CAUTION: DO NOT ENTER THIS MEASURED VALUE.
5.3.3 The kV value read on the kV peak meter should be 25 kV 0.3 kV.
Note: The generator kVp accuracy is 1% (one per cent) when measured just after a calibration.
this result.
CAUTION: DO NOT ENTER THIS MEASURED VALUE.
3110
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.3.6 The measured value should be within limits which depend on the measurement tool, as given in
Table 1 below:
Measurement tool 25 kV 40 kV
Min. Limit Max. Limit Min. Limit Max. Limit
RMI 232 24.12 25.86 38.58 41.37
Dynalyser III + Fluke 87 24.02 25.96 38.43 41.54
Table 1
Note: The generator kVp accuracy is 1% (two per cent) when measured just after a calibration.
Note: If the need should arise to check this point in application mode, it is not possible to do so because
exposures at 40 kV are prohibited with the Mo filter in application mode.
JOB CARDS
5.3.7 Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/PARAM on the console. Note down the displayed values of G and
VOF by rotating the kV dial.
5.3.8 Job Card IST 003 CALIBRATION OF XRAY TUBE HEATER CURRENT must be done
immediately following this Job Card, but if you are turning the machine back over to the user at this
point, switch off, then on again.
5.3.9 Perform calibration check of IST007 (section 6.6 only). If thickness accuracy is outside the toler-
ance, IST007 must be performed completely for all already adjusted film/screen couples.
3111
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3112
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF PHOTOCELL IN Version No.:

STEREOTIX 2 POSITIONS Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D The cassette that will be used by the doctor for Stereotix 2 mode
Note: Presence or absence of film in the cassette is of no importance in this Job Card.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
JOB CARDS
complete covering of the photo cell)
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
THE GANTRY MUST BE ANCHORED TO THE FLOOR WITH 3 BOLTS

WARNING WHEN A SENOGRAPHE DMR IS EQUIPPED WITH THE STEREOTIX
2 (see job card IST 009).
BECAUSE CASSETTES DO NOT ALWAYS EXHIBIT A CONSTANT

WARNING RADIOLOGICAL DENSITY ACROSS THEIR SURFACES, THE CAS-
SETTE USED IN THIS JOB CARD MUST ALSO BE USED IN JOB CARD
IST 019.
FURTHERMORE, THE DOCTOR MUST USE ONLY THIS CASSETTE

IN STEREOTIX 2 MODE, EVEN IF OTHER CASSETTE TYPES ARE
CALIBRATED FOR NONSTEREOTIX 2 USE. BE SURE TO INFORM
THE DOCTOR OF THIS CONSTRAINT.
3113
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CALIBRATION OF PHOTOCELL IN STEREO-

TIX 2 POSITIONS Job Card IST 018 2 of 6
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
The Senographe DMR being installed must be equipped with the Stereotix 2 option that has been set up and
calibrated according to the Stereotix 2 Service Manual.
Also, Job Card IST 004 must have been performed before this Job Card.
Note: In case of error messages during this calibration, see IST 041 for explanations.
SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL IN STEREOTIX 2 POSITIONS
The objective is to calibrate the photocell in its Stereotix 2 positions. Because of the different angles between
the tube housing and the photocell when in Stereotix 2 mode, the photocell does not receive the same dose of
radiation as it does when in nonStereotix 2 mode.
JOB CARDS
Note: Since this calibration does not depend on a certain screen pair, it is not necessary to perform it each
time a new screen pair is introduced.
This Job Card consists of four interdependent calibration procedures which are performed in the following
order:
D Normal, which is done without the Stereotix 2 installed as a reference calibration for the following three
calibrations.
D Stereotix Left, which is done with the Stereotix 2 installed and the tubecarrying arm rotated to the right
side as viewed from the front of the gantry.
D Stereotix Center, which is done with the Stereotix 2 installed and the tubecarrying arm rotated to the
center.
D Stereotix Right, which is done with the Stereotix 2 installed and the tubecarrying arm rotated to the left
side as viewed from the front of the gantry.
THE FOUR PROCEDURES MENTIONED ABOVE MUST ALL BE PER-

WARNING FORMED WITH THE SAME AMOUNT OF PLEXIGLASS (IF ANY). IF
AT ANY POINT THE SOFTWARE ASKS FOR A CHANGE IN THE
AMOUNT OF PLEXIGLASS, THE SEQUENCE OF FOUR PROCE-
DURES MUST BE STARTED AGAIN USING THE NEW AMOUNT OF
PLEXIGLASS THROUGHOUT.
3114
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.1.1 The photo cell must be in its most forward position (towards the patient: position1).
5.1.2 When placing plexiglass on the photocell or Stereotix 2 cassette holder, the plexiglass must always
overlap the front edge (towards the patient) by about 10 mm to ensure that the photocell is fully cov-
ered.
5.1.3 Error messages will appear on the console display when the tubecarrying arm position is not in
agreement with the position being calibrated.
5.2 Prepare the Senographe DMR for these procedures.

erator CPU board 400PL3, see Accessing the Generator or Gantry Installation Mode from the Console in
Chapter 1).
JOB CARDS
5.3 Perform the normal calibration.

SID: 510 mm
No cassette holder / no bucky installed
No compression paddle
Magnification: 1.3 (install the magnification device in the middle hole).
Cassette centered laterally on magnification device, and flush with front edge of magnification
device (i.e. no overlap)
Note: Initially, do not put any plexiglass on the photocell. However, it may be necessary to add plexiglass
during these calibration procedures.
5.3.2 Rotate tubecarrying arm to its center (i.e. nonStereotix 2) position.
5.3.3 Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/CELL/

STER/CALIB/CELL/NORMAL/SETUP/CALIB on the console.
3115
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.3.4 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. One or more Xray exposures are taken. Either the
message CALIBRATION END or a message requesting a change in plexiglass thickness appears
on the console display. In either case, release the second trigger button.
If a message requesting a change in plexiglass thickness appeared on the console display, select
SETUP/CALIB on the console and repeat the exposure after changing the amount of plexiglass
by an increment of 10 mm.
If the message CALIBRATION END appeared on the console display, proceed directly to the
Stereotix Left calibration in section 5.4.
5.4 Perform the Stereotix left calibration.

Stereotix 2 installed
SID: 510 mm
JOB CARDS
No Stereotix 2 compression paddle
5.4.2 Set the Stereotix 2 compression plate to its highest position. Set the needle holder to the center of
its lateral (xaxis) range and to the maximum depth (yaxis) range, i.e. as far as possible from the
patient.
5.4.3 Keep the same plexiglass thickness (if any) as used in Normal calibration section 5.3.
5.4.4 Select SETUP on the console.
5.4.5 Rotate tubecarrying arm to its left Stereotix position (i.e. to the right side as viewed from the front
of the gantry). NORMAL CELL ERR appears on the console display.
5.4.6 Select CELL/LEFT/SETUP/CALIB on the console. STEREO. LEFT appears on the console dis-
play.
5.4.7 Place cassette (without film) on right side of Stereotix 2 cassette holder as viewed from the front
of the gantry.
If a message requesting a change in plexiglass thickness appeared on the console display:
Repeat the normal calibration in section 5.3 using the new amount of plexiglass (gener-
ally the thickness is changed in increments of 10 mm).
Repeat this Stereotix left calibration using the same new amount of plexiglass.
3116
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Continue repeating the above two steps (if necessary) until a satisfactory plexiglass
thickness is found for both procedures.
Proceed to the Stereotix Center calibration in section 5.5 using the same new amount
of plexiglass.
If the message CALIBRATION END appeared on the console display, proceed directly to the Ster-
eotix Center calibration in section 5.5.
5.5 Perform the Stereotix center calibration.
5.5.1 Keep the Senographe DMR set up as outlined in sections 5.4.1 and 5.4.2.
5.5.2 Keep the same plexiglass thickness (if any) as used in Normal calibration section 5.3 and Stereotix
left calibration section 5.4.
JOB CARDS
5.5.4 Rotate tubecarrying arm to its center (i.e. nonStereotix 2) position. STER. LEFT ERR appears
5.5.5 Select CELL/CENT/SETUP/CALIB on the console. STEREO. CENTER appears on the console
display.
5.5.6 Move cassette to center of Stereotix 2 cassette holder.
Repeat the normal calibration in section 5.3 using the new amount of plexiglass (gener-
ally the thickness is changed in increments of 1 cm).
Repeat the Stereotix left calibration in section 5.4 using the same new amount of plexi-
glass.
Repeat this Stereotix center calibration using the same new amount of plexiglass.
Continue repeating the above three steps (if necessary) until a satisfactory plexiglass
thickness is found for all three procedures.
Proceed to the Stereotix Right calibration in section 5.6 using the same new amount of
plexiglass.
If the message CALIBRATION END appeared on the console display, proceed directly to the Ster-
eotix Right calibration in section 5.6.
3117
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.6 Perform the Stereotix right calibration.
5.6.1 Keep the Senographe DMR set up as outlined in sections 5.4.1 and 5.4.2.
5.6.2 Keep the same plexiglass thickness (if any) as used in Normal calibration section 5.3, Stereotix left
calibration section 5.4 and Stereotix center calibration section 5.5.
5.6.4 Rotate tubecarrying arm to its right Stereotix position (i.e. to the left side as viewed from the front
of the gantry). STER. CENT ERR appears on the console display.
5.6.5 Select CELL/RIGHT/SETUP/CALIB on the console. STEREO. RIGHT appears on the console
display.
5.6.6 Move cassette to left side of Stereotix 2 cassette holder as viewed from the front of the gantry.
JOB CARDS
Repeat the Normal calibration in section 5.3 using the new amount of plexiglass (gener-
ally the thickness is changed in increments of 1 cm).
Repeat the Stereotix left calibration in section 5.4 using the same new amount of plexi-
glass.
Repeat the Stereotix center calibration in section 5.5 using the same new amount of
plexiglass.
Repeat this Stereotix right calibration using the same new amount of plexiglass.
Continue repeating the above four steps (if necessary) until a satisfactory plexiglass
thickness is found for all four procedures.
Be sure to execute the calculation as described in the next paragraph as soon as all four
procedures are satisfactorily completed.
If the message CALIBRATION END appeared on the console display, execute the calculation by
selecting SETUP/CALC/VALID on the console.
5.6.8 Perform a CKSUM and return to application mode. If you are handing the machine back to the user
at this point, switch the Senographe DMR off, then on again.
5.7 Check results

The results of this calibration are checked simultaneously with the results of the calibration in Job Card IST
019.
3118
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY IN Version No.:

STEREOTIX 2 MODE FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D The cassette that will be used by the doctor for Stereotix 2 mode
Note: This MUST be the same cassette that was used in Job Card IST 018
D A supply of unexposed films of type used in the screen pair being calibrated
SECTION 2
JOB CARDS
TOOLS
D Densitometer
D Plexiglass in thickness increments of 5 mm (minimum plexiglass dimensions 200 x 200 cm to ensure
complete coverage of the photocell)
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

THE GANTRY MUST BE ANCHORED TO THE FLOOR WITH 3 BOLTS

WARNING WHEN A SENOGRAPHE DMR IS EQUIPPED WITH A STEREOTIX 2
(see job card IST 009).
3119
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY IN STE-

REOTIX 2 MODE FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 019 2 of 8
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
The Senographe DMR being installed must be equipped with the Stereotix 2 option that has been set up and
calibrated according to the Stereotix 2 Service Manual. The chronological order of AEC calibration given in
Installation Steering in chapter 1 must be strictly followed for each screen pair.
In case of Stereotix 2 addon to an alreadyinstalled Senographe DMR, follow the instructions given in the
section entitled AEC Calibration Upon Stereotix 2 Addon in Chapter 2.
SECTION 5
PREPARATION
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS:
this Job Card.
JOB CARDS
D When placing plexiglass on the Stereotix 2 cassette holder, the plexiglass must always overlap the front
edge (towards the patient) by about 1 cm to insure that the photo cell is fully covered.
base fog level (Net density). Thus, you must null out the densitometer on the film base fog (unex-
posed area of the film), then measure the net density in the middle of the film.
D When measuring optical density of a Stereotix 2 film, the point of measure must be at about 5 mm below
the horizontal reference line, and in line with the vertical reference line.
5.1 Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch B1 on
generator CPU board 400PL3, see Accessing the Generator or Gantry Installation Mode from the
Console in chapter 1).
5.2 Determine mAs value for initial calibration attempt.

NonStereotix 2 mode
Any compression paddle installed
bucky 18 x 24 in place (with grid)
4 cm plexiglass on the bucky
SID = 660 mm
3120
REV 3 sm 2308530100


Mode: AEC (1point)
Focal spot: LARGE
Track: MO
Filter: MO
HV: 28 kV
5.2.3 Load cassette with undeveloped film and install it in the cassette holder.
5.2.4 Take an exposure and note down resulting mAs value.
JOB CARDS
5.3 Perform calibration of reference energy in Stereotix 2 mode.
The objective is to calibrate the Senographe DMR for correct film blackening when in AEC (1point) mode
with Stereotix 2.

FSC=x/CALIB/Energ/CONFIG/STEREO on the console, where x is the screen pair indicator
(A,B,C,D,E) corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated (see Job Card IST 006). This tells
the software that the calibration is being done for the Stereotix 2 (and not normal) mode.
Do not go any higher in the menu tree structure than given in the various
CAUTION steps in this section. If, for any reason, you do go higher in the tree structure,
it is essential to go into the CONFIG/STEREO menu first to avoid acciden-
tally using the default NORMAL mode, before proceeding with the calibra-
tion.
5.3.2 Select SETUP/PARAM/OD_R/CHANGE on the console. Enter the desired reference optical
density by using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial. See Visual Display of Param-
eter Values and Modification of a Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement in chapter 1.
Note: Normally, this value should be the same as the value used for the nonStereotix 2 calibration in
Job Card IST 014.
3121
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.3.3 Perform a sensitometry test on the film being used with the screen pair being calibrated.
5.3.4 Select SETUP/SETUP/SCALE on the console. Rotate the kV dial until the value OD_3 is dis-
played on the console screen. Select CHANGE on the console. Enter the optical density from scale
number 3 of the sensitometry test by using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial.
See Visual Display of Parameter Values and Modification of a Parameter Value or Entry of a
Measurement in chapter 1.
5.3.5 Press the SETUP key on the console. Rotate the kV dial until the value OD_5 is displayed on the
console screen. Select CHANGE on the console. Enter the optical density from scale number 5 of
the sensitometry test by using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial.
5.3.6 Repeat section 5.3.5 for OD_7, OD_9, OD_11, OD_13 and OD_15 from the sensitometry test.

JOB CARDS
SID = 510 mm
No cassette holder / No bucky installed
Stereotix 2 installed
Tubecarrying arm in right Stereotix position (i.e. rotated to the left side as viewed
from the front of the gantry)
Stereotix 2 compression paddle installed
Stereotix 2 needle holder set to the center of its lateral (xaxis) range and to the maxi-
mum depth (yaxis) range, i.e. as far as possible from the patient
4 cm plexiglass on the Stereotix 2 cassette holder
Note: If the mAs value obtained at section 5.2.4 was under 40 mAs, use 5 cm plexiglass.
Stereotix 2 compression paddle in contact with plexiglass
5.3.8 Install the cassette loaded with fresh film corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated. Place
it on the left side of the Stereotix 2 cassette holder as viewed from the front of the gantry.
5.3.9 Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/CALIB/mAs on the console. For an initial calibration attempt,

take the mAs value obtained in section 5.2.4, DIVIDE IT BY 4, and enter the result by using the
NEXT and VALID keys. See Visual Display of Parameter Values and Modification of a Parame-
ter Value or Entry of a Measurement in chapter 1.
so would cause this value to revert to the default mAs value of +7.000E+1 (70).
3122
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.3.11 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A single Xray exposure is taken. Release the 2nd
trigger button.
5.3.12 Develop the film and measure its optical density according to the technique given at the beginning
of section 5.
If the optical density of the film is greater than or equal to (OD_R 0.2), enter this value by
selecting SETUP/OD_MS and using the NEXT and VALID keys and the kV dial to enter the
measured optical density value, then skip directly to section below 5.3.13.
If the optical density of the film is less than (OD_R 0.2), increase the mAs value by selecting
SETUP/mAs on the console, then entering the increased mAs value by using the NEXT and
VALID keys and the kV dial. Then reload the cassette and place it on the left side of the Stereo-
tix 2 cassette holder as viewed from the front of the gantry. Select SETUP/CALIB on the con-
JOB CARDS
sole and repeat sections 5.3.11 and 5.3.12.
so would cause this value to revert to the default mAs value of +7.000E+1 (70).
5.3.13 Select SETUP/CALC/VALID on the console to execute the calculation. CALCUL DONE appears
5.3.14 Note down the following information:

The gamma parameter (select SETUP/SETUP/PARAM/GAMMA on the console)
Note: This is NOT the film gamma, but another parameter that is calculated by the software.
The reference energy (select SETUP/ENR_R on the console)
Do not, in any circumstances, attempt to adjust manually the GAMMA or

CAUTION ENR_R parameters determined by the calibration procedures in this Job
Card. If the calibration results are not satisfactory you must repeat the entire
calibration.
The reference optical density (select SETUP/OD_R on the console)
3123
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.4 Check results.
5.4.1 If necessary, enable use of the screen pair being calibrated by selecting SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/
SETUP/VALID/YES on the console.

Mode: AEC (1point)
Focal spot: LARGE
Track: MO
Filter: MO
JOB CARDS
HV: 28 kV
5.4.4 Keep the Senographe DMR in the same configuration as given in section 5.3.7.
5.4.5 Install the cassette loaded with fresh film corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated. Place
it on the left side of the Stereotix 2 cassette holder as viewed from the front of the gantry.
5.4.6 Take an exposure and note down the resulting mAs value.
5.4.7 Slide the cassette to the right side of the Stereotix 2 cassette holder.
5.4.8 Rotate tubecarrying arm to left Stereotix position (i.e. rotated to the right side as viewed from the
front of the gantry).
5.4.9 Take an exposure.
5.4.10 Develop the film and measure the optical density of the right Stereotix 2 image according to the
technique given at the beginning of section 5.
5.4.11 The optical density of the right Stereotix 2 image must not be outside the tolerance of the reference
optical density 0.1 (the reference optical density was chosen in section 5.3.2). If the optical density
is within this tolerance, skip directly to section 5.4.13 below.
Note: The reference optical density chosen and entered in section 5.3.2 can no longer be displayed at
this point; it was erased and replaced by the default value when the machine was returned to
application mode for these checks.
3124
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.4.12 If the optical density of the right Stereotix 2 image on the film is outside this tolerance, repeat the
calibration procedure, but, instead of entering the mAs value given in section 5.3.9, use the mAs
value obtained in section 5.4.6 above. To do this, perform the following sequence:
1. Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/

ALGO/FSC=x/CALIB/Energ/CONFIG/STEREO on the console.
2. Select SETUP/PARAM/OD_R/CHANGE on the console. Reenter the desired reference

optical density by using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial.
3. Repeat sections 5.3.7 to 5.3.14 EXCEPT THAT IN SECTION 5.3.9 YOU MUST ENTER THE
RESULTING MAS VALUE OBTAINED FROM THE CHECK EXPOSURE TAKEN IN SEC-
TION 5.4.6. DO NOT ENTER THE VALUE GIVEN IN SECTION 5.3.9.
4. Proceed to checks in section 5.4.
JOB CARDS
5.4.13 Measure the optical density of the left Stereotix 2 image according to the technique given at the
beginning of section 5.
The difference between this density and the density of the right Stereotix 2 image must be less
than 0.1. If this is not the case, there is a problem with the calibration done in Job Card IST 018
CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL IN STEREOTIX POSITIONS. In this case, repeat Job
Card IST 018, then this Job Card in its entirety.
5.4.14 Rotate the tubecarrying arm to its center position.
5.4.15 Install the cassette loaded with fresh film in the center of the Stereotix 2 cassette holder.
5.4.16 Keeping the Senographe DMR set up as given in section 5.4.3, take an exposure.
5.4.17 Develop the film and measure its optical density according to the technique given at the beginning
of section 5.
The difference between this density and the density of either the right Stereotix 2 image OR the
left Stereotix 2 image measured above must be less than 0.1. If this is not the case, there is a prob-
lem with the calibration done in Job Card IST 018 CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL IN
STEREOTIX POSITIONS. In this case, repeat Job Card IST 018, then this Job Card in its
entirety.
5.4.18 If necessary, disable use of the screen pair being calibrated. (From application mode, select
SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/FSC=x/VALID/NO on the console.) (See
CAUTION in section 3.)
3125
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3126
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: AUTOMATIC XRAY TUBE WARMUP Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
None
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
This Job Card should only be used when the performance of Job Card IST 003 CALIBRATION OF XRAY
TUBE HEATER CURRENT has been impossible due to excessive arcing.
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC XRAY TUBE WARMUP
This Job Card provides the procedure for restarting an Xray tube that was known to be good upon leaving
the factory, but which now exhibits arcing after a long period of inactivity.
The principle is to take a series of 12 predetermined exposures, starting at low kV values and progressively
increasing towards high kV values. If arcing occurs during an exposure, some or all exposures are automati-
cally repeated. If persistent arcing occurs, the software automatically terminates the warmup procedure.
3127
REV 3 sm 2308530100
AUTOMATIC XRAY TUBE WARMUP

5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR.
5.1.2 Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/TUBE/WarmUp on the console. The track/kV

combination for the first exposure should appear on the console display.
5.2 Perform Xray tube warmup.
5.2.1 Press the 2nd trigger button and HOLD IT DOWN while the exposures are taken.
JOB CARDS
Note: There is a time delay of 10 seconds between exposures. You can release the 2nd trigger button dur-
ing this 10 second period, then press it again to continue, but the minimum time between exposures
will still be 10 seconds. If the tube overheats at some point, exposures will be inhibited until it
cools down again. During the cooling period, the 2nd trigger button can be released; as soon as
the display shows that the Xray tube has sufficiently cooled, press the 2nd trigger button to con-
tinue.
5.2.2 When the warmup procedure is finished, the message Tube OK normally appears on the console
display. If persistent arcing occurred during the procedures, the message Too many spits appears
3128
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CHECKING AND ADJUSMENT OF LATERAL Version No.:

CENTERING OF XRAY BEAM Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D Ready Pack or cardboard cassette films (24 x 30 format)
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Ruler calibrated in mm (minimum length 30 cm)
JOB CARDS
D Pen or pencil capable of marking the surface of an Xray film
D Thumb tacks or push pins
D 2.5 mm Allen wrench
D 8 mm hollow offset tubular socket wrench
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
SECTION 5
CHECKING AND ADJUSTMENT OF LATERAL CENTERING OF XRAY BEAM
The objective is to check (and adjust if necessary) the lateral alignment of the following three points:
D Xray tube focal spot
D Center point between lateral collimator blades
D Center of image receptor support
3129
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHECKING AND ADJUSMENT OF LATERAL

CENTERING OF XRAY BEAM Job Card IST 021 2 of 6
5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR for the exposure.

No bucky installed
SID = 610 mm
Mo track
Large focal spot
5.1.2 Take a new cardboard cassette or Ready Pack and insert three thumb tacks through it, FROM THE
SIDE THAT WILL FACE THE XRAY TUBE, in the following way:
Two thumb tacks inserted along the (long) edge of the film that will be at the front edge
JOB CARDS
of the image receptor support, at approximately 2 cm in from this edge and approxi-
mately 4 cm inwards from the two shorter edges
The third thumb tack along the (short) edge of the film that will be on the left side of
the image receptor support, approximately 2 cm in from this edge and approximately
12 cm from the rear edge of the film.
Refer to illustration 1 below.
3130
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 1
PLACEMENT OF THREE THUMB TACKS TO BE INSERTED IN THE READY PACK
APPROX 12 CM
READY PACK
TUBE SIDE
JOB CARDS
APPROX 2 CM
APPROX 4 CM
APPROX 4 CM
APPROX 2 CM
APPROX 2 CM
Note: It is NOT important to insert the three thumb tacks in a perfectly squared alignment with the
edges of the Ready Pack.
5.1.3 Place the Ready Pack on the image receptor support so that the points of the two front thumb tacks
butt perfectly up against the front edge of the image receptor support and the third thumb tack butts
perfectly up against the left edge of the image receptor support. THE POSITIONING OF THE
THREE THUMB TACKS AGAINST THE IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT IS VERY IMPOR-
TANT TO THE SUCCESS OF THESE CHECKS.
3131
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.2 Take the exposure.
5.2.1 Using normal application mode, set up a manual (2point) exposure as follows:
25 kV
20 mAs
5.2.2 Take the exposure.
5.2.3 Remove the thumb tacks and develop the film.
5.2.4 Using the ruler and a pen or pencil, carefully draw a straight line between the rearward edges (i.e.
the edges of the holes closer to the front edge of the image receptor support during the exposure)
of the two holes left by the thumb tacks on the front edge of the film. (See illustrations 2 and 3
below.) THIS LINE IS THE REFERENCE FOR ALL THE FOLLOWING GEOMETRICAL
JOB CARDS
MEASUREMENTS.
5.2.5 Attach the developed film to a sheet of graph paper (or other support marked with a series of perpen-
dicular lines), carefully aligning the front edge reference line with a convenient line on the graph
paper. See illustration 3 below.
ILLUSTRATION 2
DETAIL OF WHERE TO DRAW REFERENCE LINE ON FILM WITH RESPECT TO HOLES LEFT BY THUMB TACKS
REFERENCE LINE DRAWN

IN INK OR PENCIL
TOWARDS
FRONT EDGE OF
HOLE LEFT IN FILM FILM
BY THUMB TACK
3132
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 3
CHECKING EXPOSED FILM FOR LATERAL CENTERING OF XRAY TUBE FOCAL SPOT WITH RESPECT TO THE
IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT
DEVELOPED READY PACK FILM GRAPH PAPER EXPOSED AREA OF FILM
JOB CARDS
t2 t1
approx. 100 mm
THIS LINE COR-

RESPONDS TO
THE LEFT EDGE OF
IMAGE RECEPTOR LINE DRAWN IN INK OR PEN-
REPORT CIL BETWEEN THE REAR-
WARD EDGES OF THE TWO
FRONT THUMB TACK HOLES
THUMB TACK HOLES IN FILM
USED AS A REFERENCE FOR
INDICATING ALIGNMENT WITH
FRONT EDGE
3133
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.3 Check lateral centering of Xray beam on image receptor support.
5.3.1 Use the ruler to measure carefully distances t1 and t2 in mm in parallel with the reference line and
at approximately 100 mm rearward from the front edge of the film (see illustration 3).
5.3.2 Calculate the offset E:

E (mm) = 275 (t1 + 2*t2)
where 275 mm is the width of the image receptor support, and t1 and t2 are expressed in mm
5.3.3 IF E 3 mm, proceed to section 5.4 below. If not, this is the end of the Job Card.
5.4 Correct lateral centering (if necessary) of Xray beam on image receptor support.
5.4.1 Determine, according to whether E is positive or negative, from which side of the Xray tube hous-
ing the adjustment will be made:
JOB CARDS
If E is POSITIVE, adjust from the LEFT side of the housing

If E is NEGATIVE, adjust from the RIGHT side of the housing
5.4.2 Adjust lateral position of Xray tube focal spot by following the procedure below:
1. Place the 8 mm hollow offset tubular socket wrench around the adjustment screw locknut
located on the side of the housing determined in section 5.4.1 above.
2. Hold the adjustment screw in the center of the locknut in place with the 2.5 mm Allen wrench.
3. Keeping the adjustment screw in place, loosen the locknut.
4. Use the 2.5 mm Allen wrench to UNSCREW (turn COUNTERclockwise) the adjustment
screw according to the formula NUMBER OF TURNS = 0.5 * E.
5. Keeping the adjustment screw in place, retighten the locknut.
6. Loosen the corresponding locknut on the OPPOSITE side of the housing and TIGHTEN (turn
CLOCKWISE) the adjustment screw until snug, then retighten the locknut.
5.5 Check results by repeating sections 5.1 to 5.3.
3134
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CHECKING BASIC SUPPLY VOLTAGES Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Accurate digital voltmeter (Fluke 8060 or equivalent)
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
IST 011 done.
SECTION 5
FIRST POWERON CHECK
The objective in this section is to detect (before its too late) an incorrect mains supply configuration.
5.1 Check keepalive supply voltage.
5.1.1 Check that generator Mains Supply Switch 200S1 is open (i.e. in the 0 position) and that mains
source is turned OFF.
5.1.2 Connect the voltmeter (set to 20 VDC scale) to generator mains power board 200PL1 between test
points PT15 (+VE) and PT12 (0VE). See illustration 1 below.
5.1.3 Close generator Mains Supply Switch 200S1 (i.e. turn it to the 1 position) and read the voltmeter
immediately. It should read +8 2 VDC.
3135
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHECKING BASIC SUPPLY VOLTAGES

ILLUSTRATION 1
LOCATION OF TEST POINTS PT14 AND PT15 FOR CHECKING KEEPALIVE SUPPLY VOLTAGE ON GENERATOR
MAINS DISTRIBUTION BOARD 200PL1
R1 R4
TR2
0VE
X1 PT12
PT14 PT15
JOB CARDS
VE + VE
GENERATOR MAINS DISTRIBUTION BOARD 200PL1
If the voltmeter reading is outside this range, turn mains source OFF
CAUTION IMMEDIATELY and check configuration of voltage selection board IN2 on
generator mains distribution board 200PL1 (see Job Card IST 011 CON-
NECTION OF MAINS SUPPLY).
5.1.4 Move the voltmeter connection to PT14 (VE). The voltmeter should read 8V 2VDC
5.1.5 Connect the voltmeter (set to 500 VAC scale) to generator mains power board 200PL1 between
terminals 1 (0V) and 4 (220V).
5.1.6 Turn console on and read the voltmeter immediately. It should read 220 20 VAC.
If the voltmeter reading is outside this range, open generator Mains Supply
CAUTION Switch 200S1 IMMEDIATELY (i.e. turn it to the 0 position) and check
mains voltage selection wire SEL on generator mains distribution board
200PL1
(see Job Card IST 011 CONNECTION OF MAINS SUPPLY).
5.2 Check generator 5.1Vdc supply voltage.
5.2.1 On generator CPU board 400PL3, measure DC voltage +5.1 0.05 V between TP110 and TP111
(GND).
Note: This voltage can be adjusted via the potentiometer located on the switching power supply, just be-
side the connector. Once adjustment is made, apply a drop of locking compound to prevent
unintentional change of the potentiometers setting.
3136
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION FORCE Version No.:

DETECTOR Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Calibrated force detector capable of measuring compression force between the compression paddle and
the cassette holder, required accuracy 0.5 daN the Mammo compression scale Part No.
JOB CARDS
46-194427P407 is recommended.
SECTION 3
None
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION FORCE DETECTOR
The objective is to calibrate the compression force detector.
WARNING
If a power line failure occurs during the calibration (before a checksum is done), it is mandatory to repeat this
calibration from the beginning.
5.1 Preparation
3137
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION FORCE

DETECTOR Job Card IST 023 2 of 2
5.2 Perform the calibration.

Arm rotation at 0
Contact mode
5.2.2 Raise the compression paddle and place the force detector on the cassette holder.
5.2.3 Starting from application mode, select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/COMP/

FORCE/CALIB/MEASURE on the console.
5.2.4 With the compression paddle completely raised and out of contact (i.e. in its home position), press
the 0daN key on the console.
JOB CARDS
5.2.5 Lower the compression paddle into contact with the force detector. Using the compression finead-
justment knob, adjust the compression to exactly 3 daN on the force detector.
5.2.6 Press the 3daN key on the console.
5.2.7 Still using the compression fineadjustment knob, increase the compression to exactly 6 daN on
the force detector.
5.2.8 Press the 6daN key on the console.
5.2.9 Continue this process for 9 and 12 daN, then press the ETC key on the console and proceed with
15, 18, 21, 24 and 27 daN.
5.2.10 Select SETUP/CALCUL on the console. This executes the calculation of the new force detector
calibration parameters.
5.2.12 Request a total decompression of the compression paddle (the paddle must return to its home posi-
tion).
5.3 Check the results.
5.3.1 With the arm at 0 (i.e. Xray tube above the cassette holder), bring the compression paddle into
contact once again with the force detector. Increase the compression until maximum force is
reached (i.e. compression cannot be further increased). Read the force detector measurement and
check that it is within 1 daN of the maximum compression force chosen in the SETUP/ARM/
VALID/MEDICAL/FORCE menu.
5.3.2 Repeat the above check with the arm rotated to 180 (i.e. Xray tube below the cassette holder).
Note: The maximum compression force must never exceed 30 daN. This limit must always be checked
after any maintenance (preventive or corrective) of the compression assembly to insure patient
safety.
3138
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: MINIMUM COMPRESSION/DECOMPRESSION Version No.:

FORCE TESTS Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D A 3 kg weight whose dimensions allow it to be placed on top of the compression paddle
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Card IST 023 CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION FORCE DETECTOR
SECTION 5
MINIMUM COMPRESSION/DECOMPRESSION FORCE TESTS
The objectives are:
D Check that a compression force (limit IC: In Compression) of at least 22 daN can be reached when the
arm is rotated by 180 with the paddle drive motor current limit value set between 50% ard 70% (motors
maximum current rating).
D Check that a decompression force (limit OC: Out of Compression) of at least 3 daN can be reached when
the arm is at 0 with the paddle drive motor current limit value set to 65% of the motors maximum current
rating. (This ensures that the compression paddle will rise and stay up when decompression is requested.)
3139
REV 3 sm 2308530100
MINIMUM COMPRESSION/DECOMPRESSION
FORCE TESTS Job Card IST 024 2 of 4
5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR for the tests.
Note: This must be done only if the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to
5.1.2 Set up the Senographe DMR in contact mode with a compression paddle installed.
5.1.3 Inhibit the cassette detection in medical menu. Starting from application mode:
SETUP/MEDICAL/FILM/NO
5.2 Checking and adjusting the limit IC

JOB CARDS
SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/COMP/LIMIT/CALIB/LIMIT_IC on the console.

Check that the limit IC is set in between 50% and 70% for the motor current value and perform
the test.
5.2.2 Rotate the arm to 180 (i.e, Xray tube below the cassette holder).
5.2.3 Bring the compression paddle into contact with the cassette holder.
Note: Be ready to read the compression force displayed on the gantry readout unit, the paddle should
release and fall towards the tube housing for a compression close to 22 daN.
5.2.4 Increase compression to 22 daN as displayed on the gantry display panel. You must be able to reach
22 daN without the compression paddle releasing. If the compression paddle releases for a force
lower or higher than 22 daN, perform the adjustment in step 5.2.5; otherwise go to step 5.3.
5.2.5 Set up the limit IC to its minimum: Starting from application mode, select
SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/COMP/LIMIT/CALIB/LIMIT_IC on the con-
sole.Use the + and - key on the console to set the motor current value to 50%. Enter this values with
the VAL key on the console.
5.2.6 Increase compression to 22 daN as displayed on the gantry display panel. You must be able to reach
22 daN without the compression paddle releasing.
5.2.7 If the compression paddle releases before a force of 22 daN is reached, increase the compression
motor current value by 5%, then try again to reach 22 daN. Continue increasing the maximum in
compression motor current value in steps of 5%, if necessary, until 22 daN can be reached.
Note: Between each compression, request a total decompression of the compression paddle, using the
appropriate footswitch.
3140
REV 3 sm 2308530100
5.3 Check the limit OC.
5.3.1 Rotate the arm to 0 (i.e, Xray tube above the cassette holder).
5.3.2 Bring the compression paddle into contact with the cassette holder.
5.3.3 Select SETUP/LIMIT_OC on the console. The maximum motor current value (in decompression
mode) should be set to 65% otherwuise use the + and - key on the console to set this value. Enter
this value with the VAL key on the console and return to the application menu.
5.3.4 Place the 3 kg weight on top of the compression paddle.
5.3.5 Request a total decompression of the compression paddle using the appropriate pedal. The com-
pression paddle must rise smoothly to its home position.
5.3.6 If the compression paddle slips or releases, check that the compression paddle drive belt is not slip-
JOB CARDS
ping. If it is slipping, adjust or replace the belt.
Note: The maximum out of compression motor current adjustment range is limited to 65%.
5.3.8 If you are handing the machine back to the user at this point, turn the Senographe DMR off, then
back on again.
3141
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Blank page
JOB CARDS
3142
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF BREAST THICKNESS Version No.:

MEASUREMENT Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Plexiglass in thickness increments of 0.5 cm (minimum plexiglass dimensions 20 x 20 cm)
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Card IST 023 CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION FORCE DETECTOR
D Check the configuration of the senographe with the bucky used (see section 5 installation steering, step
13.b.ii).
SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF BREAST THICKNESS MEASUREMENT
The objective is to calibrate the breast thickness measurement. Since the compression paddle and its drive
train, as well as the cassette holder or magnification device undergo deflection when under compression, a
compensation factor must be calculated to correct for changes in compression force at a fixed breast thickness.
Two calibrations must in fact be done, one for contact mode and one for magnification mode.
5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR for the calibrations.

3143
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CALIBRATION OF BREAST THICKNESS

5.2 Perform the contact mode calibration.
5.2.1 Set up the Senographe DMR in contact mode with the 18 x 24 compression paddle installed.
5.2.2 Request a total decompression of the compression paddle to its home position.
Note: This MUST be done before entering the gantry installation menus.
5.2.3 Starting from application mode, select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/THICK/CON-

TACT/CALIB on the console.
5.2.4 Lower the compression paddle into contact with the cassette holder. Using the compression fine
adjustment knob, adjust the compression to between 3 and 5 daN as read on the gantry display panel.
Press the <5daN key on the console.
5.2.5 Increase the compression to between 15 and 20 daN as read on the gantry display panel. Press the
JOB CARDS
>15daN key on the console. The Calcul key appears on the console display.
5.2.6 Press the Calcul key on the console. This executes the calibration calculation for contact mode.
5.3 Check the contact mode calibration results.
5.3.1 Request a total decompression of the compression paddle.
5.3.2 Keeping the Senographe DMR in contact mode, place 4 cm of plexiglass in the center of the bucky.
5.3.3 Lower the compression paddle into contact with the plexiglass.
5.3.4 Verify for any compression force between zero and 20 daN of compression (as displayed on the
gantry display panel), that the breast thickness displayed on the gantry display panel does not vary
outside the range of 35 to 45 mm (i.e. plexiglass thickness of 40 mm, 5 mm).
5.4 Perform the magnification mode calibration.
5.4.1 Install the magnification device and the 18 x 24 compression paddle.
5.4.2 Select SETUP/SETUP/MAGNIF/CALIB on the console.
5.4.3 Request a total decompression of the compression paddle to its home position, using the appropriate
pedal.
5.4.4 Lower the compression paddle into contact with the magnification device. Using the compression
fineadjustment knob, adjust the compression to between 3 and 5 daN as read on the gantry display
panel. Press the <5daN key on the console.
5.4.5 Increase the compression to between 15 and 20 daN as read on the gantry display panel. Press the
>15daN key on the console. The Calcul key appears on the console display.
3144
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.4.6 Press the Calcul key on the console. This executes the calibration calculation for magnification
mode.
5.5 Check the magnification mode calibration results.
5.5.1 Request a total decompression of the compression paddle.
5.5.2 Place 4 cm of plexiglass on the magnification device.
5.5.4 Verify for any compression force between zero and 20 daN of compression (as displayed on the
gantry display panel), that the breast thickness displayed on the gantry display panel does not vary
outside the range of 37 to 43 mm (i.e. plexiglass thickness of 40 mm, 3 mm).
5.6 Return the Senographe DMR to its normal state.
JOB CARDS
5.6.2 If you are turning the Senographe DMR back over to the user at this point, turn the Senographe
DMR off, then back on again.
3145
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3146
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF GRID POSITION Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
None
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Card IST 015 CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION ARM ANGULATION. Arm angulation must
be correctly calibrated to ensure that grid movement is made in the correct direction when the angulation
is positive or negative.
SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF GRID POSITION
The objective is to calculate the gain and offset necessary for determining the grid position. The calibration
is fully automatic. A check is included at the end of this automatic calibration to see if the calculated gain and
offset are within a certain range. If they are not, an error message appears on the console display.
5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR for the calibration of grid position.
5.1.2 Set up the Senographe DMR in contact mode with the 18 x 24 bucky.
5.1.3 Set arm rotation to 0 (Bucky is horizontal).
3147
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CALIBRATION OF GRID POSITION

5.2 Perform the calibration of grid position.
5.2.1 Starting from application mode, select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/GRID/CALIB

on the console.
5.2.2 Select CALIB on the console. If the calibration is successful, CALIBRATION OK appears on
the console display within a few seconds.
If Invalid gain/offset or other error message is displayed, the bucky is to be replaced.
5.2.3 On the console, select each of the following calibration parameters in turn; note the values and
check them against the acceptable values given in the table below:
OFFSET; GAIN; MIN; MAX
If any of these values is out of range, the bucky is to be replaced.
JOB CARDS
5.2.4 Repeat steps 5.2.2 and 5.2.3 with the arm rotated to +90.
5.2.5 Repeat steps 5.2.2 and 5.2.3 with the arm rotated to 90.
5.2.6 Repeat steps 5.2.2 to 5.2.5 using the 24 x 30 bucky, if available.
5.2.7 Return to application mode (a CKSUM is not necessary when grid position parameters have been
changed).
5.2.8 If you are handing the Senographe DMR back to the user at this point, turn the Senographe DMR
off, then back on again.
PARAMETER ARM AT 0_ ARM AT +90_ ARM AT 90_ Acceptable Values

18 x 24 Bucky:
OFFSET 0.47 thru 0.53
GAIN 0.5 thru 0.6
MIN > 5000 (5.000E+3)
MAX < 60500 (6.050E+4)

24 x 30 Bucky:
OFFSET 0.47 thru 0.53
GAIN 0.5 thru 0.6
MIN > 5000 (5.000E+3)
MAX < 60500 (6.050E+4)
3148
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CHECKING XRAY FILM FORMAT Version No.:

GEOMETRY Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Ruler calibrated in mm (minimum length 30 cm).
JOB CARDS
D Writing implement capable of marking the surface of an Xray film.
D Thumb tacks or push pins (at least 20 mm long)
D Plexiglas plates in thickness increments of 5mm. Plates used for AEC calibration are adequate.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
Job Card IST 029 must be done before commencing this procedure.
Note: This prerequisite is given as a reminder only.
3149
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHECKING XRAY FILM FORMAT

GEOMETRY Job Card IST 027 2 of 14
SECTION 5
CHECKING XRAY FILM FORMAT GEOMETRY
The objective is to verify that the exposed area on the Xray film is within the required tolerances for the fol-
lowing properties:
Parallelism between front collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support
Perpendicularity between left collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support
Perpendicularity between right collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support
Parallelism between rear collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support
Lateral centering of Xray beam on image receptor support
Maximum overlap of Xray beam beyond front edge of image receptor support (MQSA requirement)
Dimensions of exposed area (width and depth).
These checks are performed by making various geometrical measurements on an exposed cardboard cassette
JOB CARDS
or Ready Pack film.

Set the lateral, rear, and front, collimator margins according to local standards or the doctors preference:
1. Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch
(switch B1 on generator CPU board 400PL3).
Note: This must only be done if the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to
2. Select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CONFIG/COLLIM/MARG_L on the console.
3. Press the + or key on the console, repeatedly if necessary, until the desired lateral collimator
margin in millimetres is obtained (see the table below for standards and recommendations to
get full film blackening).
Standard Lateral margin (mm) = MARG_L Selection*

CEI** +2 .....
UK +3 .....
AUSTRALIA** 0 .....
MQSA/CDRH +2 .....
** Standard authorizes the full film blackening and in these tables, we indicate the margin configu-
ration to get it. But the user can also use margins inside the film.
4. Select VALID on the console.
3150
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5. Select SETUP/MARG_R on the console.
6. Press the + or key on the console, repeatedly if necessary, until the desired rear collimator mar-
gin in millimetres is obtained (see the table below for standards and recommendations to get full
film blackening).
Standard Rear margin (mm) = MARG_R Selection*

CEI** +2 .....
UK +2 .....
AUSTRALIA** 0 .....
MQSA +2 .....
JOB CARDS
** Standard authorizes the full film blackening and in these tables, we indicate the margin configu-
ration to get it. But the user can also use margins inside the film.
8. Select SETUP/MARG_F on the console.
9. Press the + or key on the console, repeatedly if necessary, until the desired front collimator
margin in millimetres is obtained (see the table below for standards and recommendations to
get full film blackening).
Standard Front margin (mm) = MARG_F Selection*

CEI +2 .....
UK +2 .....
AUSTRALIA +3 .....
MQSA +2 .....
11. Perform a CKSUM and return to application mode.

No Bucky
SID = 660 mm
3151
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.1.2 Take a new cardboard cassette or Ready Pack and insert three thumb tacks through it, from the side
that will face the xray tube, in the following way:
two thumb tacks inserted along the (long) edge of the film that will be at the front edge
of the image receptor support, at approximately 20mm in from this edge and approxi-
mately 40mm in from the two shorter edges
the third thumb tack along the (short) edge of the film that will be on the left side of the
image receptor support, approximately 20mm in from this edge and approximately
120mm from the rear edge of the film.
Refer to Illustration 1 below.
ILLUSTRATION 1
JOB CARDS
APPROX 120mm
READY PACK
TUBE SIDE
APPROX 20mm
APPROX 40mm
APPROX 40mm
APPROX 20mm
APPROX
20mm
Note: It is not important to insert the three thumb tacks in a perfectly squared alignment with the edges
of the Ready Pack.
3152
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.1.3 Place 15 mm of plexiglas on the image receptor top as shown in illustration 2, to raise the Ready
pack film.
Note: This arrangement is done to simulate the exact film placement when a Bucky and a cassette are
used. This configuration is mandatory to measure accurately the X-Ray area in step 5.8, 5.9
&5.10 (particularly critical for front edge position).
The reason for such criticity is the tolerance decreasing (now 1% of SID for front edge overlap)
induced by various country regulations.
ILLUSTRATION 2
TOP VIEW
IMAGE RECEPTOR
TOP
JOB CARDS
THUMB TACK
PLEXIGLASS PLATE
(15 MM)
(Placed between film
and image receptor)
READY PACK FILM THUMB TACK
5.1.4 Place the Ready Pack on the plexiglas plate support so that the points of the two front thumb tacks
butt perfectly up against the front edge of the support and the third thumb tack butts perfectly up
against the left edge of the support. Correct positioning of all three thumb tacks is very important
for the success of the ensuing checks.
3153
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Maximum format
Mo track
Large focal spot
25 kV
20 mAs
CAUTION It is critical that the TRACK is MO and that the FOCAL SPOT is LARGE.
JOB CARDS
5.2.4 Using the ruler and a pen or pencil, carefully draw a straight line between the rearward edges (i.e.
the edges of the holes closer to the front edge of the image receptor support during the exposure)
of the two holes left by the thumb tacks on the front edge of the film (see Illustration 3 below).
Draw another line parallel to the first one and shifted by 3 mm inside the film. This line represents
the edge of the film inside a cassette and is the reference for all the following measurements.
5.2.5 Attach the developed film to a sheet of graph paper (or other support marked with a series of perpen-
dicular lines), carefully aligning the front edge reference line with a convenient line on the graph
paper. See illustration 4 below.
ILLUSTRATION 3
REFERENCE LINE DRAWN LINE DETERMINED
IN INK OR PENCIL BY HOLES
3 mm
TOWARDS
FRONT EDGE OF
FILM
HOLE LEFT IN FILM

BY THUMB TACK
3154
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.3 Check parallelism between the front collimator blade and the front edge of the image receptor support.
Use the ruler to measure carefully distances y1 and y2 (see illustration 4).
CRITERION: The difference between y1 and y2 must be LESS THAN 2 mm.
If the criterion is not met, loosen the collimator assembly holddown screws and rotate the assembly to correct
the parallelism. Retighten the screws. Check by repeating the exposure. Once the parallelism is satisfactory,
proceed to the next check below (use the NEW film obtained from the most recent check exposure in all the
following checks).
5.4 Check perpendicularity between left collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support.
Use the ruler to measure carefully distances z1 and z2. (See illustration 5.)
CRITERION: The difference between z1 and z2 must be LESS THAN 1.5 mm.
JOB CARDS
Note: It is important to notice that z1 and z2 are measured between the left edge of the exposed area of
the film and ANY convenient perpendicular line on the graph paper.
If the criterion is not met, exchange the collimator. No field adjustment is possible.
5.5 Check perpendicularity between right collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support.
Use the ruler to measure carefully distances z1 and z2. (See illustration 5.)
CRITERION: The difference between z1 and z2 must be LESS THAN 1.5 mm.
Note: It is important to notice that z1 and z2 are measured between the right edge of the exposed area
of the film and ANY convenient perpendicular line on the graph paper.
5.6 Check parallelism between rear collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support
Use the ruler to measure carefully distances d1 and d2. (See illustration 6.)
CRITERION: The difference between d1 and d2 must be LESS THAN 2 mm.
Note: It is important to notice that d1 and d2 are measured between the rear edge of the exposed area and
the REFERENCE LINE.
3155
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.7 Check lateral centering of xray beam on image receptor support

Use the ruler to measure carefully distances t1 and t2 at approximately 100 mm rearward from the front edge
of the film. (See illustration 7.)
t1 = . . . . . mm t2 = . . . . . . mm
CRITERION: 275 (t1 + 2t2) must be LESS THAN 4 mm.
Where 275 mm is the width of the image receptor support and distances t1 and t2 are in mm.
If the criterion is not met, adjust the lateral position of the Xray tube housing as described at the end of Job
Card IST 021 CHECKING AND ADJUSTMENT OF LATERAL CENTERING OF XRAY BEAM.
Check by repeating the exposure before proceeding (be sure to reconfigure the Senographe DMR as given
in THIS Job Card before taking the exposure). Once the lateral centering is satisfactory, proceed to the next
check below (use the NEW film obtained from this most recent check exposure in all the following checks).
JOB CARDS
5.8 Check width of exposed area

Use the ruler to measure carefully distance t1 at approximately 100 mm rearward from the reference line (see
illustration 7). Same value as in 5.7 above:
t1 = . . . . . mm
CRITERION: t1 must be in the range of (238 + 2* MARG_L) 3 mm (respect the sign of MARG_L! ).
Where MARG_L was determined and entered in Section 5.1.
EXAMPLE 1: If margin is set to +2 mm (CDRH Standard), then the criterion is: 239 mm < t1 < 245 mm.
EXAMPLE 2: If margin is set to +4 mm, then the criterion is: 243 mm < t1 < 249 mm.
If this criterion is not met, perform Job Cards IST 029 and IST 030, then repeat the check exposure (be sure
to reconfigure the Senographe DMR as described in Section 5.1 above before taking the exposure) and
proceed to the next check below (use the NEW film obtained from this most recent check exposure in the
following check).
5.9 Check depth of exposed area.

Use the ruler to measure carefully distance d3 at approximately the lateral center of the exposed area. (See
illustration 6.)
CRITERION: d3 must be in the range of (178 + MARG_R) 3mm where MARG_R was determined and
entered in Section 5.1.
EXAMPLE: If Margin is set to +2 mm (CDRH standard) then the criterion is: 177 mm < d3 < 183 mm.
If this criterion is not met, perform Job Cards IST 029 and IST 030, then repeat the check exposure (be sure
to reconfigure the Senographe DMR as given in THIS Job Card before taking the exposure) and proceed to
the next check bellow, using the film obtained with Job Card IST 030.
3156
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.10 Check the front margin of the exposed area

Use the ruler to measure carefully the distance W (see Illustration 8). The value sign is positive if the X-Ray
area exceed the image receptor edge, negative if the X-Ray area is inside the image receptor.
Criterion: (take care of Marg_F and W sign ! )

Marg_F 1.5 mm < W < Marg_F + 1.5 mm
Where Marg_F is the value entered in Section 5.1.
EXAMPLE 1: If Marg_F is set to +2 (CDRH, CEI standard)

0.5 mm < W < 3.5 mm
EXAMPLE 2: If Marg_F is set to 2 (Australia standard)

3.5 mm < W < 0.5 mm
JOB CARDS
If these criteria are not met, perform Job Cards IST 029 and IST 030, then repeat the check exposure (be sure
to reconfigure the Senographe DMR as described in Section 5.1 above before taking the exposure).
3157
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 4
CHECKING EXPOSED FILM FOR PARALLELISM BETWEEN FRONT EDGE OF EXPOSED AREA AND FRONT EDGE OF

JOB CARDS
y1 y2
THIS LINE COR-

RESPONDS TO THE
LEFT EDGE OF
IMAGE RECEPTOR REFERENCE LINE DRAWN IN 5.2.4
REPORT
3158
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 5
CHECKING EXPOSED FILM FOR PERPENDICULARITY BETWEEN LEFT AND RIGHT COLLIMATOR BLADES AND
FRONT EDGE OF IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT
JOB CARDS
z2 Z2
z1 z 1
REFERENCE LINE DRAWN IN 5.2.4

3159
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 6
CHECKING EXPOSED FILM FOR PARALLELISM BETWEEN REAR COLLIMATOR BLADE AND FRONT EDGE OF
JOB CARDS
d1 d3 d2

3160
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 7
CHECKING EXPOSED FILM FOR CENTERING OF LATERAL COLLIMATOR BLADES WITH RESPECT TO THE IMAGE
RECEPTOR SUPPORT
JOB CARDS
t2 t1
approx. 100 mm

3161
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 8
CHECKING EXPOSED FILM FOR MAXIMUM OVERLAP OF XRAY BEAM BEYOND FRONT EDGE OF IMAGE RECEP-
TOR SUPPORT (MQSA REQUIREMENT)
JOB CARDS
w1 w2

IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT NOTE: In this example , w is a positive value.
3162
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: LIGHT CENTERING CALIBRATION Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D Ready pack or cardboard cassette films (24 x 30 format).
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Ruler calibrated in mm.
JOB CARDS
D Writing implement capable of marking the surface of an X-ray film.
D Thumb tacks or push pins.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION This procedure produces X-rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
Job Card IST 027 + IST 029 + IST 030 must be done before starting this procedure, and in that order.
Note: This prerequisite is given as a reminder only. If collimator lamp was just changed, Job Card
IST 036 must be performed first.
SECTION 5
LIGHT CENTERING CALIBRATION
The objective is to calibrate light centering for X-Ray and light format coincidence.
This calibration is performed by making an exposure on a cardboard cassette or Ready Pack film, followed
by a real time collimator blade adjustment.
5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR for the exposure

No compression paddle.
Bucky 18 x 24 installed (mandatory).
SID = 560 mm.
3163
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Note: A warning message Set Sid to 560 will appear in the submenu if the SID is not correctly set.
In this case, simply reset the SID to 560. The message dissapears when the menu level is changed
(up or down).
5.1.2 Take a new cardboard cassette or Ready Pack and insert three thumb tacks through it, from the side
that will face the x-ray tube, in the following way:
Two thumb tacks inserted along the (long) edge of the film that will be at the front edge of the
image receptor support, at approximately 20 mm in from this edge and approximately 40 mm
in from the two shorter edges.
The third thumb tack along the (short) edge of the film that will be on the left side of the image
receptor support, approximately 20 mm in from this edge and approximately 120 mm from the
rear edge of the film.
Refer to Illustration 1 below.
ILLUSTRATION 1
JOB CARDS
APPROX 120mm
READY PACK
TUBE SIDE
APPROX 20mm
APPROX 40mm
APPROX 40mm
APPROX 20mm
APPROX
20mm
3164
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Note: It is not important to insert the three thumb tacks in a perfectly squared alignment with the edges
of the Ready Pack.
5.1.3 Place the Ready Pack on the Bucky so that the points of two front thumb tacks butt perfectly up
against the front edge of the Bucky and the third thumb tack butts perfectly up against the lelt edge
of the Bucky. Correct positionning of all three thumb tacks is very important for the success of the
ensuing checks.
Note: The use of Bucky is mandatory for adjustment accuracy.
5.2 Take the exposure
5.2.1 Starting from application mode, select:
JOB CARDS
SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/FORMAT/CALIB/LIGHT/EXPOSE
Change mAs value (default = 25 mAs) if required
ILLUSTRATION 2
REFERENCE LINE DRAWN
IN INK OR PENCIL
TOWARDS
FRONT EDGE OF
FILM
HOLE LEFT IN FILM

BY THUMB TACK
3165
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.2.4 Place the thumb tacks again at the same place and place the film at the same place on the Bucky.
Note: The film positioning is very important for the success of the following checks.
To improve the visibility of the lighted area limit, insert a white sheet of paper between the Bucky
top and the film.
It is advisable to turn off all room lighting before proceeding to the following steps.
5.3 Light Alignment Adjustment.

The purpose of this section is to adjust the front lighted area with the front X-Ray blackened area
(only for collimator equiped with a motor driven front blade).
5.3.1 Select: SETUP/ALIGN

JOB CARDS
Note: The centering light should turn on when you enter this menu.
5.3.2 Use + & keys or rotate console kV button to change the displayed value. When the value is
changed, collimator front and rear blades are moving at once. For the moment, only consider the
movement of the collimator front blade. Stop changing the value when alignment is correct.
5.3.3 Press the VALID key to memorize the setting.
Note: If it is impossible to align perfectly the front blade (Diff_F is always above 2 mm, see illustration
3) perform Job Card IST 036 (Adjustment of centering device lamp).
5.4 Light Coverage Adjustment.

The purpose of this Section is to adjust the light coverage with the X-Ray blackened area.
5.4.1 select: SETUP/COVERAGE
Note: The centering light should turn off and on again when you enter this menu.
5.4.2 Use + & keys or rotate console kV button to change the displayed value. The value changes by
step of 5 units, starting from the previous value (e.g. 12, 7, 2, +3, +8 ...etc). When the value is
changed, only the lateral and rear collimator blades are moving at once. Stop changing the value
when alignment is correct.
5.4.3 Press the VALID key to memorize the setting.
Note: If it is impossible to align simultaneously the lateral and rear blades, try to find a position where
Diff_L and Diff_R are both less than 2 mm (see illustration 4). If this compromise is impossible,
perform Job Card IST 036 (Adjustment of Centering device lamp).
5.5 Perform a CKSUM and return to application mode
3166
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 3
Diff_F
JOB CARDS
X-RAY BLACKENED
AREA
LIGHTED AREA
ILLUSTRATION 4
Diff_L
Diff_R
X-RAY BLACKENED
AREA
LIGHTED AREA
Ideally Diff_F, Diff_R and Diff_L are equal to zero.

Maximumum allowed deviation is +/ 2 mm from the XRay area on each side.
3167
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3168
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF XRAY TUBE REFERENCE Version No.:

ANGLE Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D 18 x 24 mm film and cassette
SECTION 2
TOOLS
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D None
SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF XRAY TUBE REFERENCE ANGLE
The objective is to determine the Xray tube angle when in its reference position.
This calibration is done by taking an exposure (at a given SID) whose field coverage depth is limited by the
anode geometry and not by the rear collimator blade, measuring this field coverage depth, and entering this
depth into the Senographe DMR which subsequently calculates the Xray tube angle when in its reference
position.
3169
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CALIBRATION OF XRAY TUBE REFERENCE

ANGLE Job Card IST 029 2 of 4
5.1 Perform the calibration of Xray tube reference angle.

Contact mode
18 x 24 mm bucky and grid installed
SID set to 560 mm
CAUTION The SID must not be changed from 560 mm until successful completion of
this Job Card.
JOB CARDS
5.1.2 Install a cassette loaded with fresh film in the bucky.
5.1.3 Select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/TUBE/CALIB/EXPOSE/VALID/VALID on

the console.
5.1.4 Take an exposure by pressing the 2nd trigger button.
5.1.5 Develop the film and use the ruler to measure the distance between the front edge (edge closest to
the patient) of the film and the rear edge of the blackened area.
Note: Be sure to measure from the front edge of the FILM, even if the blackened area does not extend
to it.
Note: Be sure that the rear edge of the blackened area truly represents the end of the anode, and not a
stuck rear collimator blade (normally the software commands full open during the exposure)
or other obstacle. This can be determined by the abruptness of the change in contrast between the
blackened area and the clear area. If the change is gradual, the exposure is good. If it is very abrupt,
it is necessary to correct the problem and repeat the calibration.
Note: If the blackened area of the film extends all the way to its rear edge, the Xray tube reference angle
is severely incorrect and this calibration cannot be performed.
5.1.6 Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/MEASURE on the console and enter the measured value in mm
using the NEXT and VALID keys.
3170
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.1.7 Select SETUP/Calculation on the console to execute the Xray tube angle calculation.
Normally, the message calib OK appears on the console display.
If the message calib error appears instead, this means that the calculated Xray tube reference
angle value is out of range. To check this, select SETUP/SETUP/PARAM on the console. The dis-
played value of the calculated Xray tube reference angle A_REF must be between +2.800E1 and
+3.500E1 (0.28 and 0.35) radians.
If the angle is out of range, correct the problem and repeat the calibration (check first that the SID
was effectively set to 560 mm).
5.1.9 If youre turning the machine back over to the user at this point, turn the Senographe DMR off, then
back on again.
JOB CARDS
3171
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3172
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF LATERAL, REAR, AND FRONT, Version No.:

COLLIMATOR BLADE REFERENCE POSITIONS Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D 18 x 24 cm film and cassette
SECTION 2
TOOLS
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION This procedure produces XRays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Cards IST 029 and IST 027 must have been done before commencing this procedure (these
prerequisites are given as a reminder only).
D Job Cards IST 028 if the collimator has a nonmotorized front blade.
SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF ALL COLLIMATOR BLADE REFERENCE POSITIONS
The objective is to determine the lateral, rear, and front, collimator reference positions. The result is that the
software will then be able to command and obtain any desired XRay format.
This calibration is done by taking three exposures (at a given SID):
A first exposure with blades at optical fork reference.
A second exposure as large as possible.
A third exposure as small as possible.
The width and depth positions of the blackened areas of the exposed film are then measured and entered in
the Senographe DMR which in turn calculates and saves the reference positions.
3173
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CALIBRATION OF LATERAL, REAR, AND FRONT,

COLLIMATOR BLADE REFERENCE POSITIONS Job Card IST 030 2 of 4
5.1 Perform acquisition of three exposures.

Large focal spot.
Mo track
Contact mode.
Bucky 18 x 24 cm in place (with grid).
SID must be set to 560 mm.
Note: A warning message Set Sid to 560 will appear in the submenu if the SID is not correctly set.
In this case, simply reset the SID to 560. The message dissapears when the menu level is changed
(up or down).
JOB CARDS
1. The SID must not be changed from 560 mm until successful completion of
CAUTION this Job Card the value is now the default for SID in the following calibra-
tion menus.
2. This calibration uses the full surface area of the film. Check that no mask
or other object is present in the beam before proceeding.
5.1.2 Install a cassette loaded with fresh film in the bucky.
5.1.3 Select:
SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/FORMAT/CALIB/COLLIM/EXPOSE/VALID/
VALID
Note: The default value of 10 mAs can be modified if necessary; for normal cassettes use 5 mAs for each
exposure. The kV value is automatically set to 22 kV.
Too dark an exposure will produce a shadow around the exposed area, decreasing distance mea-
surement accuracy.
5.1.4 Take the three exposures in sequence; press the 2nd trigger button and hold it until the third
exposure is acquired (the messages: 1st exposure, 2nd exposure, 3rd exposure, then end of
acquisition, are displayed).
5.1.5 Develop the film and use the ruler to measure the differents distances as shown in Illustration 1.
3174
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.2 Enter measured values from DMR console. See illustration 1.
Note: During this procedure, warning messages Value too high or Value too low will be displayed if an
out-of-range value is entered. If this happens, check the value.
5.2.1 Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/REF_L/MEASURE and enter the measured (L1) value in mm

using the NEXT and VALID keys. The valid range is 188.9 < L1 < 195.6.
5.2.2 Once L1 value is entered, select SETUP/CALCUL.
ILLUSTRATION 1
BLACKENED FILM AREA DIMENSIONING
L2
JOB CARDS
R2
L1
L3
R1
R3
Front edge of film A1
5.2.3 Select SETUP/REF_R/MEASURE and enter the measured (R1) value in mm using the NEXT and
VALID keys. The valid range is 128.6 < R1 < 142.3.
5.2.4 Once R1 value is entered, select SETUP/CALCUL.
5.2.5 Select SETUP/REF_F/MEASURE and enter the measured (A1) value in mm using the NEXT and
VALID keys. The valid range is 7.15 < A1 < 16.86.
5.2.6 Once A1 value is entered, select SETUP/CALCUL.
5.2.7 L2 L3 value must be entered as follows: Select SETUP/DIFFL/MEASURE and enter the (L2
L3) value in mm using the NEXT and VALID keys.
5.2.8 Once (L2 L3) value is entered, select SETUP/CALCUL.
3175
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.2.9 R2 R3 value must be entered as follows: Select SETUP/DIFFR/MEASURE and enter the (R2
R3) value in mm using the NEXT and VALID keys.
5.2.10 Once (R2 R3) value is entered, select SETUP/CALCUL.
5.2.11 The calibration procedure is now complete. Perform a checksum as follows: SETUP/GENE/
INSTAL/CKSUM.
Note: This calibration procedure adjusts the values of STP_L and STP_R to improve shutter positioning
accuracy. The new values after calibration should be close to the default values (below).
To check for correct operation of a collimator, or if you find a problem with the calibration, start
with the default parameter values given here:
Parameter Default value

JOB CARDS
CO_L 5.700 E+1

CO_R 4.100 E+1
CO_F 4.300 E1
STP_L 2.500 E1
STP_R 1.250 E1
3176
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: TEST FOR ABSENCE OF GRID LINES ON Version No.:

EXPOSED FILM Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D Film and cassette of the type and size(s) used by the customer on the Senographe DMR being installed
(18 x 24 mm, plus 24 x 30 mm if this option is chosen by the customer)
SECTION 2
TOOLS
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Card IST 026 CALIBRATION OF GRID POSITION
D Complete AEC calibration for the screen pair to be used in this test (see Installation Steering in chapter 1).
SECTION 5
TEST FOR ABSENCE OF GRID LINES ON EXPOSED FILM
The objective is to test for correct grid movement by taking exposures and examining the developed films for
grid lines .
Generalities on gridlines observation:

This procedure describes the optimum conditions for carrying out and analyzing grid line test exposures. It
is important to emphasize, however, that detection of the grid line effect is still a SUBJECTIVE test. In partic-
ular, the following considerations must be remembered:
It is possible to obtain a good test exposure even on a poorlycalibrated DMR unit.
A tiny variation in speed or exposure time can produce a big variation in the grid lines visibil-
ity. Several exposures, even several patient exams may be required to confirm that the grid line
problem in a system has been significantly reduced after any change in the system .
3177
REV 3 sm 2308530100
TEST FOR ABSENCE OF GRID LINES ON

EXPOSED FILM Job Card IST 031 2 of 4
Different people, whether customers or Service Engineers, have very different visual percep-
tions of grid lines.
When the fault is not very pronounced, it is usually not present over the entire film, but only in
certain areas (at the edge of the film, as follows):
The following display conditions are essential for grid line observation:
Viewer light intensity must be high and uniform,
JOB CARDS
Use of masks around the image to be observed is recommended,

A magnifying glass sometimes helps to detect the fault,
The fault shows up better when the optical density of the film is not too high (OD net < 1.2).
5.1.1 The photo cell must be in its most forward position (towards the patient) throughout the procedures
in this Job Card.
5.1.2 When placing Plexiglass on the cassette holder, the Plexiglass must always overlap the front edge
(towards the patient) by about 1 cm to insure that the photo cell is fully covered.
5.2 Perform the test for absence of grid lines on exposed film.
5.2.1 Set up the Senographe DMR in contact mode with the 18 x 24 mm bucky, grid and compression
paddle installed.
5.2.2 Place 1 cm of plexiglass on the bucky.

Mode: See table 1
Screen Pair: Choose the screen pair name that corresponds to the film and cassette being
used for the test
Focal spot: See table
Track: See table
Filter: See table
25 kV (initial value)
Format: maximum aperture of collimator
3178
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Focal distance (SID): 660 mm, or SID commonly used by customer,

Craniocaudal projection (examination arm in vertical position) or, where appropriate,
the projection at which the customer most often sees the grid.
5.2.4 Enable visual display of parameter values when in application mode. See Visual Display of Param-
eter Values in chapter 1.
5.2.5 Load the cassette with a fresh undeveloped film that corresponds to the screen pair being used for
the test and install it in the bucky.
5.2.6 Take exposure N1 as described in Table 1.

TABLE 1
GRID LINE TEST EXPOSURES
N Mode Track Filter Plexiglass KV mAs Expo- Comments
JOB CARDS
thickness sure
(mm) time
(ms)
1 AEC MO MO 15 25
2 AOPCNT 15
3 AOPCNT 25
4 AOPCNT 35
5.2.7 Note the exposure time as displayed on the console display. If it is within the range 0.200 to 0.300
S, develop the film and proceed directly to step 5.2.10. If it is above (below) this range, increase
(decrease) the HV by 1 kV and repeat the exposure using the same undeveloped film in the cassette.
Continue increasing or decreasing the HV by 1 kV until a satisfactory exposure time is reached, then
proceed to the next step.
Note: For an unusually slow film (i.e. if the exposure time is still greater than 300 mS at 30 kV), remove
the Plexiglass from the bucky and continue the search for a satisfactory exposure time.
Note: For an unusually fast film (i.e. if the exposure time is still less than 200 mS at 22 kV), increase
the amount of Plexiglass on the bucky to 2 cm and continue the search for a satisfactory exposure
time.
5.2.8 Reload the cassette with a fresh undeveloped film that corresponds to the screen pair being used
for the test and install it in the cassette holder.
5.2.9 Keeping the same HV value as determined above, take an exposure and develop the film.
5.2.10 Perform test exposures N2 and develop film
5.2.11 Perform test exposures N3 and develop film
5.2.12 Perform test exposures N4 and develop film .
3179
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.2.13 If the Senographe DMR being installed is equipped with the 24 x 30 mm bucky/grid option, per-
form an exposure in the conditions of Exposure N4 (step 5.2.12) using 24X30 option.
5.2.14 Study the developed films on a light screen with the jewelers loop. Verify that there are no signs
of grid lines anywhere on the exposed area of the film. Visible grid lines indicate a problem in the
grid drive train or defective offsets and gain settings. If there are visible grid lines, proceed to steps
5.2.15 to 5.2.16.
5.2.15 Recalibrate gain and offset following the bucky trouble shooting Job Card.
5.2.16 Check also there are any sticky or rough points by moving the grid by hand back and forth across
its full range of movement.
5.2.17 If you are turning the machine back over to the user at this point, switch the Senographe DMR
off, then back on again.
JOB CARDS
3180
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF SIDE Version No.:

COVERS AND PANELS Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Metric Allen wrenches
D Large flat screwdriver
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
SECTION 5
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF SIDE COVERS AND TRIM PANELS
This section is divided into two subsections, one for removal and replacement of generator side covers and
trim panels, and one for removal and replacement of gantry side covers and trim panels.
5.1 Remove/replace generator side covers and trim panels (see illustration 1).
5.1.1 Remove all power from the Senographe DMR by turning off the wallmounted circuit breaker.
5.1.2 Remove the four plastic plugs from screws of generator top panel.
5.1.3 Use an Allen wrench to remove the four generator top panel retaining screws (5).
5.1.4 Remove generator top panel by lifting upwards.
3181
REV 3 sm 2308530100
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF SIDE

COVERS AND PANELS Job Card IST 032 2 of 4
5.1.5 For EACH of the four generator side panels:
1. Slightly lift the panel upwards and towards yourself.
2. Disconnect the ground wire FROM THE GENERATOR END to avoid RISK OF CREATING
SHORT CIRCUITS.
5.1.6 Perform the procedure in reverse order for replacement. BE SURE TO RECONNECT THE
GROUND WIRE ON EACH OF THE FOUR SIDE PANELS.
5.2 Remove/replace gantry side covers and trim panels (see illustration 1).
5.2.2 Use the screwdriver to remove screw (1).

JOB CARDS
5.2.3 Remove plastic plugs and screws (2) and (3) from each column halfcover.
5.2.4 Do not touch screws (4). Undo hex bolt (6) by 2 or 3 turns (accessible through a slot at rear of the
base).
(this method keeps alignment of covers with safety stop switches).
5.2.5 Slide complete halfcover towards you to remove it.
5.2.6 Perform the procedure in reverse order for replacement. BE CAREFUL NOT TO PINCH OR
DAMAGE CABLES.
Note: It is possible to remove only one column halfcover.
3182
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 1
SCREW LOCATIONS FOR REMOVING/REPLACING SIDE COVERS AND TRIM PANELS
JOB CARDS
2
5
CPU AND OTHER

BOARDS ACCESSIBLE
FROM THIS SIDE
1
4
6
3183
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3184
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: PRELIMINARY GENERATOR AND GANTRY Version No.:

TESTING Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Digital mAs meter (GSPONER type) able to display tube current
D Compression measurement tool: GAMMEX RMI model 817 or Mammo compression scale
JOB CARDS
# 46194427P407 (digital display)
D Plexiglass in thickness increments of 0.5 cm
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
3185
REV 3 sm 2308530100
PRELIMINARY GENERATOR AND GANTRY

TESTING Job Card IST 033 2 of 6
SECTION 5
GENERATOR TESTING
The objective is to check quickly the generator kV, mA and mAs calibrations, which have already been done
in the factory. At the same time, these procedures will warm up the Xray tube slightly in preparation for the
AEC calibration.
5.1 Set up generator for testing.
5.1.1 Configure the Senographe DMR for the following exposure:

Mode manual (2point)
Focal spot: large
Track: Mo
Filter: Mo
JOB CARDS
mAs: 60 (lower mAs value may give inaccurate measurements)

HV: 22 kV
4 cm of plexiglass in the XRay field for protecting the photocell.
5.1.2 Activate display of parameters following an exposure by selecting SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/

GENE/CONFIG/DISP/YES on the console (see chapter 1 section 3102). Return to applica-
tion mode.
5.1.3 Connect the digital mAs meter to kV mA board 701PL1 (on HV tank unit 701) between terminals
MES_MA_POS and MES_MA_NEG. Disconnect the jumper that is normally between these same
two terminals.
5.1.4 Set the mAs meter to current (mA) measurement.
5.1.5 Take 5 exposures at approximately 20 second intervals, incrementing the HV by 2 kV each time
(i.e. 22 24 26 28 30 kV).
5.1.6 Take 5 more exposures at the same interval, leaving the HV set at 30 kV.
5.1.7 The Xray tube current value displayed on the console (Idisplay) must be 100 mA 5 mA AND in
agreement with the value read on the mAs meter (Imeasure) 5% (this value is available both for
GS412 and Maxiray 70THF tubes).
IF Idisplay Imeasure then perform Job Card IST 016 CALIBRATION OF XRAY TUBE MA
MEASUREMENT followed by Job Card IST 003 CALIBRATION OF XRAY TUBE
HEATER CURRENT.
5.1.8 Take 2 exposures at 40 kV and 50 mAs at an interval of 30 seconds. No arcing should be detected.
If arcing is detected, perform IST 020 AUTOMATIC XRAY TUBE WARMUP.
3186
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.1.9 Reconfigure the Senographe DMR to 30 kV and 60 mAs. Take one exposure for each of the three
following focal spot/track combinations and verify the expected Xray tube current reading on the
console display:
The values below apply for tube Maxiray 70THF
SMALL FOCAL SPOT/MO TRACK => I = 40 mA 2 mA
SMALL FOCAL SPOT/RH TRACK => I = 35 mA 2 mA
LARGE FOCAL SPOT/RH TRACK => I = 62 mA 4 mA
The values below apply for tube GS412

SMALL FOCAL SPOT/MO TRACK => I = 40 mA 2 mA
SMALL FOCAL SPOT/RH TRACK => I = 40 mA 2 mA
LARGE FOCAL SPOT/RH TRACK => I = 75 mA 4 mA
JOB CARDS
5.1.10 Disconnect the mAs meter from the Senographe DMR and reconnect the jumper on kV mA board
701PL1.
5.1.11 Verify kVp using a noninvasive kVp meter, and if needed, recalibrate kVp with IST 017 (this step
may be necessary, due to local regulation)
SECTION 6
GANTRY TESTING
The objective is to check quickly the basic functions of the gantry.
Note that the following functions are tested by the software during each powerup sequence:
D Filter holder rotation
D Lateral, front and rear collimator blade movement
D Xray tube housing movement
D Compression paddle movement to home position
D Column movement limit stops
D Coherency between focal spot size, magnification and Xray tube housing angulation
D Grid movement
D Generatorgantry communications link
D Gantry CPU board
3187
REV 3 sm 2308530100

6.1 Check gantry readout.

Immediately following the powerup sequence, the gantry readout should indicate the Xray format and
magnification factor only; the breast thickness and compression force readouts should be disabled.
In fact the gantry readout displays the size of the actual XRay field taking into account the margins set up.
Note: XRay format readout displays the actual Xray field depending on margins settings configured
in steering guide section 14.v.
6.2 Check column movement.
6.2.1 With the compression paddle out of compression, check that all five column up/down control
buttons are operational (check each button for up and down movement of column).
6.2.2 Move column to its upper and lower limits. Optical sensors should stop movement. If optical sen-
sors have failed, mechanical safety stops halt movement. Total oneway movement time
JOB CARDS
(going either up or down) between upper and lower limits should be 16 2 seconds. This time
includes initial acceleration which lasts 3 seconds.
6.3 Check arm rotation.
6.3.1 With the compression paddle out of compression, check that all four arm rotation control buttons
are operational (check each button for release and relocking of arm rotation).
6.3.2 Rotate arm through its full range of 180. Check that electrobrake is sufficient by manual action
on the handles.
6.3.3 Check alignment of angle markings at 0.
6.4 Check light centering device.
6.4.1 Press one of the light centering device activation buttons. The light centering device should light
for 30 seconds for large formats (eg: 18x24, 24x30). The light centering device should light for
120 seconds for medium and small formats.
6.5 Check format control.

Check that each of the two format control pushbuttons, when pressed repeatedly, result in the sequence: 1)
light centering device lights; 2) first format reduction; 3) second format reduction; 4) full format.
6.6 Check magnification sensors.
6.6.1 Set SID to 660 mm.
6.6.2 With magnification device removed, the gantry readout should show a magnification of 1.0.
6.6.3 Install the magnification device into the lower, middle and upper holes successively. The gantry
readout should show a magnification of 1.5, 1.8 and 1.9, respectively.
6.6.4 Leaving the magnification device in the upper holes, change the SID to 610, 560 and 510 mm
successively. The gantry readout should show a magnification of 1.7, 1.6 and 1.5, respectively.
3188
REV 3 sm 2308530100

6.7 Check tube housing arm detents.
6.7.1 With Stereotix 2 NOT installed, activate the tube housing arm locking lever and rotate the tube
housing arm to its 15 and 27 detents. When tube housing arm is locked in each of these four
positions, the error message Incorrect X_Ray Incidence should appear on the console display.
6.7.2 Rotate the tube housing arm so that it is floating between detents. After five seconds, the error
message Tube Housing Arm Unlocked should appear on the console display and Arm
Unlocked should appear on the gantry readout.
6.8 Check paddle compression.
6.8.1 Verify that both sets of compression/decompression pedals and the manual compression knobs
located on the paddle holder all function correctly (i.e. the paddle goes up and down in response
to each command).
JOB CARDS
6.8.2 Use the mammo compression scale placed between the cassette holder and the compression paddle
to check calibration of the compression force display on the gantry readout. Measure one point at
5 daN and one point at 15 daN. The value on the gantry readout must agree within 1 daN. If it does
not, perform IST 023 CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION FORCE DETECTOR.
Note: If the recommended compression measurement tool is not available, this verification can be done
by setting SID to 660 mm, lowering the paddle close to the top surface of the cassette holder, instal-
ling the magnification device in the upper pair of holes, and connecting a spring dynamometer
(calibrated from 0 to 15 kg) between the compression paddle and the magnification device.
6.9 Check breast thickness measurement.
6.9.1 Set SID to 660 mm, install the 18x24 bucky and place 10 mm of plexiglass in the center of the bucky.
6.9.3 Slowly increase compression force on the plexiglass while watching the breast thickness display
on the gantry readout. The displayed value should remain in the range 10 mm 3 mm for any value
of compression force (as displayed on the gantry readout) between 5 and 15 kg.
6.9.4 Replace 10 mm of plexiglass with 50 mm of plexiglass and repeat the above check. Now the dis-
played value should remain in the range 50 mm 3 mm for any value of compression force
(as displayed on the gantry readout) between 5 and 15 kg.
6.9.5 If either or both of the above checks does not give a satisfactory result, perform Job Card IST 025
CALIBRATION OF BREAST THICKNESS MEASUREMENT.
3189
REV 3 sm 2308530100

6.10 Check cassette size sensor.

With the bucky removed, activate the light centering device, then install the 24x30 bucky. The format size
should increase, as indicated by the size of the field illuminated by the light centering device.
6.11 Check grid presence sensor.
6.11.1 With the bucky installed, press the 1st trigger button on the console. There should be grid
movement.
6.12 Check emergency stop buttons.

Pressing either of the emergency stop buttons (located on either side of the gantry column base) should result
in a complete powerdown of both the generator and gantry.
JOB CARDS
3190
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CHECKING SAFELIGHTING AND FILM Version No.:

PROCESSING Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D Supply of undeveloped film of type used by the customer
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Sensitometer
JOB CARDS
D Densitometer
D Opaque sheet
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
SECTION 5
CHECKING FILM PROCESSING
The objective is to check the lighttightness of the darkroom, the influence of the safelighting and correct
operation of the automatic film processor.
5.1 Check darkroom lighttightness and influence of safelighting.
5.1.1 Enter the darkroom and load a cassette with the film currently used for clinical purposes, taking care
to protect it from possible fogging from the darkroom safe light or leakage.
Note 1 : The emulsion side of the film must be positioned facing the screen side of the cassette (away from
the tube)
Note 2 : For Kodak OrthoMA film, the emultion side is underneath when the notch is top left.
5.1.2 In 2point mode, (HV: 28 kV, mAs=70, 4 cm of plexiglas) expose the cassette to the xrays in such
a way as to obtain a film with an optical density of between 0.8 and 1.4 (change mAs as necessary
and repeat exposure with a fresh film).
3191
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHECKING SAFELIGHTING AND FILM

PROCESSING Job Card IST 034 2 of 4
5.1.3 Reload the cassette and make an exposure using the same factors; do not develop the film.
5.1.4 Unload the cassette in the darkroom and place the film on the work surface, emulsion side upwards
and completely covered by an opaque sheet.
Note: for KODAK ORTHOMA films, the emulsion side is uppermost when the notch is top right.
5.1.5 Prepare the second opaque sheet on the work surface, on the left.
5.1.6 Move the opaque sheet covering the film to the right, uncovering half the film (see illustration 2)
and simultaneously activate the timer.
5.1.7 If this is the first maintenance inspection (reference test) proceed to the next step (5.1.8).
If this is a periodic maintenance check, go to step (5.1.11).
5.1.8 After 15 seconds, cover about a quarter of the bottom lefthand part of the film with the second
JOB CARDS
opaque sheet (see illustration 2, 1st area).
5.1.9 After 30 seconds, move the second opaque sheet upwards in such a way as to cover about half of
the lefthand part of the film (2nd area).
5.1.10 After one minute, move the second opaque sheet upwards to cover about three quarters of the left-
hand part of the film (3rd area).
5.1.11 After 2 minutes, cover the film completely with the first opaque sheet.
Note 1 : if the film is to be handled in the darkroom for long periods (more than one minute), it should be
tested in 5 positions and left for 2 extra minutes in the last position.
Note 2 : if this is a periodic maintenance check, one exposure of the film (of 2 to 4 minutes according to
requirements) will be sufficient.
5.1.12 Develop the film, protecting it with the opaque sheet until it is inserted in the automatic processor.
5.1.13 Write the following data on the developed film :

date and time
place
5.1.14 Look for the first area on the film in which the frame line is visible (see illustration 2) and note down
the time corresponding to the area concerned on the film.
5.1.15 Interpreting the results

The time obtained, corresponding to the first visible area, should not be less than 2 minutes.
Note: the laboratory safety time, defined as half the period of time corresponding to the first visible
area, should also be at least one minute.
3192
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.1.16 Decisions
1. If the time corresponding to the first visible area is greater than 2 minutes, go on to the next pro-
cedure.
2. If the time is less than 2 minutes, check that:

the safelighting complies with requirements
there us no visible light leak (door, ceiling, floor, pipe ducts, etc.)
Inform the user of these problems and take the necessary steps to obtain correct results in subse-
quent tests.
3. If the time is less than 1 minute, priority must be given to solving the problem to enable the tests
to continue.
ILLUSTRATION 2
JOB CARDS
2 minutes 4th area
1 minute 3rd area
30 seconds 2nd area
15 seconds 1st area
Frame line
5.1.17 Use the densitometer to measure the relative optical density on both parts of the film.
CRITERION 1: Any difference between the relative optical densities measured must be less
than 0.1.
CRITERION 2: Neither optical density measured must exceed 0.2 (except for certain fast films).
3193
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.1.18 If either or both of the above two criteria are not met:
1. Check the lighttightness of the darkroom by repeating sections 5.1.1 to 5.1.17 with the safe-
light turned OFF.
2. Check the safelight itself.
5.2 Check automatic film processor.
5.2.1 Perform a sensitometry test on the type of film being used by the customer.
Note: Be sure that the sensitometer is in the green position.
5.2.2 Develop the film.
5.2.3 Calibrate the densitometer to zero on step 1 on the sensitometric strip.

JOB CARDS
5.2.4 Use the densitometer to find the first step whose relative optical density is greater than or equal to
1. Let N be the step found and D(N) its relative optical density.
5.2.5 Measure the relative optical density for step (N+2). Let this measured value be D(N+2).
5.2.6 Calculate the film gamma:

Gamma = D(N+2) D(N)
0.3
CRITERION: Check that the gamma calculated corresponds to that given by the film manufacturer
within a tolerance of 0.35 (e.g. gamma 3.2 for Kodak OrthoMa film).
Example: suppose D(N) = 1.12 and D(N+2) = 2.29:

then Gamma = 2.29 1.12
0.3
Note: A gamma value less that 3.0 cannot produce a good image quality in mammography.
5.2.7 If the above criterion is not met, check the automatic film processor (temperature, cleanliness,
change in chemicals, etc.).
3194
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: REPLACEMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE Version No.:

LAMP Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D New centering device lamp (only genuine part number 2188568 must be used, to ensure correct light
intensity, easy filament centering and reliability).
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Standard screwdrivers, openend wrenches, etc.
JOB CARDS
D Ruler calibrated in mm
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
SECTION 5
REPLACEMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE LAMP
The objective is to replace the centering device lamp and set it to the correct vertical height.
5.1 Remove old lamp.
5.1.1 Turn the Senographe DMR off.
5.1.2 Remove the two halfcovers from the gantry head.
5.1.3 Remove the antiscatter box (2 parts); first remove the side part then loosen slightly the attachment
screw (at center underside) of the box and remove the antiscatter box by pulling it gently forward.
5.1.4 Remove collimator assembly retaining pins by first removing the 2 cotter pins from one end of each
retaining pin. Pivot the collimator assembly downwards.
3195
REV 3 sm 2308530100
REPLACEMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE

LAMP Job Card IST 035 2 of 4
5.1.5 Loosen slightly the two attachment screws on the light box and remove the light box by pulling it
gently forward.
CAUTION Wait for the lamp to cool down before removing.
5.1.6 Remove the old lamp by pulling firmly but gently downwards.
5.2 Install and position new lamp.
Note: When handling the new lamp, be sure not to touch the glass surface with your fingers. Always use
a clean dry cloth or paper handkerchief.
5.2.1 Insert the leads of the new lamp into its socket SLOWLY, and PUSH THEM IN ALL THE WAY.
JOB CARDS
Note: The distance of 30 mm between filament center and pin end is guaranteed by the lamp manufac-
turer, see Illustration 1.
5.2.2 Reinstall the light box without tighten its attachment screews.
CAUTION The light box is for protection in case any explosion of the new lamp being
installed occurs.
5.2.3 Turn on the Senographe DMR and verify that the new lamp lights when activated, then turn the
Senographe DMR off again.
5.2.4 Tighten the two attachment screws of the light box..
5.2.5 Check that the CENTER of the filament is aligned with the CENTER of the small slot in the light
box when your eye is at the level of the small slot (see illustration 1). If not, start 5.2 again.
5.2.6 Pivot the collimator assembly back up and reinstall its retaining pins and cotter pins.
5.2.7 Proceed directly to Job Card IST 036 CENTERING DEVICE LAMP ADJUSTMENT, leaving
antiscatter box and gantry head halfcovers removed.
3196
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 1
CORRECT LAMP FILAMENT HEIGHT
VISUAL INSPECTION:
30 0.5 mm CHECK THAT CENTER OF
FILAMENT IS ALIGNED
JOB CARDS
WITH CENTER OF LIGHT
BOX SLOT.
FILAMENT LIGHT BOX
3197
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3198
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: ADJUSTMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE Version No.:

LAMP Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Standard screwdrivers, openend wrenches, etc.
D Ruler calibrated in mm
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Card IST 035 REPLACEMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE LAMP (protection box and gantry
head halfcovers are still removed)
SECTION 5
ADJUSTMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE LAMP
The objective is to adjust the position of the centering device lamp (in all three dimensions, if necessary) so
that the lit field coincides, within acceptable tolerances, with the exposed Xray field. This is done by first
exposing a film and then illuminating it on the image receptor support to check the coincidence of the lit field
with the exposed area on the Xray film. The following properties of this coincidence are measured and
adjusted, if necessary, in the following order:
Lateral centering
Field width coincidence
Field depth coincidence
Field front light alignment
Note: Field width, depth and front can be finetuned using procedure detailed in IST 028.
3199
REV 3 sm 2308530100


Bucky 18 x 24 installed (mandatory).
SID = 560 mm
5.1.2 Reset light alignment and light coverage values to zero.

Starting from application mode, select:
SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/FORMAT/CALIB/LIGHT/ALIGN
Use + & keys or rotate console kV button to return the displayed ALIGN value to zero.
Select SETUP/COVERAGE
JOB CARDS
Use + & keys or rotate console kV button to return the displayed COVERAGE value to zero.
5.1.3 Take a new cardboard cassette or Ready Pack and insert three thumb tacks through it, FROM THE
SIDE THAT WILL FACE THE XRAY TUBE, in the following way:
Two thumb tacks inserted along the (long) edge of the film that will be at the front edge
of the image receptor support, at approximately 2 cm in from this edge and approxi-
mately 4 cm inwards from the two shorter edges
The third thumb tack along the (short) edge of the film that will be on the left side of
the image receptor support, approximately 2 cm in from this edge and approximately
12 cm from the rear edge of the film.
Refer to illustration 1 below.
3200
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 1
APPROX 12 CM
READY PACK
TUBE SIDE
JOB CARDS
APPROX 2 CM
APPROX 4 CM
APPROX 4 CM
APPROX 2 CM
APPROX 2 CM
Note: It is NOT important to insert the three thumb tacks in a perfectly squared alignment with the
edges of the Ready Pack.
5.1.4 Place the Ready Pack on the image receptor support so that the points of the two front thumb tacks
butt perfectly up against the front edge of the image receptor support and the third thumb tack butts
perfectly up against the left edge of the image receptor support. THE POSITIONING OF THE
THREE THUMB TACKS AGAINST THE IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT IS VERY IMPOR-
TANT TO THE SUCCESS OF THESE CHECKS.
3201
REV 3 sm 2308530100

18 x 24 format (collimator blades fully open)
Mo track
Mo filter
Large focal spot
25 kV
50 mAs

JOB CARDS
5.3 Check and adjust, if necessary, lateral centering.
Note: It is advisable to turn off all room lighting before proceeding to the following steps.
5.3.1 Replace the three thumb tacks in the holes in the developed film.
5.3.2 Place the developed film back onto the image receptor support, with the same orientation as during
the exposure. Carefully align the thumb tacks against the edges of the image receptor support,
exactly as during the exposure.
5.3.3 Keeping the same format size as during the exposure, turn on the light centering device lamp.
5.3.4 Study the relationship between the lit zone from the light centering device and the darkened area
on the film.
5.3.5 Determine if the two areas are centered laterally (illustration 4 shows correct lateral centering).
Note: The lit zone may be wider or narrower than the darkened area on the film at this point.
Illustration 4 shows the lit zone wider than the darkened area on the film.
5.3.6 If the two areas are not centered laterally, turn adjustment screw 1 (see illustration 3) until the lit
zone is centered laterally with the darkened area on the film.
5.4 Check and adjust, if necessary, field width coincidence.
5.4.1 Keep the film aligned on the image receptor support as above.
5.4.2 If the lit zone is wider (narrower) than the darkened area on the film, reduce (increase) the width
of the lit zone by turning knurled nut 2 in the positive (negative) direction (see illustration 3).
Illustration 5 shows correct field width coincidence.
3202
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.5 Check and adjust, if necessary, field depth coincidence.
5.5.1 Keep the film aligned on the image receptor support as above.
5.5.2 If the rear edge of the lit zone is not aligned with the rear edge of the darkened area on the film, turn
adjustment screw 3 (see illustration 3) until alignment is achieved. Illustration 6 shows correct field
depth coincidence.
Note: The only mecanical adjustment for alignment of the front edge of the let zone is by adjusting the
mirror.
D Adjust the angle of the mirror with the angle adjustment screw (see illustration 2 ) in order to align the
front blade with the darkered area on the film.
Tilt the mirror slightly otherwise a major adjustement may distort the light
JOB CARDS
CAUTION field.
ILLUSTRATION 2
TUBE HOUSING ARM WITH MIRROR INSTALLATION DETAIL
MIRROR FRAME
TUBE HOUSING ARM
MIRROR MOUNTING SCREWS

AND LOCKNUTS
MIRROR ANGLE ADJUSTMENT SCREW

AND SPRING
3203
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.5.3 Reinstall protection box and tighten its attachment screw.
5.5.4 Reinstall the two halfcovers from the gantry head.
5.5.5 Perform (or return) to job card IST 028.

ILLUSTRATION 3
CENTERING DEVICE LAMP POSITION ADJUSTMENTS
(INCREASE LATERAL WIDTH)

LIGHT BOX

JOB CARDS
1
(LATERAL CENTERING ADJUSTMENT)
3
(REAR BLADE ADJUSTMENT)
3204
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 4
CORRECT LATERAL ALIGNMENT OF ZONE LIT BY LIGHT CENTERING DEVICE WITH EXPOSED AREA OF XRAY FILM
DEVELOPED READY PACK FILM IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT ZONE LIT BY LIGHT
CENTERING DEVICE
JOB CARDS
LATERAL CENTERING IS
ACHIEVED WHEN THESE
TWO DISTANCES ARE EQUAL
EXPOSED AREA OF FILM

3205
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 5
WIDTH COINCIDENCE BETWEEN ZONE LIT BY LIGHT CENTERING DEVICE AND EXPOSED AREA OF XRAY FILM
CENTERING DEVICE
JOB CARDS

3206
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 6
DEPTH COINCIDENCE BETWEEN ZONE LIT BY LIGHT CENTERING DEVICE AND EXPOSED AREA OF XRAY FILM
CENTERING DEVICE
JOB CARDS
DEPTH COINCIDENCE IS ACHIEVED
WHEN REAR EDGE OF LIT AREA IS
ALIGNED WITH REAR EDGE OF
DARKENED AREA ON FILM

3207
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3208
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: JUMPERS AND SWITCHES Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
None
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
SECTION 5
JUMPERS AND SWITCHES
The objective is to verify the position of jumpers and switches. Jumpers and switches are divided into three
groups: generator, gantry and console.
5.1 Generator jumpers and switches.
5.1.1 Check (visually, do not remove it!) that the jumper on generator CPU board 400PL3 is installed in
position X2.
See illustration 2.
This jumper must NEVER be removed from position X2 and must NEVER
CAUTION be placed in position TP1. If you find this jumper either removed or placed
in position TP1, the generator CPU RAMs are totally erased, necessitating
a TOTAL RECALIBRATION of the generator and AEC.
5.1.2 Check that the jumpers JP1 and JP2 are installed on generator command board 400PL1 (they must
NOT be in parking position JP3 and JP4 at this point). See illustration 1.
Note: JP1 and JP2 are in relation with room relays on 200PL4. See Job card IST042 Room lights wir-
ing for details.
3209
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 1
JOB CARDS
5.2 Gantry jumpers and switches.
5.2.1 Check (visually, do not remove it!) that the jumper on gantry CPU board 800PL3 is installed in posi-
tion X2. See illustration 2.
This jumper must NEVER be removed from position X2 and must NEVER
CAUTION be placed in position TP1. If you find this jumper either removed or placed
in position TP1, the gantry CPU RAMs are totally erased, necessitating a
TOTAL RECALIBRATION of the gantry.
ILLUSTRATION 2
POSITION OF JUMPER ON GENERATOR CPU BOARD 400PL3 AND GANTRY CPU BOARD 800PL3
GENE CPU BOARD 400PL3 or

GANTRY CPU BOARD 800PL3
B46
B41
BT1
! !
X2
P1 P2
3210
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.2.2 Check that the jumpers JP1 is installed on gantry photocell board 800PL4. See Illustration 3
ILLUSTRATION 3
PHOTOCELL BOARD JUMPER LOCATION
JOB CARDS
5.3 Console selftest activation switch.
5.3.1 Check that console selftest activation switch 100 S1 is in its application position. See
illustration 4.
Note: When this switch is in its unused position, the console display stays blank and beeps at
1second intervals after power on is pressed.
ILLUSTRATION 4
CONSOLE SELFTEST ACTIVATION SWITCH 100 S1
SENOGRAPHE DMR CONSOLE SIDE VIEW
CONSOLE AUTOTEST POSITION
100PL2 XJ3
APPLICATION POSITION UNUSED POSITION
100PL2 XJ5
100 S1
CONSOLE SELFTEST ACTIVATION
SWITCH 100 S1 (LOCATED NEXT TO
CONSOLE CABLE CONNECTOR 100 XJ3)
3211
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3212
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: REGULATORY AND SAFETY LABELLING Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
None
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The attachment of appropriate regulatory and safety labelling to the

CAUTION equipment is a LEGAL REQUIREMENT for operation of an Xray
producing unit.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
3213
REV 3 sm 2308530100
REGULATORY AND SAFETY LABELLING

SECTION 5
REGULATORY PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION LABELLING ON GANTRY AND GENERATOR
The objective is to attach regulatory product identification labelling in the local national language to the gantry
and generator of the Senographe DMR. This is done by affixing specific national language labelling over the
existing labelling in English.
Note: If the national language is English, skip this section and proceed to the next section.
To attach product identification labelling in the local national language to the gantry and generator of the
Senographe DMR, proceed as follows:
1. Locate the three small plastic bags containing labelling in different languages inside the emergency
maintenance kit.
2. From each of the three plastic bags, select the label in the local national language. Two of the labels are
identical to each other and smaller than the third label.
JOB CARDS
3. Locate the product identification label at the bottom of the gantry column and affix one of the smaller
national language labels over the corresponding English text.
4. Locate the two product identification labels at the bottom of the generator cabinet.
5. Affix the remaining smaller national language label over the corresponding English text.
6. Affix the larger national language label over the corresponding English text.
3214
REV 3 sm 2308530100

SECTION 6
SAFETY LABELLING
The objective is to select and attach appropriate safety labels to the Senographe DMR, according to local safety
regulations concerning the use of Xray producing equipment.
6.1 Locate the envelope (which is taped underneath the console) containing the 3 possible safety labels and select
the one that corresponds to local regulations (see illustration 1 below).
ILLUSTRATION 1
SAFETY LABELS
CEI (EUROPE) & ASIA
JOB CARDS
REDAC (CANADA)
CDRH (USA)
Note: The CDRH (USA) safety label is already affixed on the console.
3215
REV 3 sm 2308530100

6.2 Peel off the selfadhesive backing from the selected safety label, and stick the label over the CDRH (USA) label
in the lower righthand corner of the console (see illustration 2 below).
ILLUSTRATION 2
PLACEMENT OF SAFETY LABEL ON CONSOLE
JOB CARDS
STICK LABEL HERE
3216
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Note: Section 6.3 and 6.4 for US only
6.3 In the envelope get the following label (See Illustration 3).
ILLUSTRATION 3
US LABEL
CAUTION: Patient contact surfaces should be cleaned and disinfected between patients
6.4 Peel off the selfadhesive backing from the label, and affix the label centering in the upper part of the console.
(See Illustration 4).
JOB CARDS
3217
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 4
PLACEMENT OF US LABEL ON CONSOLE
STICK LABEL HERE
JOB CARDS
3218
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: MANUAL DETERMINATION OF AOP Version No.:

STRATEGY FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D Normal cassette of type used in the screen pair being calibrated
D Film of type used in the screen pair being calibrated
JOB CARDS
SECTION 2
TOOLS
None
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
Generator calibration must be successfully completed for the screen pair in question before this Job Card is
performed.
Note: The AOP strategy parameter is determined automatically at the end of IST013 or IST014 refer-
ence energy calibration. So the manual setting of the AOP strategy (IST039) is no longer neces-
sary.
However, if there are several senographe DMR installed on the same site, it may be necessary to
equalize all the strategies to the same value, to avoid unjustified mAs deviation between identi-
cal senographes. For this purpose only, it is still possible to read/set the strategy value.
This equalization must only be done if the DMRs are using the same film/screen couple, same film
processor, same SID.
3219
REV 3 sm 2308530100
MANUAL DETERMINATION OF AOP STRA-

TEGY FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 039 2 of 4
SECTION 5
DETERMINE AOP STRATEGY
This Job Card provides the procedure for determining the AOP strategy parameter for a given screen pair. This
is done by taking a reference Xray exposure in 1point mode and choosing the AOP strategy parameter
according to the resulting mAs from the exposure.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BE OBSERVED DURING ALL PROCEDURES GIVEN BELOW IN
THIS SECTION:
this Job Card.
D When placing plexiglass on the cassette holder, the plexiglass must always overlap the front edge
(towards the patient) by about 1 cm to insure that the photo cell is fully covered.
5.1 Set up for and take the exposure.

JOB CARDS

Bucky 18 x 24 in place (with grid)
4 cm plexiglass on the bucky
SID : as per customers choice
AEC mode (1point)
HV : 28 kV
Track: Mo
Filter: Mo
Focal spot: LARGE
993
5.1.2 Load cassette with undeveloped film into cassette holder and take an exposure. Note down the
resulting mAs.
5.1.3 Determine AOP strategy parameter value according to the resulting mAs value:
mAs < 30 => strategy = SUPER FAST
30 < mAs < 50 => strategy = VERY FAST
50 < mAs < 70 => strategy = FAST
70 < mAs < 100 => strategy = MEDIUM
100 < mAs < 150 => strategy = SLOW
mAs > 150 => strategy = VERY SLOW
3220
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.2 Enter the AOP strategy parameter value into the Senographe DMR.
B1 on generator CPU board 400PL3, see Accessing the Generator or Gantry Installation Mode
from the Console in chapter 1).

FSC=x/STRAT on the console, where x is the screen pair indicator (A,B,C,D, or E) correspond-
ing to one of the 5 possible screen pairs to be calibrated.
5.2.3 Select the AOP strategy as determined above (SUPER FAST, VERY FAST, FAST, MEDIUM,
SLOW, or VERY SLOW) on the console.
JOB CARDS
5.2.5 If you are turning the machine back over to the user at this point, switch the Senographe DMR off,
then on again.
5.3 Changing AOP Strategy of Senographe DMR.

In AOP mode, and following the calibration of a new Screen/Film targets combination, the resulting dose or
mAs value can be too high for a reference exposure on a calibrated equipment.
The origin of Dose value increase is the Track/Kv parameters combination choosen by AOP algorithm which
is optimized to get the best image quality compromise in AOPCNT mode according to the film sensitivity
index.
Note: High contrast films are used with fast strategy.
The dose value can be reduced following the two methods:

1) Either by changing the technique used by the radiologist, i.e. using a different AOP mode as :
From AOPCNT (contrast) to AOPSTD (standard),
Or from AOPSTD to AOP DOSE.
2) Or by reducing the dynamic range of the image by increasing the kV value. It is obtained if you modify the
strategy of film exposure; reducing its speed corresponds to an increase of the kV value:
Access to menu /AOP/FSCx/ and set strategy to the immediat lower speed.
Changing the strategy will reduce image quality. It may be done only with the
CAUTION physician agreement.
3221
REV 3 sm 2308530100

JOB CARDS
3222
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: SETTING OF ELEVATOR UPPER TRAVEL Version No.:

LIMIT Date:
Time: Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Screwdriver 4 mm.
D Allen wrench 2.5 mm.
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D No specific safety precautions are applicable.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None.
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
D Measure room overall height, floor to ceiling.
D Remove left cover from column housing (see IST032).
5.1 Determine optical sensor position (see Illustration1 )

The position of the optical sensor is determined as follows :
1. Ceiling height 2.5m (8.22ft.) or greater :
Install the optical sensor in the upper mounting hole (1 in Illust.1 ).
Note: The Senographe DMR is delivered with the optical sensor is installed in this position.
2. Ceiling height 2.4m (7.9ft.) or greater, but less than 2.5m (8.22ft.) :
Install the optical sensor in the middle mounting hole (2 in Illust.1 ).
3223
REV 3 sm 2308530100
SETTING OF ELEVATOR UPPER TRAVEL

LIMIT Job Card IST 040 2 of 4
3. Ceiling height 2.3m (7.5ft.) or greater, but less than 2.4m (7.9ft.) :
Install the optical sensor in the lower mounting hole (3 in Illust. 1).
4. Ceiling height less than 2.3m (7.5ft.) :
The Senographe DMR cannot be installed without special modification.
Note: The adjustment of the metal plate which blanks off the upper and lower sensors only affects the
elevator lower travel limit.
5.2 Repositioning of the optical sensor

1. Remove the tyraps on the cable connected to the optical sensor.
2. Remove the two 2.5 mm Allen screws securing the sensor.

JOB CARDS
3. Remove the optical sensor and reinstall it in its new position, as determined in 5.1, above.
4. Reinstall and tighten the two 2.5 mm Allen screws, in the new position.
5. Reinstall tyraps on the sensor cable, as required.
6. Switch on the Senographe DMR, carry out a column raising and lowering test and check that the tube hous-
ing cover does not collide with the ceiling (check minimum clearance for safety of at least 8 cm to 9 cm).
3224
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 1
SENOGRAPHE DMR, SHOWING OPTICAL SENSOR POSITIONS
JOB CARDS
1
1
POSITIONS FOR 2
2 UPPER OPTICAL
SENSOR
3
3
COLUMN FRONT VIEW
3225
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3226
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: GENERAL ERRORS DURING THE Version No.:

CALIBRATION Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
None.
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None.
3227
REV 3 sm 2308530100
GENERAL ERRORS DURING THE

CALIBRATION Job Card IST 041 2 of 8
SECTION 5
GENERAL ERRORS DURING THE CALIBRATION
DMR GENERAL ERRORS DURING THE CALIBRATION

ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTION CORRECTIVE ACTION
RESULT OF OUT OF ORDER Failure Go back to application mode
CALIBRATION and note (fix) the error code
EXPOSURES
(WHATEVER STOP BY ARM Failure caused by the gantry Go back to application mode
JOB CARD IS USED) and note (fix) the error code
TOO HOT The tube is too hot Wait for the tube cooling. If
it takes more than 20 min-
utes, then cancel the proce-
dure and do it again.
JOB CARDS
ARCING Too many arcings Repeat the exposure

SOFTWARE ERROR Mistake in calculation of the Inform the Central Support
parameters of a curve by
approximation : software
error
NOT ENOUGH PTS Insufficient number of points Do the calibration again
acquired.
Calibration is not complete
or has been interrupted by
the operator.
PARAM DISPERSED Maximum > 1000 time the Do the calibration again.
minimum. Inform the Central Support.
Procedure or software error
ALL PARAM NIL The matrix determinant = 0. Do the calibration again.
Procedure or software error. Inform the Central Support.
PIVOT NIL The matrix diagonal = 0 but Do the calibration again.
the result is < > 0 Inform the Central Support.
3228
REV 3 sm 2308530100


CALCULATION OVERFLOW Real number is transformed Check that the AEC calibra-
ERROR into a string. tion has been property done.
Values are out of the interval If yes, then check the cell.
+/ 9999000000
ERROR Floating point calculation The best way is to restart
068/022 error. AEC calibration at level
This error originates gener- IST 007, with the right
ally from invalid parameters default parameters. Suppose
calculated during pm yeld you are calibrating FSC A
calibration (IST 007). and that couples B, C, D
The error can occur whithin were not already used ; using
IST 007, 013 or 014 procedure IST 007 para-
JOB CARDS
graph 641, copy succes-
sively from C (no screen)
to A (no screen)
and C (with screen)
to A (with screen).
3229
REV 3 sm 2308530100


CONNECTION CONNECTING Information message : If there is no connection
WITH THE ARM connection in progress. despite the message, it is a
(DURING A software error > inform
CALIBRATION the Central Support
EXPOSURE)
NO ARM REPLY Gantry failure (arm) Check the gantry and its
connection with the genera-
tor (optical fibers)
ACCESS REFUSED The command has not been Software error > inform
taken into account the Central Support
CONNECT ERROR Unknown answer form the Software error > inform
JOB CARDS
gantry the Central Support

ARM STOPPED Gantry stopped Check that the gantry runs
properly, if is does it is a
software error > inform
the Central Support
ARM ERROR Gantry out of order Check that the gantry runs
properly, if is does not note
the error code
COMMUNIC ERROR The received message is Software error > inform
wrong the Central Support
CONFIGURATION TUBE MISMATCH The select configuration Choose one of the possible
OF THE does not exist configuration indicated in
XRAY TUBE the steering guide
(paragraphs 13v & 13vi)
3230
REV 3 sm 2308530100

DMR ERRORS ASSOCIATED TO A JOB CARD

IST003 LIMITED ICH One or more filament heat- See IST003
XRAY TUBE (Warning message only) ing current values were cal- paragraph 5.1.6.
HEATER CURRENT culated above 5.6A.
CALIBRATION
IST 005 TOO MUCH PLEXI PM current is insufficient Check the thickness of the
PHOTOCELL plexi and check that the
CALIBRATION bucky is without cassette.
Reduce the thickness of the
plexi according to the
Job Card and do the calibra-
tion again.
This problem may come
from the hardware >
JOB CARDS
check the photocell board
800PL4. Change photocell
if necessary.
IST 005 NOT ENOUGH PLEXI PM current is too high Check the thickness of the
PHOTOCELL plexi.
CALIBRATION Increase the thickness of the
plexi according to the
Job Card and do the calibra-
tion again.
This problem may come
from the hardware >
check the photocell board
800PL4. Change photocell
if necessary.
OUT OF ORDER Failure Go back to application mode
and note (fix) the error code.
ARM ABSENT Default generator configura- Select arm present in the
tion CONFIG menu of the gener-
ator
3231
REV 3 sm 2308530100


IST 007 GRID ABSENT Test of the presence of the Put the grid back inside the
PM grid bucky
YIELD
GRID PRESENT Test of the presence of the Take out the grid from the
grid bucky
RH FILTER OFF Control of the tube and RH Check the tube configuration
filter version
HV = MIN, KV CHGE Information messages : only Press the exposure button to
HV = MAX, CFG CHGE appear when the operator continue the calibration
REDUCE HV, AGAIN interrupts the calibration
RISE HV, AGAIN
MEASURE ERROR Calculated point out of range Perform again the current
JOB CARDS
calibration step (63 or 65

or 68 or 610)
YIELD NIL Calculation error Copy parameters x to
another unused couple y.
Continue calibration with
couple y.
Couple x can be used with
another screen calibration.
BAD RESULT Reference energy will be Perform again the current
negative calibration Step: both 6.3
and 6.5 or both 6.8 and
6.10).
3232
REV 3 sm 2308530100


IST 013 ANOTHER FILM The delta of the measured Reload the cassette and
NON RECIPROCITY optical density exceeds the continue the calibration
CALIBRATION acceptable range :
> make another exposure
to continue the calibration
ODMEA TOO SMALL The measured optical den- Check the value entered
ODMEA TOO LARGE sity is out of the acceptable
limits
INVALID PARAM The curve determined by Check the root values of
coefficient A0, A1, A2, is parameters A0, A1, A2,
not valid (see Job Card)
JOB CARDS
CALCUL. ERROR Calculation error of the non Redo the calibration with the
reciprocity coefficients root parameters
(A0, A1, A2) indicated in
the Job Card
CHECK PLEXI CM If the measured thickness is Check the thichness of the
too much different from the plexi.
plexi thickness required Ignore the message if the
(+/ 0.5 cm) measure is right
IST 014 OD_MS = TOO LOW The mAs used for the expo- Change the mAs value or
REFERENCE OD_MS = TOO HIGH sure are too low or too hight. enter the right value of the
ENERGY This may also be an error in optical density
CALIBRATION the measurement of the opti-
cal density.
ARCING STOP Too many arcings : No specific action : try to
calibration stopped make the exposure again
IST 015 REDUCING HT Information message : if the Press the exposure button to
MAGNIFICATION RISING HT exposure button has been continue the calibration
CORRECTION relased during the calibration
IST 016 OUT OF RANGE The entered mA value is out Do the calibration again or
mA CALIBRATION of acceptable range. check the Hardware
(40 mA mini 60 mA maxi)
3233
REV 3 sm 2308530100


IST 017 OUT OF RANGE The entered tension value Do the calibration again or
KV CALIBRATION exceed normal value by check the Hardware
more than 15%. The calcu-
lated parameters deviate
from normal value by more
than 15% at 25 and 40 KV
IST 018 NORMAL CELL ERR Direction of tube housing Coordination the software
STEREOTIX 2 LELF CELL ERR angulation is incorrect selection and the real angula-
PHOTOCELL CENT CELL ERR tion
CALIBRATION RIGHT CELL ERR
REDUCING HV Information : after the expo- Press the exposure button to
sure button is released, the continue the calibration
JOB CARDS
HPTM is reduced by the

software
RISING HV Information : after the expo- Press the exposure button to
sure button is released, the continue the calibration
HPTM is increased ad by the
software
IST 020 TOO MANY SPITS If more than 5 arcings at Check ground cable connec-
TUBE WARMUP 22 KV. tion
If the number of returns Change the tube
from
26 KV to 22 KV is > or = 3.
If the number of exposures
for the same KV value is >
or = 10
3234
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CONNECTING ROOM LAMPS AND ROOM Version No.:

DOOR Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
The necessary hardware (wires, lamp, switches...) is field or/and customer supplied.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
None.
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
None.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None.
3235
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CONNECTING ROOM LAMPS AND

ROOM DOOR Job Card IST 042 2 of 4
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
1. Referring to Illustration 1 for details, connect the room and lamps wiring to XJ1, XJ2, XJ3 (location shown
in Illustration 2) on the 200PL4 board.
2. Route the wires in the generator, along with the DMR mains supply cable.
ILLUSTRATION 1
WIRING OF THE ROOM LAMPS AND DOOR
DMR GENERATOR CUSTOMER-SUPPLIED HARDWARE
AC or DC
Board supply
200PL4 Seno ON lamp
K1 XJ1
JOB CARDS
AC or DC
supply
K2 XJ2 X-ray ON lamp
K3
XJ3
~
Room door switch 24v /AC
(external power supply)
3. Locate the board 400PL1 (see illustration 3) and move jumpers JP1 and JP2 (room door disabled) to park-
ing position JP3 and JP4 (room door enabled).
3236
REV 3 sm 2308530100

TABLE 1
JP1 (PREPA) JP2 (GRAPHY) DOOR CLOSED DOOR OPENED
0 0 PREPA and GRAPHY PREPA and GRAPHY

enabled disabled

enabled disabled (see Note 1)
1 0 PREPA and GRAPHY PREPA enabled

enabled GRAPHY disabled

enabled enabled
JOB CARDS
0 = Jumper removed
1 = Jumper in place
Note 1: Using this setting, iIf the door opens during the exposure, the exposure will NOT be aborted and will
finish normally.
Note: When room door is enabled, the signals validPR (1st trigger or prepa) and validGR (graphy)
are enabled through the room door switch.
The load current rating of the relays K1 and K2 on 200PL4 is:
8A @ 250 VAC
or 5A @ 30 VDC
The relay K3 must be supplied with 24Vac
3237
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ILLUSTRATION 2
LOCATION OF ROOM WIRING CONNECTORS
XJ1 Room
XJ2 lamps
JOB CARDS
XJ3 and door

wiring
200 PL4
ILLUSTRATION 3
LOCATION OF JP1 TO JP4
3238
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: DMR INSTALLATION FORM Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
None.
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
None.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None.
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
Use this form to note down all the data collected during the DMR installation. This form has sufficient room
for the calibration of 2 screen / film couples. You can also add your personnal notes and remarks at the end
of this form, to help you during future maintenances.
3239
REV 3 sm 2308530100
DMR INSTALLATION FORM

JOB CARDS
IST 022
Measure at Step 513/514 +Ve / Ve /

Measure at step 516 AC 220 V
Measure at step 521 DC +5 V
3240
REV 3 sm 2308530100

JOB CARDS
AOP type used by customer A or B or C
3241
REV 3 sm 2308530100

JOB CARDS
3242
REV 3 sm 2308530100

IST007: First screen. Test of thickness displayed on the console

RT (2cm) Delta (2cm) RT (4cm) Delta (4cm) RT (6cm) Delta (6cm)
Contact mode with Grid with-
out Screen
Contact mode with Grid with
Screen
Magnification mode without
Grid without Screen
Magnification mode without
Grid with Screen
Legend:
RT: Radiological Thickness
JOB CARDS
Delta (X cm) = Radiological Thickness Plexiglass Thickness
Expected Results:
Each Radiological thickness must be equal to the Plexiglass thickness +/ 2 mm
absolute value (Delta (2cm) Delta (6cm)) < 1.5 mm.
3243
REV 3 sm 2308530100

JOB CARDS
32 / 1,5 cm
28 / 5.5 cm
3244
REV 3 sm 2308530100

JOB CARDS
32 / 1,5 cm
28 / 5.5 cm
3245
REV 3 sm 2308530100

JOB CARDS
3246
REV 3 sm 2308530100

JOB CARDS
3247
REV 3 sm 2308530100

IST007: Second screen. Test of thickness displayed on the console

RT (2cm) Delta (2cm) RT (4cm) Delta (4cm) RT (6cm) Delta (6cm)
Contact mode with Grid with
Screen
Magnification mode without Grid
with Screen
Legend:
RT: Radiological Thickness. Delta (X cm) = Radiological Thickness Plexiglass Thickness.
Expected Results:
Each Radiological thickness must be equal to the Plexiglass thickness +/ 2 mm
absolute value (Delta (2cm) Delta (6cm)) < 1.5 mm.
JOB CARDS
3248
REV 3 sm 2308530100

JOB CARDS
32 / 1,5 cm
28 / 5.5 cm
3249
REV 3 sm 2308530100

32 / 1,5 cm
JOB CARDS
28 / 5.5 cm
3250
REV 3 sm 2308530100

JOB CARDS
3251
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3252
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: SETTING PADDLE DEFORMATION Version No.:

PARAMETERS Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
None.
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
None.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None.
SECTION 5
PADDLE DEFORMATION PARAMETERS
The objective is to check the values of the paddle deformation parameters and to modify them if necessary.
These parameters alter the XRay exposure behaviour in AOP mode.
5.1 Format 18x24 paddles in contact mode
5.1.1 Starting from application mode, select:

SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/PELOTE/18x24
5.1.2 Rotate the KV button to see either the offset or the gain values. Check agains table 1 below. change
the value(s) if necessary.
Table 1 Offset value Gain value

Standard injected plastic paddle (*) +1.000 E + 0 +6.000 E 1
Metallic arm paddles 1.000 E + 0 +7.000 E 1
(*) = default factory setting.
3253
REV 3 sm 2308530100
SETTING PADDLE DEFORMATION

PARAMETERS Job Card IST 044 2 of 2
5.2 Format 24x30 paddles is contact mode
5.2.1 Select SETUP / 24x30
5.2.2 Rotate the KV button to see either the offset or the gain values. Check against table 2 below. Change

Standard injected plastic paddle (*) +1.000 E + 0 +8.000 E 1
Metallic arm paddles +0.000 E + 0 +1.000 E 1
(*) = default factory setting.
5.3 Magnification paddles

JOB CARDS
5.3.1 Select: SETUP / MAG
5.3.2 Rotate the KV button to see either the offset or the gain values. Check against table 3 below. Change

All magnification paddles +2.000 E + 0 +2.000 E 1
5.4 Stereo Paddles
5.4.1 Select: SETUP / STEREO
5.4.2 Rotate the kV button to see either the offset or the gain values. Check against table 4 below.
Changes the value(s) if necessary.

All Stereo paddles 3.000 E + 0 1.000 E 1
5.5 Perform a CKSUM and return to Application mode.
3254
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FOLLOWUP Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
None.
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
None.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None.
SECTION 5
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Despite its inherent reliability, the Senographe DMR requires certain minimum maintenance. A Maintenance
Program, whose frequency may vary according to the type of use of the equipment, is outlined in Table 1.
Use the Maintenance Followup Table to track maintenance operations over time.
3255
REV 3 sm 2308530100
FOLLOWUP Job Card IST 045 2 of 4

Frequency
Action Description Procedure

+(&. %(/7 7(16,21

8%5,&$7( (/(9$725 029(0(17 6&5(: *5($6( %($5,1*6
/(9$725 86( ! "
25 8%5,3/$7(

//8675$7,21 2) +(&. (/(9$725 029(0(17 63(('

(1(:$/ $576 +(&. *$6 635,1* )25 2,/ /($.$*(
!" /($1 7+( *$6 635,1* 6+$)7
+(&. /$7(5$/ 3/$< 2) 7+( &2/801 $1' $'-867 7+( %($5,1*
,) 1(('('
+(&. %(/7 7(16,21
8%5,&$7( &2035(66,21 %$5 *5($6( %($5,1*6 86( !
JOB CARDS
"
25 8%5,3/$7(

2035(66,21 +(&. &2035(66,9( )25&( &$/,%5$7,21

6<67(0 +(&. 0$;,080 &2035(66,9( )25&(

'$
+(&. /,0,7 )25&( 2) 352*5$00(' &2035(66,21
+(&. 5(6,67$1&( 2) %(/76 ,1 '(&2035(66,21
+(&. 7+,&.1(66 0($685(0(17 ,1 &2035(66,21

+(&. %5$.( ,1 527$7,21
(;32685(6 (;32685(6
50 +(&. /2&.,1* %(7:((1 78%($50 6833257 $1'
25 25
5(&(37256833257 $50 )25 3266,%/( 3/$<
0217+6 0217+6
+(&. ),(/' &29(5(' %< ;5$< %($0
+(&. ),(/' &29(5(' %< &(17(5,1* /,*+7
0$*( 48$/,7<
($685( +$/)9$/8( /$<(5
!"

($685( 7+( '26(
+(&. '(16,7< 5()(5(1&( (;32685(
/($1 ! $1' )250$7 '(7(&7256
163(&7 $&&(6625,(6 ,1&/8',1* *5,'6
,6&(//$1(286
867 163(&7 &/($1 )$16 0,5525 &2//,0$725 5$,/6
+(&. ! %5$.( $&7,21
!<67(0$7,&
(3/$&( 7+( 7:2 %(/76 2) 7+( &2035(66,21 6<67(0
5(3/$&(0(17 (;32685(6 (;32685(6
!<67(0$7,&
<($56 <($56 (3/$&( %$77(5,(6 ,1 7+( 7:2 0,&52352&(6625 %2$5'6
5(3/$&(0(17
!<67(0$7,&
(3/$&( 7+( # 5(/$<

21 7+(
$,16
5(3/$&(0(17 ,1 <($56 <($56
,675,%87,21 2$5'
(1(5$725 $%,1(7

(;32685(6 (;32685(6
$''/( :,7+ $ 127&+ $''/( 5(3/$&(0(17
25 25
0217+6 0217+6
3256
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Date: Date: Date: Date: Date:
Exposure Exposure Exposure Exposure Exposure

Action Description count: count: count: count: count:

&$"
JOB CARDS
"##

#(#$

"

!%$(

#%#
(#$$

" $
(#$$

" $
(#$$

" $
(#$$

" $
(#$$

" $
"$" $

'$ $
3257
REV 3 sm 2308530100
MAINTENANCE FOLLOW-UP (CONTINUED)
Date: Date: Date: Date: Date:
Exposure Exposure Exposure Exposure Exposure

Action Description count: count: count: count: count:

&$"
JOB CARDS
"##

#(#$

"

!%$(

#%#
(#$$

" $
(#$$

" $
(#$$

" $
(#$$

" $
(#$$

" $
"$" $

'$ $
3258
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CHECKS ON PRE-EXPOSURE Version No.:

Date:
Time: 30 min Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D Normal cassette of type used in the screen pair being calibrated
D Film of type used in the screen pair being calibrated
SECTION 2
TOOLS
JOB CARDS
complete coverage of the photo-cell).
Tool reference (plexi plates) : 45 203 014 or 46286893 (US pole).
Thickness accuracy of plexiglass plates is mandatory (10 0.2 mm).
For memo: chemical formula of plexiglass is C5H8O2, different from Lexan and Nylon!
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D About checksum, see chapter 1, para. 37.
D kV accuracy check (if applicable) followed by kVp recalibration must be performed before this job
card (see IST 033, para. 5.1.11).
D Job Card IST 006 SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND CONFIGURATION
D Job Card IST 007 must have been performed recently.
D In case of error messages during this calibration, see IST 041 for explanations.
3259
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHECKS ON PRE-EXPOSURE
SECTION 5
CHECKS ON PREEXPOSURE IN AOP MODE
5.1 Purpose of test

For good results in gridlines, it is required to have a good prediction of exposure time in AEC and AOP mode.
This prediction can be affected by an uncorrected adjustment of the kV feedback circuit on 701PL1 board
(KV/MA board). For example, an overshoot on KV waveform during preexposure (preshot) would give a
minimized or a maximized value for radiological thickness, compared to the thickness measured during main
exposure.
A simple check is to record the thickness measurement done by photocell during a complete exposure and
compare it to the measurement during preexposure. The measurement will have to be done several times to
take in account other variations in the system.
This adjustment does not modify the AEC/AOP calibration; it will improve the grid movement ( the risk of
JOB CARDS
grid lines is more important for short exposure times).

Since generator software 3.26, the AEC mode works with a preexposure, same as AOP mode.
ILLUSTRATION 4
START
Make 5 exposures
AEC 28kV
Turn P1 Measure of thickness
No
Result analysis good
Yes
Final adjustment
Turn P1
END
3260
REV 3 sm 2308530100
5.2 When perform this test

If you detect gridlines
or if radiological thickness of an AEC pre exposure is smaller or equals to the radiological thickness of expo-
sure
or if you have 097/027 error code in the generator error log file.
Caution:
After each preshot or exposure wait 30s before performing other Xrays.
5.3 How to check AEC exposure
The appreciation of Kv rise time is based on the measure of radiological thickness during the preshot. When
there is an undershoot or an overshoot of KV this measure of radiological thickness have a significant disper-
sion.
JOB CARDS
So we need to perform at least 5 preshot to get a sufficient accuracy; (du to the variability in preshot length)
5.3.1 Preparation for test:

PowerOFF/ON the DMR
Used a calibrated FSC; note here after the original parameters:
FSC NAME:_________________
Set and note the following parameters in menu medical:
Disable auto decomp Check if Yes or no
Disable cassette detection
Note the original force limit registered______=______DaN
SID = 660 mm
DMR examination Arm: vertical
18x24 compression paddle installed
Put 4 cm of plexiglass on the bucky; verified that photocell area is covered
Compress the Plexiglas to get the mechanical thickness as described above; you need always compress with
the same force; chose 11DaN.
You could set in medical menu, the maximum compression force to 11daN, to get reproducibility of all expo-
sures requested by this job card
Insert a cassette with film (we do not need to develop this film).
Choose AEC mode 28kV.
5.3.2 System warmup in AEC mode 28 kV

Perform a serie of 5 exposures with 30 seconds waiting time between each exposure in order to warmup the
tube.
3261
REV 3 sm 2308530100
5.3.3 Acquisition of Exposures in AEC mode 28 kVp
1. Press 1st trigger button until 1st trigger lamp is on
2. Press 2nd trigger to take preexposure ONLY ; RELEASE 2nd trigger and Prep buttons BE-
FORE actual exposure starts. Clear the Abort sound.
3. Read the radiological thickness on console.
4. Record this value in Table 1, value THp1 (which stands for Thickness, preexposure N1 )
Note: Be sure to record all digits on the console (ex: 4.17 cm)
5. Redo the same exposure, but this time, let the system finish the main exposure.
6. Read the radiological thickness on console.

JOB CARDS
7. Record this value in Table 1, value THe1 (which stands for Thickness, exposure N1 ),
8. Repeat steps 1 to 7 FOUR TIMES and each time report values in Table 1 (THp2 to THp5
and THe2 to THe5). Observe carefully a waiting time between exposures.
9. Calculate average values for THp, THe and Delta

(Win95 Calculator can be useful for this task; you can find it using menu: Start/Programs/Acces-
sories)
10. Report Values AV_THp , AV_THe and AV_ Table 2. (AV stands for Average)
Table 1 : Preexposure test
(note Thickness values in cm)
THp THe (main Delta

(preexpo exposure) (THe
sure) THp)
THp1 THe1 Delta 1
THp2 THe2 Delta 2
THp3 THe3 Delta 3
THp4 THe4 Delta 4
THp5 THe5 Delta 5

Average AV_THp AV_THe AV_
Delta
3262
REV 3 sm 2308530100
5.4 Analysis of results

Two conditions are required:
Average Delta should be comprised between 0.00 and 0.03 cm (no positive value allowed), meaning that
preexposure measured thickness is always slightly above the real thickness
THp minimal is equals or greater than THe maximal
If these conditions are satisfied, go to section 5.7 Final adjustment of KV rise time.
If not, kV return signal may not be properly calibrated. Proceed to next paragraph 5.5.
5.5 Corrective action on KV risetime

D If the gap is small (less than 0.2 cm), you can directly fine tune the HV risetime by rotating the potentiome-
ter P1 CW or CCW according to examples given below (one turn corresponds to about 0.01 cm of thick-
ness).
JOB CARDS
Note: P1 is the frequency compensation adjustment of the DMR HV probe (HV connection +
wire) if you turn P1 clockwise you go to overshoot, if you turn P1 to reverse clockwise you
go to undershoot.
Examples of adjustment for 701PL1 P1:
First example :
AV_THp 4.03 cm AV_THe 4.06 cm AV_Delta 0.03 cm
In this case, turn P1 by 3 turns clockwise: this will increase THp by 0.03cm approximately.
Refine if necessary.
Second example :
AV_THp 4.08. cm AV_THe 4.01 cm AV_Delta 0.07 cm
In this case, when average delta is equals or smaller than 0.06, turn P1 with a maximum of 6 turns re-
verse clockwise by step: this will reduce THp by 0.06cm approximately; average delta is not linear.
Refine if necessary.
5.6 First Adjustment check

Perform again the test exposures as specified in paragraph 5.3.2 and 5.3.3 above; note results in table 2 below.
Results must be in the conditions of paragraph 5.4 Analysis of results
3263
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Table 2 : Preexposure test

(note Thickness values in cm)
THp THe (main Delta

(preexpo exposure) (THe
sure) THp)
THp1 THe1 Delta 1
THp2 THe2 Delta 2
THp3 THe3 Delta 3
THp4 THe4 Delta 4

JOB CARDS
THp5 THe5 Delta 5
Average AV_THp AV_THe AV_

Delta
5.7 Final Adjustment of KV rise time

The second adjustment of P1 is made after successfully perform first adjustment with average delta between
0.00 and 0.03.
Second adjustment: turn P1 of 7 positive turns clockwise.
Make 5 preexposures AEC Mo/Mo 28KV and for each one, check that radiological thickness is always
greater than the radiological thickness found in the last check.
5.8 Restore original parameters:

Disable auto decomp Yes or No
Original force limit registered = DaN
3264
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CHECK OF VIEWBOX(ES) Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Luxmeter (Range 1 to 10 000lux) suitable for photometric measurements.
JOB CARDS
D Luminancemeter (range 10 to 10 000 cd/m2 or nit) suitable for photometric measurements.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None.
3265
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHECK OF VIEWBOX(ES)
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 Ambient light test

Switch on all light sources of the view room except the viewbox to be checked,
Position the luxmeter photocell at a distance of 30 cm from the viewbox, in direction opposite to the
latter (to measure the light received on viewbox surface),
Record the Lux value (on datasheet) and proceed the same way for other viewboxes.
Pass criterion: Each measured Lux value of ambient light must be < 50 Lux.
5.2 Viewbox test:

JOB CARDS
5.2.1 Definition of measurement areas (See figure below)

The viewbox is generally divided into four diagnostic areas (i.e. four times a 35 X 43 area),
Five test points are identified in each diagnostic area (one test point at the center, and four test points at
the corner of an area of 35 X 43).
Area # 1 Area # 2 Area # 3 Area # 4

(35 X 43) (35 X 43) (35 X 43) (35 X 43)
C1 C2 C3 C4
Viewbox
5 test points in
each area
5.2.2 Procedure
Switch on the viewbox to be tested and wait for 5 minutes,
3266
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Position the luminancemeter towards the five test points of a diagnostic area and record the correspond-
ing luminance values (in cd/m2) values on datasheet,
Repeat the measurements for all other areas,
Perform the same way for all other viewboxes.
5.2.3 Pass criterion

Value at the center of each diagnostic area must be equal to the mean of the measurements in the center
of each of the five areas within 15% and should be > 3500 cd/m2 (or nit) ; recommended value is
> 7000 cd/m2 (or nit).
Values in the corners of each area should be equal the value at the center within 10%,
The deviation between the means of the measurements in the center of each of the five areas of two
viewboxes must be < 20 %.
JOB CARDS
3267
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Blank page
JOB CARDS
3268
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CHECK OF SENSITOMETRIC STABILITY Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Densitometer, Sensitometer, Marker pen, Gloves, Film, Test Cassette.
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION WEAR CLOTH GLOVES TO HANDLE THE FILM.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
4.1 Check temporal stability of the film processor
Apply recommended check procedure provided by the manufacturer.
3269
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHECK OF SENSITOMETRIC STABILITY

SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 Sensitometric procedure:
5.1.1 Purpose:
The purpose is to check the compliance of system condition with respect to a rated and/or reference condition,
i.e. gamma as a function of chemical/Film/Film processor parameters.
It could help to find out the optimum O.D. which allows a good completion of IST 013.
5.1.2 Procedure:
a) expose the film with the sensitometer set to green, with the film right way up (if single emulsion is used)
For most of the films, the emulsion is facing down when the notch is on the upper left.
JOB CARDS
For an XRITE 333 sensitometer, the emulsion must be facing down with the film up against the stop.
b) Develop the film and write in all data necessary for its identification: site, date and time,
c) Calibrate the densitometer to zero on step 1 of the film sensitometric strip:
Note: Calibration of LNRT and Reference Energy are done using net Optical Density values (without base +
fog).
d) Measure and record O.D. levels for each step ( 1 through 21) in Table 31, then draw the sensitometric curve,
Step # Measured O.D. Step # Measured O.D.

Step 1 Step 12
Step 2 Step 13
Step 3 Step 14
Step 4 Step 15
Step 5 Step 16
Step 6 Step 17
Step 7 Step 18
Step 8 Step 19
Step 9 Step 20
Step 10 Step 21
Step 11
Table 31: O.D. steps record
e) Note the first step whose relative density is greater or equal to 1 (Sensitivity Index). Let N be the step found and
D(N) its relative optical density, and record it in Table 32.
f) Note the relative optical density for step (N + 2). Let this measured value be D(N + 2).
g) Calibrate the densitometer to zero without film, then measure the raw O.D. for step 1 (Base + Fog density). Re-
cord it in Table 32.
3270
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.1.3 Calculation & Pass/Fail criteria
Parameters Measured val- Pass/Fail crite- Result

ues rion
Base + Fog density = Measurement of raw O.D. on step 1 Must be < 0.23
of the sensitometric strip
Sensitivity Index (N) = First step whose relative density
(D) is greater or equal to 1.
Contrast Index = D(N + 2) D(N).
Density deviation between step N (corresponding to Sensi-
tivity Index) and step N + 2.
Calculated Gamma = Contrast Index / 0.3 See table 3
JOB CARDS
Maximum Density = Density of step 21
Table 32: Sensitometric calculations
Note: The Gamma value calculated by the DMR must be close to the Gamma value calculated manually to
get good results about optical density.
3271
REV 3 sm 2308530100

JOB CARDS
3272
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: A0 OPTIMIZATION FOR CONTACT MODE Version No.:

Date:
Time: xx min Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
PURPOSE
This procedure applies to the DMR mammographic equipment line.
The standard adjustment made using Job cards IST007 and IST013 guarantees an acceptable Optical Density
variation for each Track/Filter combination.
The two purposes of this additional Job Card IST050 are the following:
1) to check the Optical Density variation for a plexiglass thickness varying from 2 to 6 cm,
2) to reduce the Optical Density variations when switching from one combination to another among the three
JOB CARDS
possible (Mo/Mo, Mo/Rh and Rh/Rh), and allows to be compliant with the specifications of MQSA 2002 stan-
dards (US Regulation). This is achieved by optimizing the values of the coefficients A0 without screen and
with grid coming from IST007 calibration, for Mo/Rh and Rh/Rh Track/Filter combinations.
SECTION 2
WHERE/WHEN
1) For already installed systems:
Where
In the countries where MQSA 2002 has become a requirement.

For the other countries if you need to reduce the Optical Density variation.
When
This procedure should be performed once for each Film/Screen combination.

It must be repeated each time Job Card IST007, IST013 or IST014 is redone, for example when the user intro-
duces a new Film /Screen combination
2) For new DMR system installation
Where
This procedure should be performed in all countries
When
This procedure should be performed once for each Film/Screen combination during the first installation of the
system (refer to the flowchart of AEC/AOP calibration).
It must be repeated each time Job Card IST007, IST013 or IST014 is redone, for example when the user intro-
duces a new Film /Screen combination
3273
REV 3 sm 2308530100
A0 OPTIMIZATION FOR CONTACT MODE

SECTION 3
PROCEDURE
Copy the 2283482200_IST050_DMR_A0_OPTIMIZATION.xls file from the CD 2283482200 onto
your PC hard disk, then run the file from the hard disk. Follow instruction given in the .xls file
Note: If you are not provided with Excel*, all necessary formulas are included in the
2283482200_IST050_DMR_A0_OPTIMIZATION.pdf file.
*Excel is a registered TradeMark of Microsoft Corporation.

JOB CARDS
3274
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: A0 OPTIMIZATION FOR THE Version No.:

MAGNIFICATION MODE Date:
Time: xx min Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
PURPOSE
This procedure applies to the DMR mammographic equipment line.
The standard adjustment made using Job cards IST007, IST013 and IST046 guarantees an acceptable Optical
Density variation for each Track/Filter combination.
The goal of this additional Job card IST051 is to reduce the Optical Density variations when switching from
one combination to another among the three possible (Mo/Mo, Mo/Rh and Rh/Rh) inside the magnification
mode, and allows to be compliant with the countries regulations (e.g.: MQSA 2002).
JOB CARDS
This procedure does not reduce the shift between the contact mode and the magnification mode.
This is achieved by optimizing the values of the coefficients A0 without screen and without grid coming from
IST007 calibration, for Mo/Rh and Rh/Rh Track/Filter combination, the Mo/Mo combination being taken as
a reference.
SECTION 2
WHERE/WHEN SHOULD THIS JOB CARD BE PERFORMED?
Where
If you need to reduce the optical density variation between Mo/Mo, Mo/Rh and Rh//Rh inside the
magnification mode.
When
This procedure should be performed once for each Film/Screen combination.
It must be repeated each time Job Card IST007, IST013 or IST014 is/are redone, for example when the user
introduces a new Film/Screen combination.
3275
REV 3 sm 2308530100
A0 OPTIMIZATION FOR THE MAGNIFICA-

TION MODE Job Card IST 051 2 of 2
SECTION 3
PROCEDURE
Copy the 2283482200_IST051_DMR_A0_OPTIMIZATION.xls file from the CD 2283482200 onto your PC
hard disk, then run the file from the hard disk. Follow instruction given in the .xls file
Note: If you are not provided with Excel*, all necessary formulas are included in the
2283482200_IST051_DMR_A0_OPTIMIZATION.pdf file.
*Excel is a registered TradeMark of Microsoft Corporation.

JOB CARDS
3276
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHAPTER 4 ERROR CODES
SECTION 1
ERROR CODE STRUCTURE
The structure of the error messages, as displayed on the DMR console (e.g. E55 [text]
161/013), is shown below:
Error
E 5 5 text 1 6 1 0 1 3
a bb ccc ddd
I : Warning without exposure inhibition
S : Warning with exposure inhibition
a : type of error
E : Fault with exposure inhibition
K : Fault generating power cutoff (safety)
bb: message number
ccc: subassembly ref. (hardware or software)
ddd: number indicating origin of fault
In the above example:

E55 indicates an error concerning tube housing angulation and generating an exposure
ERROR CODES
inhibition.
161/013 indicates no reference crossing during movement.
E55 is the error code type listed in the Operator Manual. This code is easy to use and
communicate, and is considered sufficient for customer use.
161/013 is the technical code, recommended for GE internal communication.
The error code listing currently contains almost 500 codes. Around 200 of these codes
concern software errors which, by definition, should never occur.
If a software error should occur, especially if it occurs several times, please inform Service
Engineering, giving as many details as possible.
The error code listing, below, only contains codes ccc/ddd, to facilitate technical
communication.
Note: *** : these 3 stars indicates an explanation at the end of this chapter (section 3) for a
possible known root cause.
41
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Abbreviations used:
IST: Installation
MNT: Maintenance
PM: Photomultiplier
HTPM: PM high tension
IPM: PM current
VRTX: Real time operating system
Where an error message refers to a signal with a French signal name, the corresponding
English language signal name is shown between parentheses.
ERROR CODES
42
REV 3 sm 2308530100
SECTION 2
ERROR CODE LIST
MEANING OF CODE CODE
Gene CPU software error: VRTX error during init 002/001

Gene CPU software error: reboot by watch_dog_hard or reset button 002/002
Gene CPU software error: reboot by watch_dog_soft 002/003
Gene CPU: reboot after power microfailure 002/004
Gene CPU software error: bus error 003/000
Gene CPU software error: address error 003/001
Gene CPU software error: format error 003/002
Gene CPU software error: illegal instruction 003/003
Gene CPU software error: privilege violation 003/004
Gene CPU software error: trace error 003/005
Gene CPU software error: emulation line 1010 error 003/006
Gene CPU software error: emulation line 1111 error 003/007
Gene CPU software error: CHK error 003/008
Gene CPU software error: TRAPV error 003/009
Gene interface: reset error (see Chap. 1 Sect. 3) 004/001
ERROR CODES
Gene interface: read/write error on timer PTM1 (see Chap. 1 Sect. 3) 004/002
Gene interface: interrupt error on DUART1 (see Chap. 1 Sect. 3) 004/006
Gene interface: PTM1 timer 1 defective (see Chap. 1 Sect. 3) 004/007
Gene interface: interrupt error on PTM1 timer 1 (see Chap. 1 Sect. 3) 004/013
43
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Generator: fault at exposure command 006/000

Generator: fault at exposure command 006/001
Generator: signal kV_Inf_5 (Less_than_5kV) not rising 006/002
Generator: Signal En_Pose (Exposure_On) not rising 006/003
Generator: fatal security triggered during exposure 006/004
Generator: fatal security triggered at end of exposure or signal En_Pose (Exposure_On) 006/005
stays high
Generator: signal Secu_Rattrap (No_Fatal_Security) stays high after arcing recovery 006/011
Gene init tests: one fatal security input <> 0; xxx identifies input. 007/xxx
Access generator error log display for full error decoding.
Focus bias software error: unknown command 011/001
Focus bias software error: unknown task status 011/002
Focus bias: signal Pres_Polar (Bias_Presence) high in standby status 012/001
Focus bias: signal Pres_Polar (Bias_Presence) stays low when bias generation starts 012/002
Focus bias: signal Pres_Polar (Bias_Presence) goes low after stabilization 012/003
Focus bias: signal Pres_Polar (Bias_Presence) stays high after bias generation stopped 012/004
Anode starter software error: unknown command 016/001
Anode starter software error: unknown task status 016/002
ERROR CODES
Anode starter: signal Pres_Rotation (Rotation_Presence) high in standby status 017/001

Anode starter: signal Pres_Rotation (Rotation_Presence) not rising during acceleration to 017/002
9000 rpm
Anode starter: signal Pres_Rotation (Rotation_Presence) not rising during acceleration to 017/003
6000 rpm
Anode starter: signal Pres_Rotation (Rotation_Presence) goes low during rotation at 017/004
9000 rpm
Anode starter: signal Pres_Rotation (Rotation_Presence) goes low during rotation at 017/005
6000 rpm
Anode starter: signal Pres_Rotation (Rotation_Presence) goes low during rotation (speed 017/006
< 9000 rpm)
Anode starter: signal Pres_Rotation (Rotation_Presence) goes low during rotation (speed 017/007
< 6000 rpm)
Anode starter: signal Pres_Rotation (Rotation_Presence) stays high during 9000 rpm 017/008
braking
Anode starter: signal Pres_Rotation (Rotation_Presence) stays high during 6000 rpm 017/009
braking
Anode starter: signal Pres_Rotation (Rotation_Presence) stays high during rotor failure 017/010
Anode starter: signal Pres_Rotation (Rotation_Presence) stays low during rotation 017/011
Heater software error: unknown command 021/001
Heater software error: unknown task status 021/002
44
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Heater software error: Heater scaling parameters (ICH) or heater values are not valid 021/003
Heater track 1: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) high in standby status 022/001
Heater track 1: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) stays low when heater started 022/002
Heater track 1: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) goes low during preheater phase 022/003
Heater track 1: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) goes low during 1st trigger 022/004
Heater track 1: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) goes low during exposure 022/005
Heater track 1: mA value not significant 022/006
Heater track 1: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) goes low after exposure 022/007
Heater track 1: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) stays high when heater stopped 022/008
Heater track 2: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) high in standby status 023/001
Heater track 2: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) stays low when heater started 023/002
Heater track 2: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) goes low during preheater phase 023/003
Heater track 2: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) goes low during 1st trigger 023/004
Heater track 2: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) goes low during exposure 023/005
Heater track 2: mA value not significant 023/006
Heater track 2: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) low after exposure 023/007
Heater track 2: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) stays high when heater stopped 023/008
ERROR CODES
Grid sync software error: ACQ_NTR or ACQ_OVR received or unknown reply when 026/001
starting
Grid sync software error: ACQ_NTR or ACQ_OVR received or unknown reply when 026/002
stopping
Grid sync software error: unknown command 026/003
Grid sync software error: unknown task status 026/004
Grid sync: signal Synchro_Bras (Synchro_Arm) high in standby status 027/001
Grid sync: grid start signal not received or grid fault detected 027/002
Grid sync: signal Synchro_Bras (Synchro_Arm) low after grid start 027/003
Grid sync: grid stop signal not received or grid fault detected 027/004
Arm fatal failure: acknowledgment of the Grid Stop Motion command sent by the 027/005
generator to the gantry not received by the generator
Arm fatal failure: Grid Stop Power command not received on time from the exposure 027/006
automaton (time out on the reception 15s)
Generator: delay task software error: unknown command 031/001
Generator: delay task software error: unknown task status 031/002
HTPM/IPM software error: ACQ_NTR or ACQ_OVR received or unknown reply 036/001
45
REV 3 sm 2308530100

HTPM/IPM software error: unknown command 036/006
HTPM/IPM software error: unwanted command 036/007
HTPM/IPM software error: unknown task status 036/008
HTPM/IPM: HTPM reference not transmitted or HTPM fault 037/001
HTPM/IPM: IPM measurement request not transmitted or switch fault 037/002
HTPM/IPM: offset value outside tolerance 037/003
HTPM/IPM: HTPM measurement request not transmitted or switch fault 037/004
HTPM/IPM: invalid HTPM value (valid range = reference +/ 20% ) 037/005
HTPM/IPM: IPM measurement request not transmitted after HTPM measurement or 037/006
switch fault
HTPM/IPM: HTPM reference not transmitted when stopped or HTPM fault 037/007
Gene thermal protection software: VRTX error 041/001
Gene thermal protection software: unknown anode starter status 041/005
ERROR CODES

Gantry thermal protection software: VRTX error 046/001
Filter wheel software error: ACQ_NTR or ACQ_OVR received or unknown reply 051/001
Filter wheel software error: unknown command 051/002
Filter wheel software error: unknown task status 051/003
Filter wheel: filter change request not transmitted or filter fault 052/001
Focus software error: ACQ_NTR or ACQ_OVR received or unknown reply 056/001
Focus software error: unknown command 056/002
Focus software error: unknown task status 056/003
Focus: focus change request not transmitted or focus fault 057/001
Gene to gantry communication driver: no reply from gantry after 2 attempts 061/000
Gene to control panel communication driver: no reply from control panel after 2 attempts 062/000
Gene init tests: no gantry status feedback after 10 requests 063/006
Gene date/time: access timeout during dater init 066/000
Gene date/time: access timeout during read sequence 066/001
Gene date/time: access timeout during write sequence 066/002
Gene date/time: access timeout during time write sequence 066/003
46
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Generator: Zero divide 067/000

Generator: floating point calculation error. xxx is VRTX task number 068/xxx
Generator: checksum error on battery saved memory 071/081
Generator: timeout on signal Alim_Puis_OK (Inv_Supply_OK) (going low or high) 071/082
Generator: error reading kV law table in 0 pt technique (AOP) 071/083
Exposure software error: ACQ_NTR or ACQ_OVR received at start of 1st trigger 072/001
Exposure software error: ACQ_NTR or ACQ_OVR received at end of 1st trigger 072/003
Exposure software error: unknown origin of aborted exposure 072/004
Exposure software error: aborted by PM in 2 pt technique 072/005
Exposure software error: unknown exposure technique 072/006
Gene software error: one system task (at least) not stable after a delay of 7 s when a 072/007
Prepa is performed
Exposure software error: unknown task status 072/008
Exposure software error: 0 pt or 1 pt exposure and gantry absent 072/009
Gene software error (IST, standby): parameter display problem 073/001
Gene software error (IST, standby): unknown tube type 073/002
Gene software error (IST, standby): alpha=0.0 when calculating value P_NDac_HTPM 073/003
Gene software error (IST, standby): incorrect thickness for correlation calculation 073/004
ERROR CODES
Gene software error (IST, standby): bias calibration task problem 073/005
Gene software error (IST, standby): heater scale calibration task problem 073/006
Gene software error (IST, standby): HV/DAC calibration task problem 073/007
Gene software error (IST, standby): FREQ/HV calibration task problem 073/008
Gene software error (IST, standby): PM calibration task problem 073/009
Gene software error (IST, standby): gantry connection task problem 073/013
Gene software error (IST, standby): gantry connection fault 073/014
Gene software error (IST, standby): mA measurement calibration problem 073/017
Gene software error (IST, exposure): unknown exposure end 074/001
Gene software error (IST, exposure): unknown gantry reply 074/002
Gene software error (IST, exposure): unknown gantry reply 074/003
Gene software error (IST, exposure): unknown exposure status 074/004
47
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Gene software error (MNT): anode starter speed impossible 075/010

Gene software error (MNT): anode starter: abnormal test task status 075/011
Gene software error (MNT): heater: impossible track 075/020
Gene software error (MNT): heater: abnormal test task status 075/021
Gene software error (MNT): heater: abnormal test task status 075/022
Gene software error (MNT): bias: abnormal test task status 075/030
Gene software error (MNT): HV test: abnormal test task status 075/040
Gene software error (MNT): gate test: abnormal test task status 075/041
Gene software error (MNT): inverter test: abnormal test task status 075/042
Gene software error (MNT): mA value: abnormal test task status 075/050
Gene software error (MNT): mA measurement: abnormal test task status 075/051
Gene software error (MNT): grid sync: abnormal test task status 075/060
Gene software error (MNT): PM test: abnormal test task status 075/070
Gene software error (MNT): PM test: abnormal test task status 075/071
Gene software error (MNT): PM test: measurement timeout 075/072
Gene software error (MNT): error codes: display problem 075/090
ERROR CODES

Gene software error (MNT): transfer: frame code error 075/100
Gene software error (MNT): transfer: abnormal transfer task (save) status 075/101
Gene software error (MNT): transfer: abnormal transfer task (save) status 075/102
Gene software error (MNT): transfer: abnormal state transfer task (load) status 075/103
Gene software error (MNT): transfer: abnormal state transfer task (load) status 075/104
Gene software error (MNT): transfer: unknown frame 075/105
Gene software error (MNT): transfer: end of loading error 075/106
Gene software error (MNT): transfer: abnormal transfer task (protocol) status 075/107
Gene init tests software error: timeout on system task 078/002
Gene init tests software error: defective function will selfidentify 078/003
Gene init tests software error: error following VRTX request 078/128
Exposure aborted: timeout 079/001
Exposure aborted: heater fault *** 079/002
48
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Exposure aborted: anode starter fault 079/003

Exposure aborted: power fault 079/004
Exposure aborted: generator fault 079/005
Exposure: no gantry acknowledgement (at start of 1st trigger) or gantry fault 079/006
Gantry fault detected before start of exposure 079/008
Exposure: no sync signal from gantry to start exposure 079/009
Exposure aborted by mA meter (0 pt or 1 pt technique) 079/010
Exposure: no gantry acknowledgement (at end of 1st trigger) or gantry fault 079/011
Gene (IST, exposure): heater fault 080/001
Gene (IST, exposure): anode starter fault 080/002
Gene (IST, exposure): power failure 080/003
Gene (IST, exposure): interface fault 080/004
Gene (IST, exposure): no gantry reply timeout after 1 second 080/005
Gene (IST, exposure): gantry fault 080/006
Gene (IST, exposure): no gantry reply to exposure command 080/007
Gene (IST, exposure): no grid sync feedback after timeout 080/008
Gene: Endurance error code 082/000
ERROR CODES
Communication error Digital system 083/000
Failure before exposure: rising Synchro_Grid signal not received from Gantry (after 084/008
Graphy pushed)
Failure before exposure: rising Synchro_Grid signal not received from Gantry (after 084/009
Graphy pushed and exposure start status received from the generator driver)
Generator: PROM checksum error 090/000
Uturn before end of preshot: The exposure time for the preshot (AOP mode) is greater 097/026
than the grid motion duration until the first turnback point.
Uturn before end of exposure: The exposure time for the exposure (manual and AOP 097/027
mode) is greater than the grid motion duration until the first turnback point.
Gantry software error: VRTX error during init 100/001
Gantry interface: Reset error (see Chap. 1 Sect. 3) 101/001
Gantry interface: read/write error on timer PTM1 (see Chap. 1 Sect. 3) 101/002
49
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Gantry interface: interrupt error on DUART1 (see Chap. 1 Sect. 3) 101/006
Gantry interface: PTM1 timer 1 defective (see Chap. 1 Sect. 3) 101/007
Gantry interface: interrupt error on PTM1 timer 1 (see Chap. 1 Sect. 3) 101/013
Gantry interface: PROM checksum error 101/020
Gantry interface: unexpected interrupt received (level 2) 101/023
ERROR CODES
Gantry software error: unknown origin of task call 105/000

Gantry software error: boolean expected 105/001
Gantry software error: unknown generator grid request 105/002
Gantry software error: unknown generator request for HTPM/IPM switch 105/003
Gantry software error: unknown 1st trigger status 105/004
Gantry software error: unknown language choice requested by generator 105/005
Gantry software error: unknown generator command 105/006
Gantry software error: unknown VRTX error code 105/009
Gantry software error: unknown acknowledgement (light centering) 105/016
Gantry software error: unknown task command (light centering) 105/017
Gantry software error: unknown acknowledgement (compression) 105/020
Gantry software error: unknown task command (compression) 105/021
Gantry software error: unknown compression pedal status 105/023
Gantry software error: unknown acknowledgement (lateral collimator) 105/026
Gantry software error: unknown task command (lateral collimator) 105/027
Gantry software error: unknown acknowledgement (rear collimator) 105/030
Gantry software error: unknown task command (rear collimator) 105/031
410
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Gantry software error: unknown acknowledgement (filter wheel) 105/034

Gantry software error: unknown task command (filter wheel) 105/035
Gantry software error: unknown acknowledgement (tube angulation) 105/038
Gantry software error: unknown task command (tube angulation) 105/039
Gantry software error: unknown task command (format) 105/046
Gantry software error: unknown format 105/048
Gantry software error: unknown acknowledgement (column up/down) 105/049
Gantry software error: unknown task command (column up/down) 105/050
Gantry software error: unknown column command button status code 105/051
Gantry software error: unknown acknowledgement (arm rotation) 105/052
Gantry software error: unknown task command (compression arm rotation) 105/053
Gantry software error: unknown status code of compression arm rotation control button 105/054
Gantry software error: unknown acknowledgement (tube arm rotation) 105/055
Gantry software error: unknown task command (tube arm rotation) 105/056
Gantry software error: unknown status code of tube arm rotation control button 105/057
Gantry software error: unknown acknowledgement (grid) 105/063
Gantry software error: unknown event (grid) 105/065
ERROR CODES
Gantry software error: unknown acknowledgement (power calculation) 105/066
Gantry software error: unknown event (power calculation) 105/067
Gantry software error: unknown tube type 105/068
Gantry software error: unknown focus change code 105/069
Gantry software error: unknown filter code requested by generator 105/070
Gantry software error: unknown code for Exposure/No Exposure status management 105/071
Gantry software error: unknown exposure end code 105/072
Gantry software error: unknown Endurance code 105/073
Gantry software error: unknown Endurance event 105/074
Gantry/tube housing type configuration incompatibility (angulation/angulation) 105/080
Gantry/tube housing type configuration incompatibility (angulation/focus) 105/081
Gantry software error: column: unknown task return 106/002
Gantry software error: column: unknown task status 106/003
Gantry software error: column: unknown order transmitted to task 106/007
411
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Gantry software error: compression: too long between task calls 107/001
Gantry software error: compression: unknown task return 107/002
Gantry software error: compression: unknown task status 107/003
Gantry software error: compression: unknown order transmitted to task 107/004
Gantry software error: lateral collimator: positioning timeout 108/001
Gantry software error: lateral collimator: unknown task return 108/002
Gantry software error: lateral collimator: unknown task status 108/003
Gantry software error: lateral collimator: unknown order transmitted to task 108/006
Gantry software error: lateral collimator: unknown order transmitted to task 108/007
Gantry software error: lateral collimator: position reference value is outside tolerance 108/008
Gantry software error: rear collimator: positioning timeout 109/001
Gantry software error: rear collimator: unknown task return 109/002
Gantry software error: rear collimator: unknown task status 109/003
ERROR CODES
Gantry software error: rear collimator: unknown order transmitted to task 109/006
Gantry software error: rear collimator: unknown order transmitted to task 109/007
Gantry software error: rear collimator: position reference value is outside tolerance 109/008
Gantry software error: tube angulation: unknown task status 111/002
Gantry software error: tube angulation: unknown task return 111/003
Gantry software error: tube angulation: unknown order transmitted to task 111/006
Gantry software error: tube angulation: unknown order transmitted to task 111/007
Gantry software error: tube angulation: position reference value is outside tolerance 111/008
Gantry software error: tube angulation: task triggered by timeout 111/017
Gantry software error: filter wheel: unknown task return 112/000
Gantry software error: filter wheel: unknown task status 112/001
Gantry software error: filter wheel: 112/004
Gantry software error: filter wheel: unknown order transmitted to task 112/005
412
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Gantry software error: light centering: unknown order transmitted to task 114/000
Gantry software error: unknown setup message 117/000
Gantry setup access: generator end of exposure timeout 117/002
Gantry setup access: communication sync problem at setup access 117/003
Gantry software error: grid: task triggered by timeout (calibration time too long) 118/000
Gantry software error: grid: unknown task return 118/001
Gantry software error: grid: unknown task status 118/002
Gantry software error: grid: unknown order transmitted to task 118/005
Gantry software error: grid: unknown order transmitted to task 118/006
Grid movement: overcurrent detected 118/007
Grid movement: grid calibration time too long 118/008
Grid movement: overcurrent detected 118/009
Grid movement: invalid offset 118/010
Grid movement: invalid gain 118/011
Grid movement: limit of travel not found 118/012
ERROR CODES
Gantry software error: arm lock: unknown task return 120/000
Gantry software error: arm lock: unknown task status 120/001
Gantry software error: arm lock: unknown task status 120/002
Gantry software error: arm lock: unknown order transmitted to task 120/003
Gantry software error: rot. brake: unknown order transmitted to task 121/000
Gantry software error: rot. brake: unknown task status 121/001
Gantry software error: rot. brake: unknown task status 121/002
Gantry software error: rot. brake: unknown task return 121/003
Gantry software error: rot. brake: unknown order transmitted to task 121/004
Gantry software error: Reset triggered by Watch_dog_soft 122/007
Gantry software error: grid sensor Presence_Trame (Grid_Presence) not high or low 122/013
Gantry software error: tube housing thermal contact not high or low 122/014
Gantry: checksum error on battery saved memory 151/000
Gantry Endurance error code: synchronisation 153/075
Gantry Endurance error code: column 153/076
413
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Gantry Endurance error code: compression 153/077

Gantry Endurance error code: compression arm rotation 153/078
Gantry Endurance error code: tube housing arm rotation 153/079
Gantry Endurance error code: lateral collimator 153/080
Gantry Endurance error code: rear collimator 153/081
Gantry Endurance error code: light centering device 153/082
Gantry Endurance error code: filter 153/083
Gantry Endurance error code: grid movement 153/084
Gantry Endurance error code: tube housing angulation 153/085
Gantry Endurance error code: other function 153/086
Tube housing type/gantry configuration incompatibility (focus/angulation) 155/082
Tube housing type/gantry configuration incompatibility (focus/angulation) 155/083
Column up/down: Both end of travel sensors are closed 156/008
Column up/down: is locked in both directions (from speed measurement) 156/009
Column up/down: signal Pres_Log_Asc (Column_Soft_Pres) too long in low status 156/010
Column up/down: signal Pres_Log_Asc (Column_Soft_Pres) too long in low status 156/011
Column up/down: signal Pres_Log_Asc (Column_Soft_Pres) too long in high status 156/012
ERROR CODES
Column up/down: signals Asc_Inactif & R_On_Asc 156/013

(Column_Power_Inactive & On_Column_Return) both high
Column up/down: Pres_Log_Asc*Pres_Oper_Asc*On_Asc 156/014
(Column_Soft_Pres*Column_Operator_Pres*On_Column) = 1 & R_On_Asc
(On_Column_Return) = 0
Column up/down: Pres_Log_Asc*Pres_Oper_Asc*On_Asc 156/015
(Column_Soft_Pres*Column_Operator_Pres*On_Column) = 0 & R_On_Asc
(On_Column_Return) = 0 & Asc_Inactif (Column_Power_Inactive) = 1
Power shutdown: uncontrolled movement risk (column);Asc_Inactif & R_On_Asc 156/016
(Column_Power_Inactive & On_Column_Return) both low
Power shutdown: uncontrolled movement risk (column);Asc_Inactif 156/017
(Column_Power_Inactive) low & column defective
Power shutdown: uncontrolled movement risk (column); signal Asc_Inactif 156/018
(Column_Power_Inactive) high during init
Column up/down: signal R_On_Asc (On_Column_Return) high during init 156/019
Column up/down: direction of movement is opposite to the desired direction 156/020
Column up/down: up end of travel sensor is defective 156/021
Column up/down: down end of travel sensor is defective 156/022
Power shutdown: uncontrolled movement risk (column); R_On_Asc (On_Column_Return) 156/023
high without legal command
Column up/down: column is driven up but measured speed = 0 cm/s 156/024
414
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Column up/down: column is driven down but measured speed = 0 cm/s 156/025
Column up/down: emergency stop produced if movement continues more than 500 mS 156/027
after command release
Compression: motor slipping during reference search *** 157/005
Compression: abnormal immobility of paddle *** 157/006
Compression: loss of steps detected at reference crossing *** 157/007
Compression: abnormal step generation detected (during init) 157/008
Compression: signal Valid_Comp (Comp_Valid) cannot inhibit paddle movement (during 157/009
init)
Compression: counter used by force sensor no longer incremented *** 157/010
Compression: position sensor closed too long during compression 157/011
Compression: no reference crossing during decompression *** 157/012
Compression: signal Pres_Oper (Operator_Presence) cannot inhibit paddle movement 157/013
(during init)
Compression: signal Pres_Ajust (Comp_Adjust) too long in low status 157/014
Compression: signal Pres_Ajust (Comp_Adjust) too long in high status 157/015
Compression: signal Pres_Log_Comp (Comp_Soft_Pres) cannot inhibit paddle movement 157/016
(during init)
Compression: signal Pres_Log_Comp (Comp_Soft_Pres) too long in low status 157/017
ERROR CODES
Compression: signal Pres_Log_Comp (Comp_Soft_Pres) too long in high status 157/018
Compression: power supply problem (signal Alim_OK (Power_Supply_Active)) 157/020
Compression: phase1 & phase2 cannot be low at the same time (during init) 157/021
Compression: signal Pres_Log_Comp (Comp_Soft_Pres) high (during init) 157/022
Compression: slipping during decompression movement *** 157/023
Lateral collimator motor: loss of steps detected at reference crossing 158/009
Lateral collimator: no reference crossing during movement 158/013
Lateral collimator: optical sensor detection problem 158/017
Lateral collimator: optical sensor detection problem 158/018
Lateral collimator: slipping during collimator movement *** 158/019
Rear collimator motor: loss of steps detected at reference crossing 159/009
415
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Rear collimator: no reference crossing during movement 159/013
Rear collimator: optical sensor detection problem 159/017
Rear collimator: optical sensor detection problem 159/018
Rear collimator: slipping during collimator movement *** 159/019
Front collimator motor: loss of steps detected at reference crossing 160/009
Front collimator: no reference crossing during movement 160/013
ERROR CODES

Front collimator: optical sensor detection problem 160/017
Front collimator: optical sensor detection problem 160/018
Front collimator: slipping during collimator movement *** 160/019
Tube housing angulation: no reference crossing during movement 161/000
Tube housing angulation: loss of steps detected at reference crossing 161/009
Filter wheel: step number error between two references 162/006
416
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Filter wheel: no reference crossing during rotation 162/011
Filter wheel: in standby, wheel moved from stable position 162/012
Light centering device: signal Centreur_OK (Light_Centering_OK) too long in low status 164/001
Grid movement: power supply problem (signal Alim_OK (Power_Supply_Active)) 168/020
Interarm lock: signal Pres_Log_Ver (Lock_Soft_Pres) too long in low status 170/005
Interarm lock: signal Pres_Log_Ver (Lock_Soft_Pres) too long in high status 170/006
Power shutdown: uncontrolled movement risk (arm lock); Eta_Verrou_Off 170/007
(Lock_Power_Inactive) low during init
Power shutdown: uncontrolled movement risk (arm lock); Eta_Verrou_Off & R_On_Verrou 170/008
(Lock_Power_Inactive & On_Lock_Return) both low
Interarm lock: signals Eta_Verrou_Off & R_On_Verrou (Lock_Power_Inactive & 170/009
On_Lock_Return) both in high status
Interarm lock: R_On_Verrou (On_Lock_Return) = 0 & 170/010
Pres_Log_Ver*Pres_Oper_Ver*On_Verrou (Lock_Soft_Pres*Lock_Oper_Pres*On_Lock)
=1
Interarm lock: signal R_On_Verrou (On_Lock_Return) high without legal command 170/011
Interarm lock: signal R_On_Verrou (On_Lock_Return) high during init 170/012
ERROR CODES
Power shutdown: uncontrolled movement risk (arm lock); R_On_Verrou 170/013
(On_Lock_Return) high without legal command
Arm rot. brake: signal Pres_Log_Frein_Rot (Rot_Brake_Soft_Pres) from compression arm 171/005
too long in low status
Arm rot. brake: signal Pres_Log_Frein_Rot (Rot_Brake_Soft_Pres) from compression arm 171/006
too long in high status
Arm rot. brake: signal R_On_Frein (On_Brake_Return) high, but signal Eta_Rot_Off 171/007
(Rotat_Power_Inactive) low
Arm rot. brake: Pres_Log_Frein_Rot*Pres_Oper*On_Frein_Rot 171/008
(Rot_Brake_Soft_Pres*Operator_Present*On_Rotation_Brake) = 1 & R_On_Frein_Rot
(On_Rotation_Brake_Return) = 0
Arm rot. brake: signal R_On_Frein_Rot (On_Rotation_Brake_Return) high without legal 171/009
command
Power shutdown: uncontrolled movement risk (arm brake); Eta_Rot_Off 171/010
(Rotat_Power_Inactive) & R_On_Frein_Rot (On_Rotation_Brake_Return) are low
(Rotat_Power_Inactive) low & comp. arm defective
(Rotat_Power_Inactive) low during init
Arm rot. brake: signal R_On_Frein_Rot (On_Rotation_Brake_Return) high during init 171/013
Power shutdown: uncontrolled movement risk (arm brake); R_On_Frein_Rot 171/014
(On_Rotation_Brake_Return) high without legal command
417
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Magnification sensor: unknown magnification code 172/003

Gantry interface: arm lock temperature calculation problem 172/004
Gantry interface: Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) signal low during init 172/005
Power failure due to CPU reset *** 172/006
Gantry interface: date write error 172/007
Gantry interface: time write error 172/008
Button interlock: signal Presence_Operateur (Operator_Pres) too long in high status 172/009
Button interlock: signal Presence_Operateur (Operator_Pres) too long in low status 172/010
SID sensor: unknown SID code 172/011
Arm angulation sensor: unknown angulation code 172/012
Gantry interface: date/time function read error 172/014
Signal On_Asc (On_Column) high but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still low 172/015
Signal On_Centreur (On_Light_Centering) high but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still low 172/016
Signal On_Comp high but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still low 172/017
Signal On_Frein (On_Rotation_Brake) high but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still low 172/018
Signal On_Verrou (On_Lock) (Arm lock) high but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still low 172/019
Signal On_Trame (On_Grid) high but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still low 172/020
ERROR CODES
Signal Mot_Diaph_L_1 (Lat_Diaph_Motor_1) high but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still 172/021

low
Signal Mot_Diaph_L_2 (Lat_Diaph_Motor_2) high but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still 172/022
low
Signal Mot_Diaph_A_1 (Rear_Diaph_Motor_1) high but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still 172/023
low
Signal Mot_Diaph_A_2 (Rear_Diaph_Motor_2) high but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still 172/024
low
Signal Mot_Gaine_1 (Housing_Motor_1) high but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still low 172/025
Signal Mot_Gaine_2 (Housing_Motor_2) high but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still low 172/026
Signal Mot_Filtre_1 (Filter_Motor_1) high but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still low 172/027
Signal Mot_Filtre_2 (Filter_Motor_2) high but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still low 172/028
Signal R_Standby_Gaine (Housing_Standby_Return) high but Bouclage_OK 172/029
(Loops_OK) still low
Signal R_Standby_Filtre (Filter_Standby_Return) high but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still 172/030
low
Signal R_Standby_Diap_L (Lat_Diaph_Standby_Return) high but Bouclage_OK 172/031
Signal R_Standby_Diap_P (Rear_Diaph_Standby_Return) high but Bouclage_OK 172/032
Compression: one pedal pressed and signal Pres_Pedale (Pedal_Presence) low 172/055
418
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Compression: no pedal pressed and signal Pres_Pedale (Pedal_Presence) high 172/056

Fuse fault: signal Fuse_OK low 172/064
Power supply: ISO supply defective on 800PL4 172/065
Power supply: +15V supply defective on 800PL2 172/067
Power supply: one (or more) supplies defective on 800PL1 (except +27V) 172/068
Power microfailure detected 172/088
ERROR CODES
419
REV 3 sm 2308530100
SECTION 3
ERROR CODES: KNOWN ROOT CAUSES
071/081: Generator checksum error: check + 5.1V (see Job Card IST022) and Lithium
battery.
079/002 + 023/006: no mA measurement; change 701PL1 (kV/mA board).
157/005: check for play between compression motor axis and pulley (screw not tightened).
157/006: check for bad feedback from the compression encoder.
157/007: check for defective cable on the compression steel spring.
157/010: loss of compression feedback; a square wave should be always present between TP
14 and TP1 (0V) of 800PL2.
157/012: check cable between 800PL8 and 800PL5.
157/023: check for play between compression motor axis and pulley (screw not tightened).
158/019: check for play between collimator lateral motor axis and pulley (screw not
tightened). Possible problem with 800PL1 (Gantry power board).
ERROR CODES
159/019: check for play between collimator rear motor axis and pulley (screw not tightened).
160/019: check for mechanical play between collimator front motor axis and blade (screw
not tightened).
check for poor position of the flag in optocoupler fork.
check the calibration of front blade in IST030.
171/019 and 171/020:
reset DMR.
check for friction point in sensor; change if necessary.
If problem persists, note software version and call your OLC.
171/021 and 171/024:
reset DMR.
check sensor, connections, and board 800PL5, change if necessary.
172/006: if appearing at power on, the gantry interface board is probably defective.
420
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHAPTER 5ILLUSTRATION 2TABLE 3 SIGNAL LISTS/GLOSSARIES

SIGNAL LISTS
5i
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Page blank
SIGNAL LISTS
5ii
REV 3 sm 2308530100
GLOSSARY
ENGLISH/FRENCH
GENERATOR (GENERATEUR)
SIGNAL LISTS
51
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Page blank
SIGNAL LISTS
52
REV 3 sm 2308530100
SIGNAL NAME NOM DU SIGNAL

FROM TO
(GENERATOR) (GENERATEUR)

& $ !

&

&(!%$ ! !

&($"

&(&(#%!!' !

!
&(($

&(#$"$"( !
!

&((%"

&(#$"$"( !
!

&( %!
&),- & !% $ %#
&(*& ! &
&(+ ! &

&
!

&

&
!

&

&(
!

&(&$$%"
&!% & !

&!% &
&(&(#%!!' !
!

&(($
& &
! & &
&
!

&
&"
!
!

&"
&
&"
!
&" &
&& ! &
&
!
!

&&
& &
&&
!

! &&

& ! !

&

& !
&
&("&"#

&("&"# ! !
&("&"#
&

&(!%$ ! !

&($"

&(&(#%!!' !

!
&(($
&),- & !% $ %#
SIGNAL LISTS
&(&* ! &
&(&+ ! &
& &
! & &
& ! &
&
! &
&
!

&
&&
!
!

&&
&(
&
!

&(
&
&(
&
!

&(
&
&(& !
! &(&
&( #
!

! &(!%!$"
&!% !
&!%
53
REV 3 sm 2308530100

FROM TO
(+$($% # # (+$($%
(+!
#

((!&&'$
(+!&$*
#

#
(+%&&
(+&$+#&"$
#

# (+#+'
(+!#'&(#'#& # #

(+!&$
(+#+(
#
#
(+(
(+,( #
(
(+(+%'##* # (+ +&
(+- # (
(+ !+%'##*
#

# (+ +#'%%
(+#%+ #

#
(+#%+
(+#%+ #
#
(+#%+
(+$%

#
(+$%

(+% #

!+(

+,/+$"&"$++ #

+,/+

(
( #' !"& '%

+#+(
#
#

(+(

(
#
(

((
#

((

(+&$+#&"$
#

#
(+#+'

(+ !+#")$
#

#
(+ +#'%%

(+"!%"
#

#
(+#'#&$

(+!&$*
#

#

(+%&&

+ /+$"&"$ #

+ /+
($ !($&$
# # ($
SIGNAL LISTS
+$# #
#
+&"'$%
+$# #
#
&
,(+ #
#
,(+ ,(+!+ ++++++++
,(++ #
#
,(+ ,(+!+ +
(+!#'& # #

(+!&$
( !($&$ #

# (
+!(+'$$!& # # ++"!

+!(+'$$!& # #
++"!
$&"!
#

# #$%+$&"!
'&"+*+m. # '&"+%+m.
'&"+#")$+"!
#
'&"+ %&
'&"+$! #
'&"+$!
54
REV 3 sm 2308530100

FROM TO
# #

# #
# #
# #
#

#
# %
# !

# ! #
# %
# !

# # ##
# # ##
# #
# # %
##

#

#
# !
#
## #
## #
## #
# # #
#
# #
## #

#
#
#

SIGNAL LISTS
# #
# #
# #
# #
#
#
# #

" %
#
#
# $ # $
#
#
#
#
55
REV 3 sm 2308530100

FROM TO
)#
)#
)#

)#
)#
)#
)#

)#
)"
!"#)$
$) ! )!*
) ! )! (

##!

##$!
##!)

#!)##$!
##!)

)##$!
$ %)#$)##!(
)"$%) %
$%

) %

)
$##!() ##!)
$! !
$!
!
$! !
$!
!

$!() ) )!")
$!()
)
)!")
$!())
)!")
$!' !'
$#
"! #
$# "! #

$#
#

$#"#) )
)#"#)
$#"#)
)
)#"#)
SIGNAL LISTS
$#"#))
)#"#)
$#"#)) )#"#) # $"
$!!#)"
!"#)$!#
)#

)#
)#

)#
)#)
)#
)#
)#
)#
)#
)#
)#
&$#)#

) #
"!)!""#!
!)!
56
REV 3 sm 2308530100

FROM TO
%& ! "&&
#&! #&!
$ "&!& #%!& &
$ "&!& #%!& &
$ "&
&
$ "&!$
! &$
$ "&!&$
! & &$
$'

&&
&&&&&

&&
&&!&#& & "&#
&&!&$& & "&$
&&!& & "&
&&!&&! & "&
& !&# &&#
& !&$ &&$
& &!&&! &&
& "! "&
& "!& &&
& "!& &&
!& "!%
"&"!
!& "!%
"&
!%&%& !&
& !!&
!& &!!
%
%&"!! "!&
SIGNAL LISTS
%&"!!
"!&

&
&

!& &"
!& &"
!& &"
!&"
"&"
!&"!& &
57
REV 3 sm 2308530100

FROM TO
" ''#"#"
! "
" '"' "''#
" '"'
"' '#
" '!# "'
!# ''#
" '!# "'
!# ' '#
" ' ! !'#
" ' ! !'#
!'#)
" ' '
'
" ' ' !'#'
!'#)
" ' '
'$
" ' '
!'#'
" ' #!" #"' #'
"'# "'!# ' !''
"'!'" "' "
"'!'" "
"'!'"'
"' '
"'!'"'
"' '
"'!'"' '"'
" "
"' "'
"''
"''
"''
"''
"' "'
"' '
"' '
SIGNAL LISTS
"' '

"' '
$ " '
$' '
$
$ " '
#"'
$'# "'% ''%
$'# "'!# " !''
$''% ''%
$'!#&' '#!!'
$'!#&'
'#!!'
$'!#&' '#!'
$'!#&''
'#!!''
$'!#&''
'#!!''
($'
#"'($
58
REV 3 sm 2308530100

FROM TO
*&)" )
%$)*&)
)%$)*&) %$
*&)" )
*&)
*&)" )
%$)*&)
)%$)*&) %$
*&)" )
*&)
*&)'

*&)'
*&)')
*&)')
*&)')
)*&)') *&)')
*&)')
*&)')
*&)')
)*&)') *&)')
*&)#%"$
#%")*&
*&)""
#)*&
*&)"!%#$ %$)"%
*&)"!%#$) %$)"%)
*&)"!%#$) %$)"%)
##)$)*&)
*&))) *&)
##)$)*&)
*&)))
##)$)*&)
*&))) *&)
##)$)*&)
*&))) *&
"$
) ) )*&))
) ) )*&)
)*&)
)*&) )
)*&)
)*&) )
&)#% ()) %$))$
SIGNAL LISTS
+ +
#) "# "#)#$%"
$)"$" $"$
+# +#
+)
+) #%")+)
+))
+) #%")+)
+) ' & %$ "$%")+
+)'

+)'
+)') +)')
+)')
+)')
+)#%"$)
#%")+) +
+)#%"$)
#%")) +)
59
REV 3 sm 2308530100

FROM TO
)*%)#"#
#"#)*%)%
)#)"$!#' "$)!##!
))*%
*%)%
)#)$##
%'#)
)$##
#$)
)#)$##
%'#)
%!)## "$!!)##
")

!#! ")
"))"$!#
"$!)")
")

!#! ")
")

!#! ")
")
)"$!#
"$!)")

" "
&!
$""
&!)#!)$!!#
$"")$!#)
&!) "#
&!))! $!#
)"#
&!))&#
###)"#
&!)"$') !"))
&!)"$') !!#))
&!)"$') )
&!)"$')!" !")
&!)"$') !")
&!)"$') !")
SIGNAL LISTS
&!)"$')!") !"))

!)$## $#)!
!)$##
$#)!
!$#)#$# #)$#)!$
!$#)#)$# #$#)!$
!')) )!")%'#

!) "
!')) )!")%'#

!) "
!"#)
+ !()
+
!##)!" !")!##
!##)!" !")!##
!##)#%
!"))#
510
REV 3 sm 2308530100

FROM TO
# % #* !
!
#*&#
# % #* % &##%*!# !
!#$* &#%* %&#
# % #* '#&##%* !
!

$&#**
# % #* '#&##%* !
!

$&#**
# % #* '# *%% !
$&#%*#*
# % #* '#*&##%*,
!

%%*$&#%*
%%
# % #*$&!!)* !
&% **
#( !
!
#(
#(#% # $ $ !
#(*#%&# #(
#( $# ! !
#(
#(#% # $ $ !
#(*#%&# #(
#(*# $# ! !
#(*#$
#(*(! $&# !
! ! $*#(
#(*#"&#% ! #(*
#(*#$

$#' %#$ !
#(*#$

$%) ! $&#%

$&#%)*#* !
! %&#*$&
$&#%)*#* !
! %*$&
$%
! $ '

$"&* ! *$"&
$"&#*&##% !
*##
$#*+'* !

! $#* $#*'*
$#*+'* !

! $#* $#*'
$#*+'* $#*+'*
$#*+'* $#*+'*
SIGNAL LISTS
$%#%#*#'* !
*% &#
$%# *+'* $%# *+'*
$%# *+'* !

! $%# * $%# *+'*
$%# *+'* $%# *+'*
$%# *+'* !

! $%# * $%# *+'*
$) !
$)
$)# *# !
$)# *#$
$)*# % #* !
#**$)
%!#*#*%*%(
!
%%*$&!*%(
%!#*$$*%*%(
!
%%**%(
%$%*
+' ! %$%*
+'
511
REV 3 sm 2308530100

FROM TO
$"
$"#$$

$"#$$
#'$
$"#$$

$"#$$
$*"*$*,

$*#% *,
$"* *$"
%* #$*
$"*

#$*
$"*
*$"
%* #$*
$"* $"*

$"* * $"* *
$"*

$"*
$"*
* $"* *
$"*
*
$"*
*
$"*
*
$"*
*
$( #"
$(
$(*"$"# #
$(*"$%" $(
$( #"
$(
$(*"$"# #
$(*"$%" $(
$(*" #"
$(*"#
$(*"#

#"& $" #
$(*"#

$*##*$*,

$**,
&
&
&

&
&*" )
&*"
&* "
&* "
& & & &
&
&
SIGNAL LISTS
&

&
'$*#$$

$$$*#$
'"

%$
*( #%" * #
*$*&"
*#%""*$
*&*#% )*
*%$**$
* *+&*$#$ *$#$*+&*&
* *"%$$"

**%
*&"*%""$*$$
*#%"$*"*
* '"**"!%"$ **#$
*$"*

**
512
REV 3 sm 2308530100
GLOSSARY
ENGLISH/FRENCH
GANTRY (STATIF)
SIGNAL LISTS
513
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Page blank
SIGNAL LISTS
514
REV 3 sm 2308530100
NOM DU SIGNAL
SIGNAL NAME (GANTRY) FROM TO
(STATIF)
#
)&"
#

)-)-

&" # #

&" #

) #
#

) #

) # #
) #
&" # #
&" #

&" # #

&" #
) #
# #
) #
#
'%-&'!+ # #

&'!+-'%
"(&!-&'!+ # #

&'!+-!
'-#-&'!+ # #

&'!+-#-
%%-#-&'!+- # #

&'!+-#-
)-&'%"'* #

&'%"'* )-&'%
) #
!"' (& #

#
) #
!"! ('&
) # !"' (&

) # !"! ('&
)
) "! #
#

#

)
) #
. -&, #

# "% '-
* -&,- # "% '- -
) #
)
)-% #
)-%
)- " "%& #
)- %'& "$(&
)-"( ! #
)-&
)-" # #
)-" #
)- #

# )-
)-*' *'%! #
# )-*'
SIGNAL LISTS
)-% #
)-'%
)-'-!'%! #
)-!'%
)-" #
)-)%%"(
)-# #
)-#
)-&'##% #
)-##
)-&'%"'* #
&'%"'* )-&'%
)*' *'%! #

# )*'
)- " "%& #

# )-
)-&'%"'* &'%"'* #

)-&'%
% -&+!%" # # &+!%"-%&
% -''-/ #

# !!-%
% -''-/- # !!-%-
515
REV 3 sm 2308530100
NOM DU SIGNAL
(STATIF)
'!!'
'
'!!'' ''
'!!'
'
'!!'' ''
'!!' '
'!!'' ''
'" "'
''" ''!
"&&'
'"&&
!' '
'
!' '
' '
!!'!! ' '
!!'!! ' ' !!
'' ''
'' ''
' !!% !!%
' !
'"

'"
'" '"
"''
' '
"''
' '
"'

"'''

' ''
"'''!
' ''
"'''

' ''
"'''!

' ''
SIGNAL LISTS
"'" "'

"'" '
"'! !'
"'! ! !'
"'! ! !'
"' ''' ' ''
"' ''' ' ''
"'$'!#
'!
"'$'(
'!'
!#'
"'$ $'
"' !' ''
516
REV 3 sm 2308530100
NOM DU SIGNAL
(STATIF)
!& *' "
'*$
!! *#!& *"!(+
"
"
!& *$$*"&$$
#*!#
!"* "

!"*
!"*
"

!"*
!"*&$%*"#$ "
"#$*&$%*!"
!"** "
*!"*
!"*&## %*#*'+
"
% $**!"
&*
!"*&## %*'&* "
% $* *!"
!"*&## %*'&*
"
% $*
*!"
!"*&## %*'&* "
% $**!"
!"*#%! "
$ $*!"
!"*#!& "

" $$*!"
!"*'%*' "

'*'%*!"
!"*! * " !"*! *
!"*! *
" !"*! *
!"*!"#%!#*"#$ "

"#$*!"*!"
!"*" "
"
"*!"
!"*"$
"
!%!# "
"$*!"*

!"*"$* " !%# " "$*!"*
!"*"$*
"
!%!# "
"$*!"*

!"*"$*
" !%!# " "$*!"*
!"*"#$ *" "
"#$*"*!"
!"*#*#!& "
" $$*! $ *!"
!"*#*"* "
" ! $ *!"*
SIGNAL LISTS
!"*#*"*
"
" ! $ *!"*
$&#%*!" !%
!"*$%)
&$
!"*$%)* $&#%*!"*
!"*$!%*"#$ "

"#$*!*!"
!"*$"*! "

!*""*!"
!"*$&"") ' ' "

" *!" ' '
!"*' "

"& '*%&*%%#) "
*$&'* '
"& #$$ &$ " "

"& #$$ &$ " "

"& #$$ &$ " "

517
REV 3 sm 2308530100
NOM DU SIGNAL
(STATIF)
!% "## %# ! !

!%
"## %# ! !

!% "## %# ! !

!% "## %# ! !

!% "## %# ! !

!% "## %# ! !

!% "## %# ! !

!% "## %# ! !

!% "## %# ! !

!%$$"'( ! $$"(
!% ) ! )
!% ) ! )
!%) ! )
!%"
"
"&(
!%"
"
"&!
!%"

"

"&!
!%"'( ( ! ("#(
!%"'(
( !
("#(
!%"'(( !

("#(
!%$
$
$&(
!%$
$
$&!
!%$#$( ( !
($#$(
!%$#$(
( !
($#$(
!%$#$(( !

($#$(
!%$#$(( $ %# ! ($#$( %$#
SIGNAL LISTS
!%( $ %# !

!
(
!%( $ %# !
!
(
!%( $ %# !
!
(
!%( $ %# !
!
(
!%(
$ %# !
!
(
!%(
$ %# !
!
(
!%( $ %# !

!
(
!%( $ %# !
!
(
!%( $ %# !
!
(
!%( $ %# !
!
(
!%( $ %# !
!
(
!%( $ %# !
!
(
518
REV 3 sm 2308530100
NOM DU SIGNAL
(STATIF)
!%( $ %#
!
! (
!((
! ( !(

!("$
! ##( !
!(!
!
! !( !
"'(#$ !("'
!
! "#( %!(!

(#$" $ %# (#$" $ %#
$"(! #("
!
! "(! #($"
($"(&
$"(( %#(#%!!'
!
!
&
$"(" %("$%"
!
! "$ %"(##($"(
$"( $ "(
!
! $($"(
$"( $ "(("$%"
! "( $($"(

$"( $ "(
!
! $($"(
$"( $ "(("$%"
! "( $($"(

$"(!#(
! $ " ! !#($"(
$"(!#(
! $ " ! !#($"(
$"(!#( ! $ " ! !#($"(
$"(!#(
! $ " ! !#($"(
$"(! #("
!
! "(! #($"
$"(! #("(
! "(! #($"(

$"(#$'("$%"
! "(#$'($"
$"(#$(" %
!
! ##(#$($"
$"(#%!!'
!
! ($" & &

"("
!
! #( "
"(" &
!
! #( "
" $(!( $((")

! "( $(!(&(
SIGNAL LISTS
$%"
" $(!( $((")

! "( $(!(&(

$%"
" $(!( $ "(
!
! $(!(&(
" $(!( $ "(
!
! $(!(&(
" $
" $(!(!#(
! !#(!(&(
$ "
" $
" $(!(!#(
! !#(!(&(
$ "
" $
" $(!(!#(
! !#(!(&(
$ "
" $
" $(!(!#(
! !#(!(&(
$ "
519
REV 3 sm 2308530100
NOM DU SIGNAL
(STATIF)
#! %*"*"!$*# "
" #*"!$*"*'
#! %*"*$% ) " "
$% )*"*'
#! %*"*$% +
"
#*$% )*"*'
)*#%&#
#! %*"*$&"") " "
*"*' ' '
&$*! "

"
&$*!
&$*! "
&$*!*
# " %#
#*# "

#*%#
#*!"*#!& *#+
" "

#%!&#*$$*!"*%#
%&#
#*!%!# "
# !%!# !%*%#
#*!%!# "
# !%!# !%*%#
#*! *#!& " "

$$*! *%#
#*"!$%! "

"

"!$*%#
#*"!$%! *#!& "

"

$$*"!$*%#
#*"#$ "

" "#$ *%#
#*"#$ * "
"#$ *%#*
#*## " "

! $ *%#
#*#*#!& " "

$$*! $ *%#
#*$%!" " " &%*%#
#*$%!"* " &%*%#*
!&$ *"!$*# "
" #*"!$*
!&$ *!%!#*
" "

!%* *
!&$ *!%!#*
*#+
"

#*!%* *
%&#
!&$ *!%!#* " "

!%* *
SIGNAL LISTS
!&$ *!%!#**#+

"

#*!%* *
%&#
!&$ *"$*
"

!%!# "
"$* *

!&$ *"$*
"

!%!# "
"$* *

!&$ *"$* "

!%!# " "$* *
!&$ *"$* "

!%!# " "$* *
!&$ *"!$*# "
" #*"!$*
!&$ *"!$*#* " #*"!$* *
!&$ *"!(# " "

* ' '
!&$ *$% )*#+
"

#*$% )*
%&#
!&$ *$%*#!& " "

$$*$%*
520
REV 3 sm 2308530100
NOM DU SIGNAL
(STATIF)
! * #
'"*## " "

%"
#*"*"!$*"*
" " *"!$*"!%
#*"*"!$*"* " "

*"!$*"!%
#*"*"!$*"*
" "
*"!$*"!%
!'
#*"*"!$*"** " *"!$*"!%*
#*"*"!$*"*

" " *"!$*"!%

!'
#*"*"!$*"*
* " *"!$*"!%
*
$!*$&"")*"#$ "
"
"#$**$!
$!*$&"")*%$% "
"
%$%**$!
%*"*"!$*# ' "
" #*"!$*"*
%*"*!%!#*
" "

!%*"**
%*"*!%!#* " "

!%*"**
%*"*!%*
*#%&# "

#*!%*"**
%*"*!%**#%&# "

#*!%*"**
%*"*"$*
"

! !%!# "$*"**

%*"*"$*
"

! !%!# "$*"**

%*"*"$* "

! !%!# "$*"**
%*"*"$* "

! !%!# "$*"**
%*"*"!$*# "
" #*"!$*"*
%*"*"!$*#* " #*"!$*"**
%*"*$% )*#+ #*$% )*"*
"

%&#
%*"*$%*#!& " "

$$*$%*"*
%*"*$&"") " "

*"* ' '
SIGNAL LISTS
%* %# " %#&#
%* %# "

%# & %#&#
%* %# "

%# & %#&#
%* %# * "
" %#&#*& &(
%* %# ** " %#&#*& &(*
%* %#+
" "

$$* %#&#
*#!&
%* %# *! "

"
%#&#*!
%* %# *!* "
%#&#*!*
#%!&#*$$* +
%*#!& *#%&# " "

%#&#
! "

! '##!&
521
REV 3 sm 2308530100
NOM DU SIGNAL
(STATIF)
#"
%
%#"
% #"
%%
%#"%
%" "%#"
%" %#"
%$%!#
!%#"%
% !% %%#"
%# #%#"
% "%
%% "%%
! %
! %
!% %
!%% %%
!%% %%
!%% %%
%" ! %"
%
%
% %
!%% !%%
!%%%!" %!%%
!%% !%%
!%%%!" %!%%
%" %
SIGNAL LISTS
%"%!" %%

%
%
%%!" %%
% %!
%%!" %%!
%! ! %!"
%!%!%&
%%!"
!"
% %#"
%%!" %%#"
%!!% %%!
%!!%%&
%%%!
!"
522
REV 3 sm 2308530100
NOM DU SIGNAL
(STATIF)
"#$&"$ #$%!&+
#
# #$%+"#+$
"#$&"$+#$%!&
# #$%+"#$
"#$&"$+#$%!&

#
# #$%+"#+$
+&
"$+'%+
#
"'+
#+#"%+$
(
#
# $+#"%+#"&
#+#"%+#+
#
# #"%+#"&
#+#"%+#+
(
#
# #"%+#"&
#+#"%+#++
# #"%+#"&+
#+#"%+#+
#
# #"%+#"&
#+#"%+#+
(
#
# #"%+#"&
#+#"%+#++
# #"%+#"&+
#+#"%+$
#
# $+#"%+#"&
#+#"%+$+
# $+#"%+#"&+
#+" '!
#
# " '!+#
(
#+#$%!
#
# #$%+#
#++" #+'$,

# +#%+
$!&+ %
#++" #+'$,

# +#%+
$!&+ %
%+&# +# $%
# (+# + %+
#
#
%'$
# (+# + %+
#
# $%+ %'$

"!%!+&# " ,
# (+$$!
#
#
!
#")$+$+"
# #")+&$ +"

#")$+$+"+
#
#")+&$ +"+
SIGNAL LISTS
#")$+%'##*+&(
#
#
+" ( (
#")$+%'##*+&(+
#
+"+
#+" #+
# #+" #+
#+" #+
# #+" #+
#+" #+
# #+" #+
#+" #+
# #+" #+
$$ #+%'##*+
#
# +#+ ( (

$$+#+#"%+$+
(
#
# $+#"%+#+
$$+ + &+# %'#, +#++ (

#
#
#* (
$$+#+$"'!+$,

#
# $&"'$+ %%+#+
&'$!
523
REV 3 sm 2308530100
NOM DU SIGNAL
(STATIF)
""*!* $ "*
! !

$*!**
""*!* $ "* ! !

$*!**
""*!* $*
*",
!
"* $*!**
$%"
""*!* $**",
!
"* $*!**
$%"
""*!*!#*
!

$ " !#*!**

""*!*!#*
!

$ " !#*!**

""*!*!#* !

$ " !#*!**
""*!*!#* !

$ " !#*!**
""*!*! #*" !
! "*! #*!*
""*!*! #*"** ! "*! #*!**
""*!*#$)*",
!

"*#$)*!*
$%"
""*!*#$*" % ! !

##*#$*!*
" $$ *" !

" "*" $
" $$ *" !

" "*" $
" $$ *"*& ! &*"*" $
" $$ *! '"*,
!
$*&"" %* *
$&*
" $$*! '"*$& !

!
$*" $*
" $$*! '"*$&* !
$*" $* *
" $*"* ! "*" $
" $*"** ! *"*" $*
" $*"**" *
!
! *"*" $*"

" $*"*" % ! !

##*"*" $
SIGNAL LISTS
" $*"* * % ! !

"$ %"*&"" %*"*
" $*"*# $*!"# ! !"#* *"*" $
"(! !$$& ! !

"(! "

"(! !$$& ! !

"(! "
"(* !$#" ! ! "(* "

#* & ! ! *
#* * ++ ! ! * ++
#* * ! * *
#*
& ! ! *

#*
*
++ ! ! *

++
#*
* ! *
*
#* & ! ! *
524
REV 3 sm 2308530100
NOM DU SIGNAL
(STATIF)
#++ ,, ! ! + ,,
#++ ! ++
#+ & ! ! +
#++
,, ! ! +
,,
#++ ! ++
+ "$+ -
##++ !
$ "
+ "$ -
#*+ !
!
$ "
# $++#$"$+ -
! #$"$+ +#
%+
# $++#$"$+ ! ! #$"$+ + !
# $++#$"$+ ! #$"$+ +&"" %
# $++#$"$+" $+"
! #$"$+ +"+" $

#$" $(+%$ "*-
#$" $( !
%$ "#$ +#$" $(
$
#$" $(+%$ "*- %$ "#$ +#$" -
!

$ + $(+
#$" $(+#%!!)+!"#-
! !"#++#$"

$!"+ %#+#$) !
! #%+
$!"+ %#+#-
! #%++
$)+
$#$+ %+#$ !# ! $#$+%$+#
$%+"+#$"++"-
!

! "$ %"+##+"
$%"
$(! !$$& ! !

$(! $

$(! !$$& ! !

$(!
SIGNAL LISTS
$(++ !$#" ! ! $(+ $

% +" !

% +$"
& & !
!

& & !
& !
&
'
+" %+"$%" !
! "$ %"+##+'

'
+" %+"$%" !
! "$ %"+##+'

+
&+" ! ! +%$+
&
+
&+" ! ! +%$+
&
+&+" ! !
+%$+&
+ %+ '"+#$ !+ '" $ !
+%$+#+#+
525
REV 3 sm 2308530100
NOM DU SIGNAL
(STATIF)
"" "#

""

""""
" """
"" !
" !"
""
""
"" "
" ""
"" "
""
"" "
""
""#

""""
" "
""#

""""
"
" "!"
""
"" "

""
SIGNAL LISTS
526
REV 3 sm 2308530100
GLOSSAIRE
FRANAIS/ANGLAIS
GENERATEUR (GENERATOR)
SIGNAL LISTS
527
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Page blank
SIGNAL LISTS
528
REV 3 sm 2308530100
NOM DU SIGNAL SIGNAL NAME

ORIGINE DESTINATION
(GENERATEUR) (GENERATOR)

& $ !

&

&(($ !

!
&(&(#%!!'

&((%" !
!

&(#$"$"(

&( %! !
!

&(#$"$"(

&($" ! !

&(!%$
& !% $ %# &),-
& ! &(*&
& ! &(+

&
!

&

&
!

&

&(&$$%"
!

&(
&!% & !

&!% &
&(($ !
!

&(&(#%!!'
&($" ! !

&(!%$
& &
! & &
&
!

&
&"
&
!
!

&"
&" &
!
&"
&&
!

! &&
&&
& &
!
!

&& ! &
&

& !
&

&
&("&"# !
&

&(($ !

!
&(&(#%!!'

&("&"#
& ! !
&("&"#

&($" ! !

&(!%$
SIGNAL LISTS
& !% $ %# &),-
& ! &(&*
& ! &(&+
& &
! & &
&&$$%"
!

&(
&

( ! !%&

(
& ! &
&
! &
& !
&(*&
&
!

&
& ! &(+
&&
!
!

&&
529
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ORIGINE DESTINATION
'* ' "
'* '
'* ' "
'* '
'* '
" " '* '
'**% " '*'*$&"")
'**"&$$ " " '* *$&"")
'*"*& " " '*%#*"%!#
'*"& "
'"&
'*#'#$ "
" '*#'#$
'* %# " " '* "&%!'"&"%
'*"$*
" " '*"$*
'*"$*

" " '*"$*
'*"&"%# " " '*! $!

'*#$
" '*#$

'*$%% " " '* %#)
'*' "
"
'*"*'
*+,* "
*+,*#!%!#**
' "& !% &$ '
'*' "
"
*"*'
' " '
'' "
''
'**"&$$ " " '* *"!(#
'*"*& " " '*%#*"%!#
'*"&"%# " " '*! $!
'*$%% " " '* %#)
*,* " *,*#!%!#
SIGNAL LISTS

'# "

"
'# '#%#
*%!&#$ " " *#"
+'* +'* ********* "
" +'*
+'* +'* ** "
" +'**
'
" " ' '#%#
**!
" " * '*&## %
**!
" " * '*&## %
*"&$$*! " " '*$&"")*!
*"&$$*!* "
" '*$&"")*!*
*"&$$*!* "
" '*$&"")*!*
*"&$*! " " '*$&"")*!
530
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ORIGINE DESTINATION
$%)#$)#*
)"$%)%

#!'
!!#))

&!)"$')
###)"# &!))&#
$#))#
%)"$'))
$#))
!#!)"$')
$#)")
m"
$#)')
m"
$#)

$#)"
$#)"# $#)&!)
$#)
%!#!)
$#)!$
%)! $"#
$#)!$)
%)! $"#)
$#)!$)
%)! $"#)
$#)!$)
#!)! $"#
$#)!
$#)!
##!)
$##!')

)%
%)"
)#
)#)"#!#!
)#
)#)"#!#!
)#
)# )"#!#!
)#

)#
)"#!#!
)#
)#)"#!#!
)#

)#)"#!#!
$#)!

!')$##
$#)!

!')$##
SIGNAL LISTS
$#)!

!)$##
$#)!

!)$##

)#
)#
)#
)#
)#
)#
)#

)#
)#

)#
)#

)#
)##$! ##!)
!#(*
)!!
#)
531
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ORIGINE DESTINATION
)"#)

%"())
)"#)

%"() )
)"#)

%"()
)
)$
)$
)$ )$
)$

)$
)$ )$

)$
)$
)$ )$
)$#$)

%$#$))
)$#$)

%$#$) )
)$#$)

%$#$)
)
)$#$) $ %# %$#$))
"$
%)%
$")
%) #$) $"))$"
%) #$) $") )$"
%$)*&
*&)"
%$)*&)
*&)" )
%$)*&)
*&)" )
)$$#
$)
'+
) )
#)") )")
)
'+
) ) # #)") )")
)
SIGNAL LISTS
) "#$ #)

)"#)&($ "())

# "
)"#)&($ "())

# "
%) " )" ) " )" (
#)%)
$")")

#)%) &
$")")
$)%"+
#))""
"$)#!%")"
#)*&
*&)""
#)%) $")")
532
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ORIGINE DESTINATION
% % %%

% %
%% $%
% %
% %
% %%
% %
%
%
% %

% "% $%
%% %%%
"%% &
%

%!% &
% %
%
"

%
%
# %
! !%
%%! % %!
%% # % % #
%% %%&
%%

% % !% $%
% %! %% %!%
%&
SIGNAL LISTS
% % #
% % #%
% % %% %
%% %%&
% %

% %
%%
% %
% %!%

%
%
%
% % $
% % $
% % $
533
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ORIGINE DESTINATION
#))$ #!)#)
#))! ")#)
#) )$
#!)#)
#) )! ")#)
!
!(

) )
!)+ )+
)!! " $!)$!!#
) #!)$!!#)"
)# &$#)#
# #
#) #)
#))
#))
#))
#))
#) #)
#) )
#) )
#) )
#) )
))' %))'
))' %)$!!#)'
*%)))
"")#)*%)
*%))) *%)
"")#)*%)
SIGNAL LISTS
*%))) *%

"")#)*%)
*%))) *%)
"")#)*%)
*%)'

*%)'
*%)')
*%)')
*%)')
*%)')
*%)%
))*%
#$!)"$
"$!#()!)
#)"$ #$!)"$
"$!#()!)
) )*%)) )
) )*%) )
)*%) )
)*%)
)*%) )
)*%)
534
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ORIGINE DESTINATION
* *
(#
" (
(#
" (
(#
" (
((!'
!'( " (
(

!(
( !"

!(
*! *!
*( !# (*(
*(
*( !# (*(
*((
*(&

*(&
*(&( *(&(
*(&(
*(&(
! !
" (!# +
!# ((#

"(
" (!# +
!# ( (#

"(
!# ( (!# "
!# ()$
)$(!# "
!# (*( *
*(!# "(
!# (*( *(
*(!# "(
!# (!(
!((!# "
!# (!(

!(
(!# "
!# ( !" !(!# "
!# (!"#

!(!# "
SIGNAL LISTS
!(( (!# "(
!(( (!# "(
$(# "(!# +
!((
"
!" % (
(#
" (
!(

" !(
!(

" !(
!(

" !(
!"(
" (

535
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ORIGINE DESTINATION
&$+-$ 0
"! -%&&-
"

"

+-%&!"-
"!$%&! -!' "
!! -%
"!$%&! -!'$ & "
'$$ &-%
"!%-$* "
" $*-*"!%'$
"$%-$&!
"

" $&!
"$% - "
"

"!)$-%'""+-"$% &
"$% -' "
"

&$-"$%
"$% -"!$%&! "
"

%-"$%
"$% -$!&&! "
"

$!&&! -"$%
"$%-
"
"!)$-%'""+-"$%
"$%-
"
"

"!)$-%'""+-!
"$%--
"
" "!)$-%'""+-"$%-
"$%--
"
" "!)$-%'""+-
"$%-' "
"

&$-"$%
$!&!$-!& '$0
"$%-!'$ &-!&'$ "

$ &-"$
"$%- -&
"

" $!&!$-&(
"$%-"!$ "
"

%-$#'
"$%-$!&& "
"

$!&&! -"$%
"$%-%&'$
"
%-"$%
"'%% " "!)$
"!)$-&$-'$0
"'%% -!'$ &- "
$ &
$ " "'$
$
" "'$
$ " "'$
SIGNAL LISTS
$
" "'$

$,-/
"
$%&-/
$-(
"
($&$-(-$
$&!'$-. "
*
( ' & .-
$* "
"
$*
$* "'$*
$* $&!$! 0
$*- $&'$ $* "

%!%
$* " "
$* %$
$* $&!$! 0
$*- $&'$ $* "

%!%
$*-$% " "
$*-$ %$
536
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ORIGINE DESTINATION
#)+ ! #)+#"&#%
#)+#$

$#'%-
#)+#$

!

#$
#+#
! $#+#$$% #
$&#% ! $%*
$&#%+! #$% ! $+$%*
$&+ " ! !

%+$&#%*
$&+ "&% ! !

%+$&#%*
$&+#%%#! ! !

+%+$&#%*
$ '

! $%
$ #% !
%#++ &%!&%
$#+ $#+,'+ !

! $#+,'+
$#+ $#+,' !

! $#+ ,'+
$#+,'+ $#+,'+
$#+,'+ $#+,'+
$%# + $%# +,'+ !

! $%# +,'+
$%# + $%# +,'+ !

! $%# +,'+
$%# +,'+ $%# +,'+
$%# +,'+ $%# +,'+
$&##+%% !
'# +%%
# % #+ '# +-
$&#%+#+ !

%%
$&#++ !
!

# % #+ '#&##%+
$&#++ !
!

# % #+ '#&##%+
$* !
$*
$*# +#$ !
$*# +#
SIGNAL LISTS
%
! !&%
$#
% ! !&% $#
%
! !&%

% !
!
+#!
%!$+! $+) !
!
)! $&#+%+)
%$%+
' ! %$%+
'
%$%+,'+' ! +,'+%$%
%-
%%++%)
!

!#+$$+%+%)
%!#+-
%%+$&!+%)
!

#+%+%)
%#
%# $%%
!

%# $%%
$(%
537
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ORIGINE DESTINATION
#!"##

#!"##
#$#(!$
!$#(#($#
#($#(!$
!$#(#$#
#$(

($##
# "(&

& "$!(#&
#!

#("(#
#!( #!(
#!( ( #!(
(
#!( ( #!( (
#!(

#!(
#!(
(
#!(
(
#!(
(
#!(
(
#&
#& "!
#&(!#!*
#&(!#$! #&

" "
#&
#& "!
#&(!#!*
#&(!#$! #&

" "
#&(!"
#&(! "!
#&(!"

"!% #!
#&(!"

"
#(()

#(""(#()
#(! #!

#("(#
#(!( #("(# (
#(!( #("(# (
#("$ ()

#(!(#()
%
%
SIGNAL LISTS
%

%
%(!
%(! '
%( !
%( !
% % % %
%
%
%

%
%'#(

(#($##
%'#(

(#($##
%'#( "(

& "$!(#(
%'#( "(

& "$!(#(
($#((#
(%("$ '(
538
REV 3 sm 2308530100

ORIGINE DESTINATION
%! %&"% ! &"%
&"%%
%! %&"% ! &"%
&"%%
%#%%!'
%%

%% % %
%%! %%!
%&"%$% &"%$%
&"%$%
%&"%$% &"%$%
&"%$%
% %$!
% %"'
%!%

%"%! %'
%! %%

% %&"%"
% %&"%
SIGNAL LISTS
539
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Page blank
SIGNAL LISTS
540
REV 3 sm 2308530100

SIGNAL LISTS
541
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Page blank
SIGNAL LISTS
542
REV 3 sm 2308530100
DESTINA
NOM DU SIGNAL (STATIF) ORIGINE SIGNAL NAME (GANTRY)
TION
$ ! ! $ !
' ! !
' !
' !
!

' !

$ ! ! $ !
$ ! ! $ !
' ! !
!
' ! !

'$ !
')
') !

')$%# !
$%# %( ')$%# %(

' ! &%$ !
!

' ! % &$

' !
&%$
' !
% &$
' ' ! !
!
' ' !
' !

'
')$ !

') &
')%# !

')%)%#
') #%$ "&$ !

') #$
') ! !

') !
') !

!

')
')(% !
!
')(% (%#
')# !

')#
')! !

')!
')!! !

')$%!!#
')$%# !

$%# %(
')$%# %(
')%# !

')#
')'## & !

')
SIGNAL LISTS
'(% !
!

'(% (%#
') !
!
') #$
')$%# $%# %( !
')$%# %(
! !
!& #$$ &$
! !
!& #$$ &$

! !
!&
#$$ &$
! !
!& #$$ &$
! !
!& #$$ &$
! !
!& #$$ &$
! !
!& #$$ &$
543
REV 3 sm 2308530100
DESTINA
TION
" "
"& #$$ &$
" "
"& #$$ &$
" "
"& #$$ &$

" "
"&
#$$ &$

" "

"&
#$$ &$
,!" ' ' " "
!",$&""* ''
,", ' ' " "

## ",$&""*,
,",, ' ' " "

##, , %," $&""*
,", ' ' " "

%,",$&""*
,",' ' ' " "
#! %,",$&""*
,%# ' ' " "

%#,$&""*
,%#, '
" "

%#,,!&$ ,$&""*
'
, ' ' " "

!&$ ,"!(#
,! ' ' "

"
"!(#,$&""*,%'
,!, "
"!(#,$&""*,%',
,$&',' " "&',%&,%%#*
$ " !& ,
$, % "

"
!& ,"!(#, %'
$, %, "
!& ,"!(#, %',
&%!#$%! ,$%#!%) $%#!%) "
$%#!%),&%!#+%!
&%!#$%! ,$%#!- $%#!%),&%!#+-
"

%), %! ,
%%#,! "
"&%%#*,!
!&,! "

"
!!"$,!
!&,!, "
!!"$,!,
SIGNAL LISTS
&%,%# " " #,$%!"

&%,%#, " #,$%!",
,"#$ , "
"
$$%%,%%
,$, " !& ,,
,$, " !& ,,
,$,,# "
" !& ,,,
,$,,# "
" !& ,,,%
,$,,# "
" !& ,,,
,$,,# "
" !& ,,,%
,!", "
!",,

,!", "
!",,
544
REV 3 sm 2308530100
DESTINA
TION
*!# ,

")*
#!
*!#* ,

""**
#!
*!*!#*

!#*!**
*!*!#*!

!#*!**!*
*!"* $!(* *
*!"*

$!(*
*
*!"*
$!(**
*#"#*
$#"#* *
*#"#*

$#"#*
*
*#"#*
$#"#**
*#"#* $#" $#"#** # $"
*%!!$
*
*%!!$*
**
**
**
**

**
#!$!
#*#!
#!
#!$!
#*#!
$
#!
#!$!
#*#!
$
#!$!*$$'

#*#!*
#!$!*$$'*
#*#!**
#!$!*

#*#!*
#!$!**
#*#!**
*"#! "#!#'
*"#!#'
SIGNAL LISTS
+ $ +
+ $ +
+ $+
*$
*$
*$

*$
* *

*" *
!*#!
!*!
* !

% *!!
#
*!$* &,
$*""* $""

!*!
$* % *$
545
REV 3 sm 2308530100
DESTINA
TION
!*
!
!*
!* !
!*
!* *
!
!* *
!* * !
!* *
#* !*
! !
!*"*!*
#* !* ! !

!*"*!*
#*$! -
!
!
!&*""

#*$" ! !

"*""
#* " !
!
"*"
#* " !
!
"*" &
*#$" $ %# *#$" $ %#
$*" $* !

!
" $$*! '"*$&
$*" $* * !
" $$*! '"*$&*
$*&"" %* !

!
*! '"*$&
$*&"" %* * !
" $$ *! '"*$&*
* ++ ! ! #* * ++
* ! ! #* &
* * ! #* *
*

++ ! ! #*
*
++
*
! ! #*
&
*
* ! #*
*
* ++ ! ! #** ++
* ! ! #* &
** ! #**
*
++ ! ! #**
++
SIGNAL LISTS
* ! ! #* &

** ! #**
"$* !

! , *#)
"$* * ! ( *#)*
"*" $ ! " $*"*
"*" $ !

" " $$ *"
"*" $ !

" " $$ *"
%#* !

!
%#*
%#* * !
%#*
%*# !

%*%#
%*" !

"*%#
546
REV 3 sm 2308530100
DESTINA
TION
&)'## & !

)&$
#) !

! % )
#) ) ! % ) )
#)
!

! %
#)
) ! % )
)
#) !

! %
#)) ! % ))
)
!

! #)%%)

)
) ! #)%%)
)
)
!

! #)%%)

)
) ! #)%%)
)
) !

! #)%%)
) ) ! #)%%) )
)# !

! #)%%)*
)#) ! #)%%)*)
)! $)! %
! ! #)!)! $)!)
)! $)! %
! ! #)!)! $)!)
'
)! $)! %
) ! #)!)! $)!)
)
)! $)! % ! !
#)!)! $)!)
)! $)! % ! !
#)!)! $)!) '
)! $)! %) ! #)!)! $)!))
%$) ) ! ! !)&##%)#)'&)
%$)
) ! ! !)&##%)'&)
%$)) ! ! !)&##%)'&)

%$)) ! ! !)&##%)'&)
SIGNAL LISTS
)!$)
!
!)
) !)&##%)$
)!$) !
!)) !)&##%)$
#)&((# ! &((#)
$$)$ ! !

&)# &
$$)%#&# ! !

%)%#)# &
$$) ! ! !

!)# &
$$) $) ! ! !

!)#)# &
$$) $)%# ! !

#)#)# &
$$)#)! % ! !

#)!)# &
$$)#)# % ! !

# %)#)# &
$$)"& #% # !
)# &
$$) )%# ! !

#) )# &
547
REV 3 sm 2308530100
DESTINA
TION
""( "(#! !( "#(!$
""("#( (

!!( ("#(!$
""("#( (

#( ("#(!$
""("#(#!

#!("#(!$
""("#(

$"("#(!$
""(%!!$

(!$
"(# ( !" )

%( ("(
"$!
( (
(
(
#("

$(#!
#("
#! $(#!
#("
#! $(#!
#( (
#( (
#( (

#( (
#( ((

!!( (#!(
#( ((

!!( (#!(
#( ((

#( (#!(
#( ((

#( (#!(
#( (%(

!#( (#!(
#( (%(

!#( (#!(
#(#!(
#!(#!(
#(#!(

#!(#!(
#((
$"(#!(
#((

$"(#!(
! )
#(#! !(#!
SIGNAL LISTS
#!
! )
#(#! !(#!
#!
((
( &!("$ '(
("(#
($( &!(#%
(#!$!(
(#( &!(#%
(#(!# (!##( &!(#%
(#(%!!$ (( &!(#%
($"(

($"(
( &(#!(
(!( &!(
("

($
(#!$!

(# #!
548
REV 3 sm 2308530100
# #

## # #
# #
#"! #
!# #!#
# #
# #
##
##
##
##
## ##
## #
$
###
###

$
###
###

$
### ###

$
### ###

$
###
###

$
###
###

$
### ###

$
### ###

$
##"# ###

$
##"# ###

SIGNAL LISTS
$
##"# ###

$
##"# ###

# #
##
# #
##
# # ##
# # ##
##

!##
##

!##
##
!##
##
!##
549
REV 3 sm 2308530100
DESTINA
TION
! #*#* * ! !
%*! #*!* *
! #*#*
* ! !
%*! #*!*
*
! #*! $ !
!

!*! #*!*
! #*! $ !
!

!*! #*!* &
! #*! $ * !

!*! #*!* *
! #*! $
!
!
!*! #*!*
! #*! $
!
!
!*! #*!*
&
! #*! $
* !
!*! #*!*
*
! #*$" ! ! "*! #$
! '*$"* ! ! '"*"*
! '*$"* * !
! '"*"* *
*!"#*##$$ ! ! ##$$*$$ "
!"#*$" !
!

"*!"#
!"#*$"* !
"*!"#*
!"#* ! !
##$*!"#*
!"#** !
!
##$*!"#*
!"#*%#$* ! !
!*%#$*!"#
!"#**# !
!
# *#%!!)*!"#
!"#**#$" !
#$" $(*#%!!)*!"#
!"#* *# !
%*# $*!"#
!"#* * ! !

!*# $*!"#
!"#* *"*" $ !
" $*"*# $*!"#
!"#* *&"" % !
*# $*!"#
!"#* !" !

!"$ "*!"#$
!"#* !* ! !

!* !"$ "*!"#
SIGNAL LISTS
!"#* !*" ! !

!"$ " !"#$*
!"#* !*" ! !
!"$ "*!"#$*$
!"#*! !
!
!*!"#
!"#*!* ! !
!*!"#*!
!'*# !

%*!'
!* !* ! !* !*
!* !* ! !* !*
!* !*
!
!* !*

!* !*
!
!* !*

550
REV 3 sm 2308530100
DESTINA
TION
#
#)+ "&#

#
#)" "&#

# #)" "&#
#+"!$+"+ "
" ##+"+"!$+#
#+"!$+"+ "
" ##+"+"!$+#+ '
#+"!$+"++ " ##+"+"!$+#++
#+"!$+"+ "
" %+"+"!$+#
#+"!$+"+ "
" %+"+"!$+# '
#+"!$+"++ " %+"+"!$+#+
#+"!$+"+' "
" #! %+"+"!$+#
#+"!$+%# "
" %#+"!$+#
#+"!$+%# "
" %#+"!$+#
#+"!$+%#+ " %#+"!$+#+
#+"!$+ "
" !&$ +"!$+#
#+"!$+ "
" !&$ +"!$+#
#+"!$+ + " !&$ +"!$+#+
#+"!$+"!% " "
"+"!$+#
#+"!$+"!% " "
"+"!$+# '
#+"!$+"!%+ "
"+"!$+#+
#$+!&"+"! "
"
# *+$%!"+#*
#$+$&# " "
"'+"+$+
#%!&#+$$+ %#&# " "

%+#!& +#%&#
#%!&#+$$+!"+%# " "

#+!"+#!& +#%&#
##+"+#!& +#,
#%!&#+$$+"+ " "

%&#
#%!&#+$$+%#+ " "

%#+#!& +#%&#
SIGNAL LISTS
%&+#+$%#+ +#,
#%!&#+$$+# "

"
%&#
#%!&#+$$+(
"
" (
+#!& +#%&#
#%!&#+$$+(
"
" (
+#!& +#%&#
#%!&#+'##!&+# + " "

#!%+#+!+!&
#)" #
" "

#)" "% %'
#)" # " "

#)" "% %'
#)+ #
" " #)+ !"%$#
551
REV 3 sm 2308530100
DESTINA
TION
%!%% !%%%!"
%!%% !%% %!"
%!%%%
%%!%%!"
%!%%%
%%!% %!"
%!%%%
!%%!%%!"
%!%%% !%%!% %!"
%!%%#% !%%!%%!"
%!%%#% !%%!% %!"
%!%!%
!%!%%!"
%!%!% !%!% %!"
%!%%
" %!%%!"
%!%% " %!% %!"
%%
%"%!"
%!%!%&
%%!"

!"
%%
%%!"
%%%!
%!!%%!"
%%! %%!"
%%#"

%%!"
%% !$%&
% !$%%
!"
% !$%%
!%% !$%!"
!%% !$%&
% !$%%#
!"
% !$%!
!% !$%!"
% !$%
" % !$%!"
"!% ! " % !$
SIGNAL LISTS
"!%% % !$%

"% !%" % !$
"%% !%" % !$%
% %!
% %!
!$%%

%% !$%
!$%%

!%% !$
!$%%#
!%% !$
!$%!

!% !$
!$%

" % !$
552
REV 3 sm 2308530100
DESTINA
TION
"#!#))"
"#))"#!#)$)
"#!#))
"#))"#!#)
"#!#))!)!#
"#))"#!#)!#)!
"#!#))%!!$
"#))"#!#)
"(!)!"

!)"(!
#
#') $#
#
#' $#
#"#))"

")"$ ()#"#
#"#)$#)"
#"#)$)"# "
#!
!
#' #

#' ##%
#'
#' ##%
#') #

#')) #"!
$)#!
$)!
%)"
$)%
%)
)%
%)!)!#
!##)!)%
%)%#)

)%#)%
%)%!!$
)%
% %
% %
%!!$
)
%!!$
%!!$
%

%
)$#)")") &! #
)$)&!)"# )
SIGNAL LISTS
)$#)")$#) $ ! #
)$)$ !)"# )
)$#)
%
)
%)!
)$#) %
) %)!
)$#)
%
)
%)!
)

$) # $"
)

$) # $"
)

$) # $"
)

$) # $"
)

$)
# $"
)

$)
# $"
553
REV 3 sm 2308530100
DESTINA
TION
#

!#
!
#

!# !
#

!# !
#

!# !
#

!# !
#

!# !
#

!# !
#### # # ##
####
# # #
# "#
## "
SIGNAL LISTS
554
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHAPTER 6 RENEWAL PARTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ILLUSTRATION TITLE PAGE
ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
61 LOCATION OF SUBASSEMBLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
62 LOCATION OF BOARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
63 SENOGRAPHE DMR EMC 2132783 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
64 GENERATOR CABINET 2107398 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
65 GENERATOR CABINET WITHOUT HV UNIT 2111832 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
66 GENERATOR CABINET, SEMIASSEMBLED 2110343 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
67 200EMC LINE SUPPLY UNIT 2109803 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
68 200EQUIPPED LINE POWER PLATE 2110146 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
69 200EQUIPPED LINE SUPPLY CONTROL PLATE 2110147 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
610 LINE FILTER BOX 2102774 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
611 300EQUIPPED CONVERTER POWER PLATE 2110149 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
612 400EQUIPPED CONTROL PLATE 2110150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
613 SET OF GENERATOR CABLES 2110151 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
614 701EQUIPPED HV UNIT 2107399 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
615 100CONSOLE CDRH 2107636 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
616 SET OF COVERS 2101103 COVERS MOUNTING HARDWARE 45560702 . . . . . . . . . . 635
617 800GANTRY 2108143 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
618 COLUMN ASSY 2110172 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
619 PEDESTAL 2108321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
620 ELEVATOR ASSY 2108047 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
621 EQUIPPED MOTOR 2108046 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
622 EQUIPPED STRUCTURE 2108044 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
623 ASSEMBLED GANTRY BOARDS 2109185 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
624 MAIN HARNESS 2109221 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
RENEWAL PARTS
625 EXAMINATION ARM 2108396 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653

626 EXAMINATION ARM 2108396 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
627 EXAMINATION ARM 2108396 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
628 EXAMINATION ARM 2108396 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
629 TUBE HOUSING SPACER 2144560 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
630 SET OF CABLES, TUBE HOUSING SPACER 2109334 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
6i
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION TITLE PAGE
631 IMAGE RECEPTOR 2142583

IMAGE RECEPTOR DMR V2 WITHOUT CELL 2150322 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
632 PHOTOCELL ASSEMBLY 2144918 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
633 PADDLE FASTENER ASSEMBLY 4560085 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
634 ELECTROMAGNET MOUNT ASSEMBLY 45560090 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
635 SID BRAKING SYSTEM 2107675 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
636 SET OF CABLES, COMPRESSION ARM 2108737 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
637 ACCESSORIES 2109225 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
638 EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT 2144911 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
639 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
RENEWAL PARTS
6ii
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ABBREVIATIONS
ITEM
NO.
Not illustrated.
6 Item No. 6 not illustrated.
FRU Field Replaceable Unit.
1 Critical.
2 Not critical.
N Not available.
REP
Y Repairable.
QTY
PL Previously listed as an assembly or subassembly.

AR As required.
APP Applies to.
Viewing direction.
Renewal Parts
RENEWAL PARTS
61
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 61
LOCATION OF SUBASSEMBLIES
SENOGRAPHE DMR EMC

ILL. 63
OPTIONAL XRAY TUBE/TUBE HOUSING

ACCESSORIES ILL. 63
ILL. 639
701EQUIPPED
HV UNIT
ILL. 614
200EMC LINE
SUPPLY UNIT
ILL. 67 thru 610
400EQUIPPED
CONTROL PLATE
ILL. 612
300EQUIPPED
CONVERTER
POWER PLATE
ILL. 611
SET OF ACCESSORIES
GENERATOR 100CONSOLE ILL. 637
CABLES CDRH
ILL. 613 ILL. 615
SET OF COVERS
ILL. 616
COVERS MOUNTING
HARDWARE
ILL. 616
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE KIT
ILL. 638
RENEWAL PARTS
GENERATOR CABINET
ILL. 64
GENERATOR CABINET
WITHOUT HV UNIT
ILL. 65
GENERATOR CABINET,
SEMIASSEMBLED
ILL. 66
62
REV 3 sm 2308530100
800GANTRY
ILL. 617
TUBE HOUSING SPACER

ILL. 629
SET OF CABLES,
TUBE HOUSING SPACER
ILL. 630
READOUT UNIT
ILL. 614
COLUMN ASSY
ILL. 618 PADDLE FASTENER
PEDESTAL ASSEMBLY
ILL. 619 ILL. 633
ELEVATOR ASSY
ILL. 620
EQUIPPED MOTOR IMAGE RECEPTOR
ILL. 621 ILL. 631
EQUIPPED STRUCTURE
ILL. 622
PHOTOCELL
ELECTROMAGNET ASSEMBLY
MOUNT ASSEMBLY ILL. 632
ILL. 634
ASSEMBLED EXAMINATION
GANTRY BOARDS ARM
ILL. 623 ILL. 625 thru 628
SET OF CABLES,
COMPRESSION ARM
MAIN HARNESS ILL. 636
ILL. 624
SID BRAKING
SYSTEM
ILL. 635
RENEWAL PARTS
63
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 62
LOCATION OF BOARDS
100PL1 OPERATOR BOARD

100PL2 CONSOLE CONTROL
BOARD
701PL1 KVMA BOARD

200PL1 MAINSPOWER BOARD
200PL2 SUPPLY COMMAND BOARD
RENEWAL PARTS
400PL1 GENERATOR COMMAND BOARD

400PL2 GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD
400PL3 GENERATOR CPU BOARD
300PL2 ANODE STARTER BOARD
300PL1 INVERTER BOARD
64
REV 3 sm 2308530100
800PL6 TUBE HOUSING ARM

DISTRIBUTION BOARD
800PL11 ENCODER BOARD
800PL16 INTERARMLOCK
COMMAND BOARD
800PL12 GANTRY
READOUT
BOARD
800PL9 ENCODER
800PL5 COMPRESSION BOARD
ARM
DISTRIBUTION 800PL8 PADDLE
BOARD BOARD
800PL14 MAGNIFICATION
SENSOR 800PL15 INTER
BOARD ARM TILT
SENSOR
800PL7 SID BOARD
SENSOR
BOARD
800PL10 IMAGE
800PL3 GANTRY RECEPTOR
CPU BOARD
BOARD
800PL4 PHOTOCELL
BOARD
800PL2 GANTRY 800PL13 ENCODER

INTERFACE BOARD
BOARD
800PL1 GANTRY
POWER
BOARD RENEWAL PARTS
65
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 63
SENOGRAPHE DMR EMC 2132783
8
9
4 2
3
6
RENEWAL PARTS
66
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 63
SENOGRAPHE DMR EMC 2132783
A
ITEM
PART NO. FRU REP DESCRIPTION QTY P
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
N SENOGRAPHE DMR EMC 1
1 N S GENERATOR CABINET (SEE ILL. 64) 1
2 2107636 1 Y S 100CONSOLE CDRH (SEE ILL. 615) 1
3 N S SET OF COVERS (SEE ILL. 616) 1
4 N S 800GANTRY (SEE ILL. 617) 1
5 N S ACCESSORIES (SEE ILL. 637) 1
6 45560702 1 S COVERS MOUNTING HARDWARE (SEE ILL. 616) 1
7 N S IDENTIFICATION KIT, DMR 1
N S S IDENTIFICATION, SENO DMR V2 CDRH ASSY 1
N S S IDENTIFICATION, AEC/AOP, SENO DMR 1
N S S IDENTIFICATION, HV UNIT, SENO DMR CDRH 1
N S S IDENTIFICATION, COLLIMATOR, SENO DMR CDRH 1
N S S IDENTIFICATION, IMAGE RECEPTOR, SENO DMR CDRH 1
N S S IDENTIFICATION, GANTRY, SENO DMR 1
8 45561638 2 S S FRONT STRIP, SLILKSCREENED 1
9 2105138 1 S XRAY TUBE/TUBE HOUSING M52/GS412 49 (SEE DIRECT., DTP 45290897) 1
2105128 2 S S THERMOSTAT 65C (WIRED) 1
10 N S TECHNICAL PUBLICATION, SENOGRAPHE DMR 1
11 2308528101 2 S S OPERATOR MANUAL (FRENCH) 1

12 2308528100 2 S S OPERATOR MANUAL (ENGLISH) 1
13 2308528106 2 S S OPERATOR MANUAL (SPANISH) 1
14 2308528108 2 S S OPERATOR MANUAL (GERMAN) 1
15 2308528111 2 S S OPERATOR MANUAL (ITALIAN) 1
16 2308528127 2 S S OPERATOR MANUAL (PORTUGUESE) 1
17 2308528140 2 S S OPERATOR MANUAL (JAPANESE) 1
18 2308530100 2 S S SERVICE MANUAL (ENGLISH) 1
19 36002977 2 S S SCHEMATICS (ENGLISH) 1
20 45561604 2 S S PIM (ENGLISH) 1
RENEWAL PARTS
21 2157897 2 S FLOPPY MAMMOCOM V1.16 1
22 2248747 2 S FLOPPY DATACONVERTER V5.10 1
67
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 63
SENOGRAPHE DMR EMC 2132783 (Continued)
8
9
4 2
3
6
RENEWAL PARTS
68
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 63
SENOGRAPHE DMR EMC 2132783 (Continued)
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
23 N S SERVICE KITS 1
2149958 1 S S SET OF FUSES 1
36006659 1 S S KIT COMPRESSION BELTS 1
2130919 1 S S KIT COMPRESSION STEEL SPRING 1
2143783 1 S S KIT PHOTO MULTIPLIER 1
2147721 1 S S KIT BUCKY SPRINGS 18X24 1
2120544 1 S S SET OF CAP (4 TYPES) 1
24 36003399 1 HEATER CURRENT & BIAS TOOL 1
25 2148150 1 RESOLUTION PATTERN HOLDER (TOOL) 1
26 46194427P407 1 MAMMO COMPRESSION SCALE (TOOL) 1
27 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES (SEE ILL. 639)
RENEWAL PARTS
69
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 64
GENERATOR CABINET 2107398
1
RENEWAL PARTS
2
701
610
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 64
GENERATOR CABINET 2107398
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
N GENERATOR CABINET PL
1 N S GENERATOR CABINET WITHOUT HV UNIT (SEE ILL. 65) 1
2 2107399 1 S 701EQUIPPED HV UNIT (SEE ILL. 614) 1
RENEWAL PARTS
611
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 65
GENERATOR CABINET WITHOUT HV UNIT 2111832
2
RENEWAL PARTS
612
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 65
GENERATOR CABINET WITHOUT HV UNIT 2111832
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
N GENERATOR CABINET WITHOUT HV UNIT PL
1 N S GENERATOR CABINET, SEMI ASSEMBLED (SEE ILL. 66) 1
2 N S 200EMC LINE SUPPLY UNIT (SEE ILL. 67) 1
3 N S 300EQUIPPED CONVERTER POWER PLATE (SEE ILL. 611) 1
4 N S 400EQUIPPED CONTROL PLATE (SEE ILL. 612) 1
5 N S SET OF GENERATOR CABLES (SEE ILL. 613) 1
RENEWAL PARTS
613
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 66
GENERATOR CABINET, SEMIASSEMBLED 2110343
1 2
3
RENEWAL PARTS
614
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 66
GENERATOR CABINET, SEMIASSEMBLED 2110343
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
N GENERATOR CABINET, SEMIASSEMBLED PL
1 91641455 1 S TRANSPORTATION BALL D=30 STL 4
2 91719024 2 S FIXED JACK D=40 M10X25 4
3 45474049 2 S SMALL PANEL PAINTED 2
4 45474050 2 S LARGE PANEL PAINTED 2
RENEWAL PARTS
615
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 67
200EMC LINE SUPPLY UNIT 2109803
7
W12
3 1
6 2
W10
8
W14
RENEWAL PARTS
616
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 67
200EMC LINE SUPPLY UNIT 2109803
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
N 200EMC LINE SUPPLY UNIT PL
1 2109932 1 S TRANSFORMER 9KW 52A 415V 1
2 N S 200EQUIPPED LINE POWER PLATE (SEE ILL. 68) 1
3 N S 200EQUIPPED LINE SUPPLY CONTROL PLATE (SEE ILL. 69) 1
4 N S LINE FILTER BOX (SEE ILL. 610) 1
5 N S SET OF LINE SUPPLY CABLES 1
6 2110066 2 S S CABLE REL/CTRS (W10) 1
7 2110067 2 S S CABLE PSRS/CTRS (W12) 1
8 2111145 2 S S LINE SUPPLY CONTACTOR CABLE V2 (W14) 1
N S S HARNESS (W15) 1
N S S LINE SUPPLY HARNESS (W11) 1
RENEWAL PARTS
617
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 68
200EQUIPPED LINE POWER PLATE 2110146
2
200PL1
1
RENEWAL PARTS
618
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 68
200EQUIPPED LINE POWER PLATE 2110146
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
N 200EQUIPPED LINE POWER PLATE PL
1 45560072 1 S EQUIPPED, WIRED FAN 1
2 2108592 1 Y S 200PL1 MAINS DISTRIBUTION BOARD 1
K1, K2 2100312 1 S S RELAY 12VDC 1T 150W 5A 3VDC 2
X1 91682082 1 S S RELAY 12VDC 3RT 16A 1
R1, R4 99182099 1 S S COILED RESISTOR 22R 4% 280W 2
R5 99120760 1 S S COILED RESISTOR 100R 5% 160W 1
2149958 1 S SET OF FUSES (6X32)
58079166 1 S S FUS F 6X32 10A 380V C 10KA ULL 3
58079626 1 S S FUS F 6X32 10A 250V C 200A ULL 3
58079627 1 S S FUS F 6X32 2,0A 250V C 100A ULL 3
58079685 1 S S FUS F 6X32 0,5A 250V C 35A ULL 3
58079686 1 S S FUS F 6X32 1,0A 250V C 35A ULL 3
58079688 1 S S FUS F 6X32 8A 250V C 200A ULL 3
99183931 1 S S FUS T 6X32 3,2A 250V C 100A ULL 3
99183979 1 S S FUS T 6X32 10A 250V C 200A ULL 3
99184975 1 S S FUS F 6X32 12,5A 250V C 750A ULL 3
99194288 1 S S FUS F 6X32 3,15A 250V C 100A ULL 3
99194291 1 S S FUS T 6X32 2,5A 250V C 100A ULL 3
RENEWAL PARTS
619
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 69
200EQUIPPED LINE SUPPLY CONTROL PLATE 2110147

3
6
7 8
1 1 2 2
D24 D25 D26 D27
RENEWAL PARTS
620
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 69
200EQUIPPED LINE SUPPLY CONTROL PLATE 2110147
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
N 200EQUIPPED LINE SUPPLY CONTROL PLATE PL
1 91701990 1 S DIODE DD31N400K 400V 480A UL (D24) (D25) 2
2 91707991 1 S DIODE DD61N400K 400V 1200A UL (D26) (D27) 2
3 91717300 1 S MAIN EMERG. SWITCH DISCON + HANDLE 1
4 91728240 1 S CONTACTOR 3POS 660V/18A 1T 220VAC 1
5 91685123 1 S FUSE HOLDER 2P 60X27 600V 2
6 99184154 1 S FAST FUSE 27X60 35A 600V C 100KA ULL 2
7 99091203 1 S CAPACITOR AL 33000 F 10+50% 63V SREW 1
8 58079856 1 S CAPACITOR AL 2200 F 10+50% 350V SREW
9 2121398 1 Y S 200PL2 SUPPLY COMMAND BOARD 1
F3 91684676 2 S S FAST FUSE 27X27 125A 150VAC ULR 1
2149958 1 S SET OF FUSES (6X32) 1
58079626 1 S S FUS F 6X32 10A 250V C 200A ULL 3
58079627 1 S S FUS F 6X32 2,0A 250V C 100A ULL 3
58079685 1 S S FUS F 6X32 0,5A 250V C 35A ULL 3
58079686 1 S S FUS F 6X32 1,0A 250V C 35A ULL 3
58079688 1 S S FUS F 6X32 8A 250V C 200A ULL 3
99183931 1 S S FUS T 6X32 3,2A 250V C 100A ULL 3
99183979 1 S S FUS T 6X32 10A 250V C 200A ULL 3
99184975 1 S S FUS F 6X32 12,5A 250V C 750A ULL 3
99194288 1 S S FUS F 6X32 3,15A 250V C 100A ULL 3
99194291 1 S S FUS T 6X32 2,5A 250V C 100A UL 3

RENEWAL PARTS
621
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 610
LINE FILER BOX 2102774
1
200PL4
RENEWAL PARTS
622
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 610
LINE FILTER BOX 2102774
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
N LINE FILTER BOX PL
1 2106963 1 S 200PL4 ROOM RELAY BOARD 1
RENEWAL PARTS
623
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 611
300EQUIPPED CONVERTER POWER PLATE 2110149
8
300PL2
5
300PL1
7
4
TH1, TH2
3
D1, D2
RENEWAL PARTS
624
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 611
300EQUIPPED CONVERTER POWER PLATE 2110149
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
N 300EQUIPPED CONVERTER POWER PLATE PL
1 2110227 1 S CAPACITOR UNIT 1
2 2185713 1 S FILTERING INDUCTOR 2X125 UH 5% 1
3 58079525 1 S DIODE MODULE DD31N 1.4KV 60A UL (D1) (D2) 2
4 58079220 1 S THYRISTOR (TH1) (TH2) 2
5 21215092 1 S 300PL1 INVERTER BOARD 1
6 58079252 1 S THERMOSTAT 55/45 C 1
7 58079253 1 S THERMOSTAT 40/30 C 1
8 45553694 1 S 300PL2 ANODE STARTER BOARD 1
RENEWAL PARTS
625
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 612
400EQUIPPED CONTROL PLATE 2110150
4
400PL3
2 3
400PL1 400PL2
1
A
RENEWAL PARTS
626
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 612
400EQUIPPED CONTROL PLATE 2110150
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
N 400EQUIPPED CONTROL PLATE PL
1 2185797 1 S POWER SUPPLY 45W =5V/=12V 1
2 2107747 1 Y S 400PL1 GENERATOR COMMAND BOARD 1
3 21983693 1 Y S 400PL2 GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD 1
4 2325550 1 S 400PL3 GENERATOR CPU BOARD V6.22 PROGRAMMED 1
5 N S S STANDARD CPU BOARD 1
6 99171545 2 S S S RED JUMPER PITCH 2.54 1
BT1 99171019 1 S S S LITHIUM BATTERY 850 MAH 1
7 N S SET OF CONTROL PLATE CABLES 1
8 45440115 1 S S CPU POWER SUPPLY CABLE 1
9 45440116 1 S S CONTROL INFO BOARD 1
10 2110070 2 S S 250V DISTRIBUTION CABLE (WG4) 1
11 45440117 2 S S POWER SUPPLY CABLE 5V & 12V 1
2149958 1 S SET OF FUSES (6X32) 1
58079626 1 S S FUS F 6X32 10A 250V C 200A ULL 3
58079627 1 S S FUS F 6X32 2,0A 250V C 100A ULL 3
58079685 1 S S FUS F 6X32 0,5A 250V C 35A ULL 3
58079686 1 S S FUS F 6X32 1,0A 250V C 35A ULL 3
58079688 1 S S FUS F 6X32 8A 250V C 200A ULL 3
99183931 1 S S FUS T 6X32 3,2A 250V C 100A ULL 3
99183979 1 S S FUS T 6X32 10A 250V C 200A ULL 3

RENEWAL PARTS
99184975 1 S S FUS F 6X32 12,5A 250V C 750A ULL 3
99194288 1 S S FUS F 6X32 3,15A 250V C 100A ULL 3
99194291 1 S S FUS T 6X32 2,5A 250V C 100A UL 3
627
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 613
SET OF GENERATOR CABLES 2110151
2
3
4
5
6
1
RENEWAL PARTS
628
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 613
SET OF GENERATOR CABLES 2110151
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
N SET OF GENERATOR CABLES PL
1 45474577 1 S HEATER & BIASING CABLE (WG2) 1
2 C801418 1 S STD FLAT CABLE 40COND L=0.5M 1
3 2110259 2 S STD FLAT CABLE 400PL1, 200PL2 1
RENEWAL PARTS
629
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 614
701EQUIPPED HV UNIT 2107399
2
701PL1
RENEWAL PARTS
630
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 614
701EQUIPPED HV UNIT 2107399
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
2107399 1 Y 701EQUIPPED HV UNIT PL
1 N S BOARD ASSY 1
2 36003514 1 Y S S 701PL1 KVMA BOARD V4 1
3 N S CABLE ASSY 1
4 45203148 1 S S COAXIAL CABLE, HV UNIT/BOARD 1
RENEWAL PARTS
631
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 615
100CONSOLE CDRH 2107636
9 A 11
12
10
8

8 7

A B
RENEWAL PARTS
632
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 615
100CONSOLE CDRH 2107636
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
2107636 1 Y 100CONSOLE CDRH PL
1 N S CONSOLE
2 2106486 1 Y S S 100PL2 CONSOLE CONTROL BOARD 1
3 2106488 1 S S 100PL1 OPERATOR BOARD 1
4 45474388 1 S S S CABLE (CONSOLEA40) 1
5 45474389 1 S S S CABLE (CONSOLEA16) 1
6 91717079 1 S S S 2LINE FLUORESCENT READOUT 1
7 2102661 1 S S S VACUUM FLUORESCENT DISPLAY MODULE 1
8 N S S FLSTR HD SCREW M4X10/10 PASS SST 5
9 2143061 1 S S CONSOLE COVER ASSEMBLY 1
10 N S S SHOULDERED WASHER 2
11 45474409 1 S S BUTTON 2
12 N S S HEX SKT HDLS SCREW FLAT END M3X6/6 PASS SST 2
13 2110540 2 S CONSOLE CDRH IDENTIFICATION 1
14 45554829 1 S BRACKET CONSOLE / XRAY SHIELD 1
15 2153336 2 S LABEL CLEANING ON CONSOLE 1
RENEWAL PARTS
633
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 616
SET OF COVERS 2101103 COVERS MOUNTING HARDWARE 45560702
3 1
4 2
14
13
11
7 8
5 6
RENEWAL PARTS
15
9 10
12
634
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 616
SET OF COVERS 2101103 COVERS MOUNTING HARDWARE 45560702
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
N SET OF COVERS PL
1 2100143 2 S TUBE HOUSING SPACER COVER LABELED (RIGHT) 1
2 45561627 2 S S DRESS STRIP 1
3 2100145 2 S TUBE HOUSING SPACER COVER LABELED (LEFT) 1
4 45561627 2 S S DRESS STRIP 1
5 45560683 2 S LEFT REAR COVER LABELED 1
6 45560684 2 S RIGHT REAR COVER LABELED 1
7 2101191 2 S HALF LEFT COVER, COMPRESSION 1
8 2101190 2 S HALF RIGHT COVER, COMPRESSION 1
9 45559550 1 S LEFT COVER, COLUMN 1
10 45559551 1 S RIGHT COVER, COLUMN 1
11 45438593 2 S GENERATOR TOP COVER 1
12 45438606 1 S KICKPLATE 1
13 45554462 2 S SILKSCREENED FRONT PLATE 1
14 45560688 2 S COVER PLATE 1
15 45560693 2 S PDD AND STEREOTIX 2 CONNECTOR COVER ASSEMBLED 1
16 45560702 1 COVERS MOUNTING HARDWARE PL
N S CROSSTIP SCREW M4X16/16 PASS SST 12
N S LRG RAISED RND HD SCREW M4X10 PASS SST 10
N S HEX SKT HD CAP SCREW M5X50/16 BLACK STL 2
N S CAPTIVE NUT M4 THK=1.2/1.6 STL 8
N S FLSTR HD SCREW M4X10/10 SST 8
1 S SET OF CAPS (4 TYPES)

RENEWAL PARTS
17 45559940 N S S WHITE CAP FOR DISPLAY AND IMAGE RECEPTOR COVERS 1
18 45559730 N S S WHITE CAP / ALL COVERS 1
19 45560509 N S S BLACK CAP GENERATOR BOTTOM 1
20 45562658 N S S BLACK CAP GANTRY BASE 1
635
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 617
800GANTRY 2108143
6
7
2 5
9
RENEWAL PARTS
636
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 617
800GANTRY 2108143
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
N 800GANTRY PL
1 2110172 2 S COLUMN ASSY (SEE ILL. 618) 1
2 N S ASSEMBLED GANTRY BOARDS (SEE ILL. 623) 1
3 N S HEX SCREW M4X10 SST 4
4 36005259 1 S READOUT UNIT (SEE ILL. NO TAG) 1
5 N S MAIN HARNESS (SEE ILL. 624) 1
6 N S EXAMINATION ARM (SEE ILL. 625 THRU 628) 1
7 N S HEX SKT HD CAP SCREW M10X25/25 BLACK STL 4
8 21336032 1 S S DOUBLE FOOTSWITCH (W59) PARELEC EMC 1
RENEWAL PARTS
637
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 618
COLUMN ASSY 2110172
2 3
RENEWAL PARTS
638
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 618
COLUMN ASSY 2110172
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
2110172 2 COLUMN ASSY PL
1 N S PEDESTAL (SEE ILL. 619) 1
2 N S EQUIPPED STRUCTURE (SEE ILL. 622) 1
3 91726753 1 S GAZ SPRING 1
4 9172758 2 S CASTER WHEEL 1
RENEWAL PARTS
639
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 619
PEDESTAL 2108321
4 3
RENEWAL PARTS
640
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 619
PEDESTAL 2108321
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
N PEDESTAL PL
1 N S ELEVATOR ASSY (SEE ILL. 620) 1
2 N S EQUIPPED MOTOR (SEE ILL. 621) 1
3 91726709 1 S BELT 73TOOTH 1
4 99091203 1 S CAPACITOR AL 33000 F 10 +50% 63V SCREW 1
RENEWAL PARTS
641
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 620
ELEVATOR ASSY 2108047
A
3 3
2
RENEWAL PARTS
642
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 620
ELEVATOR ASSY 2108047
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
N ELEVATOR ASSY PL
1 99142807 2 S BALL BEARING 15X32X9 PROTECTED 1
2 91726743 2 S BALL BEARING 15X32X13 2ROW SLANTING 1
3 99146577 1 S BEARING 6BC 02XPP 6X19X6 4
RENEWAL PARTS
643
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 621
EQUIPPED MOTOR 2108046
2
800PL13
A B A
1
RENEWAL PARTS
B
3
W34
644
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 621
EQUIPPED MOTOR 2108046
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
N EQUIPPED MOTOR PL
1 45553517 1 S WIRED MOTOR 1
2 2148752 1 S 800PL13 ENCODER BOARD 1
3 45553524 1 S CABLE (ELEVATOR ENCODER) (W34) 1
4 45554615 1 S ENCODER SUPPORT GLUED 1
RENEWAL PARTS
645
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 622
EQUIPPED STRUCTURE 2108044
C C
5 3
W33B W33A
1 A
V1
B
RENEWAL PARTS
V2
4 C
6
646
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 622
EQUIPPED STRUCTURE 2108044
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
N EQUIPPED STRUCTURE PL
1 45553520 1 S OPTOINTERRUPTER (ELEVATOR AT LOW) 1
2 45553521 1 S OPTOINTERRUPTER (ELEVATOR AT HIGH) 1
3 N S CABLE (EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON) (W33A) 1
4 45067225 2 S S EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON D=30 RED 1
5 N S CABLE (EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON) (W33B) 1
6 45067225 2 S S EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON D=30 RED 1
RENEWAL PARTS
647
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 623
ASSEMBLED GANTRY BOARDS 2109185
2 1
800 PL3 800 PL4
5
800 PL2
6 7
8
800 PL1
RENEWAL PARTS
648
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 623
ASSEMBLED GANTRY BOARDS 2109185
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
N ASSEMBLED GANTRY BOARDS PL
1 2100282 1 S 800PL4 PHOTOCELL BOARD 1
2 2325551 1 S 800PL3 GANTRY CPU BOARD V6.22 PROGRAMMED
3 N S S CPU BOARD 1
4 99171545 2 S S S JUMPER, RED PITCH 2.54 1
BT1 99171019 1 S S S LITHIUM BATTERY 850MA/H 1
5 2101719 1 Y S 800PL2 GANTRY INTERFACE BOARD 1
6 45553502 1 S CABLE (PL1/PL21) 1
7 45553503 1 S CABLE (PL1/PL22) 1
8 21020825 1 Y S 800PL1 GANTRY POWER BOARD (ASM: 2182675) 1
2149958 1 S SET OF FUSES (6X32) 1
58079626 1 S S FUS F 6X32 10A 250V C 200A ULL 3
58079627 1 S S FUS F 6X32 2,0A 250V C 100A ULL 3
58079685 1 S S FUS F 6X32 0,5A 250V C 35A ULL 3
58079686 1 S S FUS F 6X32 1,0A 250V C 35A ULL 3
58079688 1 S S FUS F 6X32 8A 250V C 200A ULL 3
99183931 1 S S FUS T 6X32 3,2A 250V C 100A ULL 3
99183979 1 S S FUS T 6X32 10A 250V C 200A ULL 3
99184975 1 S S FUS F 6X32 12,5A 250V C 750A ULL 3
99194288 1 S S FUS F 6X32 3,15A 250V C 100A ULL 3
99194291 1 S S FUS T 6X32 2,5A 250V C 100A UL 3

RENEWAL PARTS
649
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 624
MAIN HARNESS 2109221
10
B
7 5 4
W10 W8 W7
8
W59
9 6
W60 W9
A
2
1
RENEWAL PARTS
650
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 624
MAIN HARNESS 2109221
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
N MAIN HARNESS PL
1 45475034 1 S 4PIN HV CABLE ASSEMBLY 1
2 C133902 1 S S GASKET 2
3 2109181 1 S SET OF CABLES, MAIN HARNESS 1
4 45553497 1 S S OPTICAL FIBER (GENTRANSMIT CONNECTION) (W7) 1
5 45553498 1 S S OPTICAL FIBER (GENRECEPT CONNECTION) (W8) 1
6 45553499 1 S S OPTICAL FIBER (GRID SYNC) (W9) 1
7 45553500 1 S S OPTICAL FIBER (SEND PM) (W10) 1
10 45553504 2 S S COAXIAL CABLE (I PM) 1
11 2110063 2 S SHIELDED CABLE SHEATH 1
RENEWAL PARTS
651
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 625
EXAMINATION ARM 2108396
2
3
8
9
15
16
10
11
12
13
RENEWAL PARTS
4
5
6
7
17
652
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 625
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
N EXAMINATION ARM PL
1 N S TUBE HOUSING SPACER (SEE ILL. 629) 1
2 N S HEX SKT HD CAP SCREW M10X30/30 PASS SST 2
3 N S WASHER M10 N PASS SST 2
4 2142583 2 Y S IMAGE RECEPTOR (SEE ILL. 631) 1
5 N S S HEX SKT HD CAP SCREW M5X25/22 PASS SST 4
6 N S S WASHER WITH CONVEX FACE 5.2X10.5X2 BRUNED STL 4
7 N S S WASHER WITH CONCAVE FACE 6X10.5X2.1 BRUNED STL 4
8 45560085 1 S PADDLE FASTENER ASSEMBLY (SEE ILL. 633) 1
10 N S ELECTROMAGNET MOUNT ASSEMBLY (SEE ILL. 634) 1
11 N S S WASHER WITH CONVEX FACE 5.2X10.5X2 BRUNISHED STL 2
12 N S S WASHER WITH CONCAVE FACE 6X10.5X2.1 BRUNISHED STL 2
14 N S SET OF CABLES, COMPRESSION ARM (SEE ILL. 636) 1
15 2127283 1 HANDLES, ASSEMBLY 1
N S HEX SKT HD CAP SCREW M5X16/16 PASS SST 8
N S TOP RIGHT HOLLOWBOX 1
N S TOP LEFT HOLLOWBOX 1
45561897 2 N S SET OF FOUR SILKSCREENERS COVER 1
N S TOP TUBE 2
N S BOTTOM RIGHT HOLLOWBOX 1
N S BOTTOM LEFT HOLLOWBOX 1
N S BOTTOM TUBE 1
RENEWAL PARTS
N S ROTATION HANDLE LIMITATION SHAFT 2
16 2186192 1 ROCKER SWITCH 3 POS 1
17 2150322 1 Y IMAGE RECEPTOR DMR V2 WITHOUT CELL (SEE ILL. 631) 1
653
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 626
20 27 A
21
22 C
C D
B
19
23 25
24
D
7 8 10 9
B
26
1 11
12
13
5 3 6 4 14
RENEWAL PARTS

15
17
18
654
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 626
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
1 2178230 1 S BRAKE WIRED (ROTATION) (W42) 1
3 N S SPACER 1
4 N S SPACER 1
5 91632919 2 S BALL BEARING 8X125X22 1ROW PROTECTED 4
6 N S INT CIRCLIP D=125 TYPE 80 1
7 N S SLEEVE 1
8 N S HDLS SCREW M6X8 BLACK STL CUP END 1
9 N S CAP (USE SET OF CAPS: 2120544) 1
10 N S HEX SKT HD CAP SCREW M5X15 BLACK STL 6
12 45554468 2 S LOCKING SECTOR 1
14 N S FLAT WASHER M5 N PASS SST 2
15 N S TAPPED SPACER M3X5 GALV STL 2
16 45475707 1 S 800PL7 SID SENSOR BOARD 1
19 45554401 1 S EXAMINATION ARM ANGLE INDICATOR 1
20 45559710 2 S REAR HANDLE 1
23 45560283 2 S BOTTOM COVER LEADED 1
24 N S FLSTR HD SCREW M4X10/10 SST 4
25 2130919 1 KIT FOR COMPRESSION STEEL SPRING, RENEWAL PARTS 1

RENEWAL PARTS
N S PADDLE SPRING BLADE 1
N S CABLE (PADDLE SHIFT) 1
N S PROTECTIVE CABLE 1
N S HEATSHRINKABLE SLEEVE 1
655
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 626
EXAMINATION ARM 2108396 (Continued)
20 27 A
21
22 C
C D
B
19
23 25
24
D
7 8 10 9
B
26
1 11
12
13
5 3 6 4 14
RENEWAL PARTS

15
17
18
656
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 626
EXAMINATION ARM 2108396 (Continued)
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
26 36006659 1 KIT OF COMPRESSION BELT, RENEWAL PARTS 1
91726680 1 S BELT 49TOOTH 1
N S BELT COMPRESSION SUPPORT 1
N S SHOULDERED RING D=6/8 L=8 1
N S BELT FASTERNER 1
N S BELT TENSIONER 1
N S TENSION SPRING FOR COMPRESSION BELT 1
N S FLAT WASHER M4 U PASS SST 2
N S HEX SCREW M4X10/10 PASS SST 1
N S BELT CLAMPING PLATE 1
N S COMPRESSION BELT 1
N S BENT PLATE 1
N S FLAT WASHER Z4N PASS SST 2
36005885 1 S BELT (OPEN) 1
27 45554511 2 S CABLE GUIDE 1
28 56052522 1 BRAKE ADJUSTMENT TOOL 1
29 45554529 2 IMAGE RECEPTOR SPRING BLADE
RENEWAL PARTS
657
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 627

10
11
C
A
D
12 B
3 1 15
4 2
RENEWAL PARTS
5
6
7
13 14
658
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 627
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
2 N S HDLS SCREW M3X3 BLACK STL FLAT END 1
3 N S TAPPED SPACER M3X5 GALV STL 2
5 N S HEX NUT M3 PASS SST 2
9 2102619 1 S 800PL5 COMPRESSION ARM DISTRIBUTION BOARD 1
12 2203428 2 S SID BRAKING SYSTEM (SEE ILL. 635) 1
13 2127287 2 S LEFT HANDLE 1
14 2127288 2 S RIGHT HANDLE 1
15 36005885 1 S BELT 1
B SEE ILL. 628
C SEE ILL. 628
D SEE ILL. 628

RENEWAL PARTS
659
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 628
5 2 3 1 13
C D

RENEWAL PARTS
8 6
9

660
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 628
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
1 N S PIN 1
2 N S OFFCENTERED SHAFT 1
4 N S EXT CIRCLIP D=6 TYPE 81 2
5 99146577 1 S BALL BEARING 6X19X6 2
6 N S SPACER 2
7 45553870 1 S 800PL14 MAGNIFICATION SENSOR BOARD 1
10 45554408 1 S 800PL15 INTER ARM TILT SENSOR BOARD 1
11 N S SPACER 2
13 91633373 2 S BALL BEARING, LINEAR 4
RENEWAL PARTS
661
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 629
TUBE HOUSING SPACER 2144560
A B
37 10
39
11
40
37
38
30
35
800PL6
31
A 4 32
33
6 34
4
7
3 8
9
12
13
14
B
C 1
23
21 24
RENEWAL PARTS
21
5
17 28
18
26 15 29 16 41 25
27 19
20
662
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 629
TUBE HOUSING SPACER 2144560
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
N TUBE HOUSING SPACER PL
1 45067212 2 S XRAY TUBE ROTATION SCREW 1
2 N S TAKEUP PULLEY, XRAY TUBE ROTATION 1
3 N S MOTOR PULLEY, XRAY TUBE ROTATION 1
5 45554501 2 S ANTIROTATION PAD 1
6 91726679 1 S BELT 43TOOTH 1
7 45554577 2 S ANTISCATTER SHIELD 1
9 N S HEX SCREW M4X6/6 PASS SST 2
10 2200315 1 S FILTER WHEEL MOTOR ASSEMBLY 1
11 45560092 1 S 3FILTER WHEEL ASSEMBLY 1
12 N S TOOTHLOCK WASHER EXT TTH M4 SST 2
14 N S HEX NUT M4 SST 2
15 2188568 1 S HALOGEN LAMP 12V 100W 1
16 45562593 2 S OPTICAL BOX 1
17 N S PUSHBUTTON: SEE ILLUSTRATION 630 1
18
20 N S FLSTR HD SCREW M3X6/16 SST 2
21 45561662 1 S WIRED SOCKET (CENTERING LIGHT) 1
22 N S FLSTR HD SCREW M2.5X8/8 PASS SST 2
23 45560093 2 S FIXED MIRROR 1
24 2128546 1 S S FIXED MIRROR ASSEMBLY 1
25 2169316 1 S KIT COLLIMATOR V3 CDRH 1

RENEWAL PARTS
26 N S ARTICULATION SHAFT 1
27 N S PIN SHAFT WIRE D=0.9 4
28 2139061 2 S ANTISCATTER BOX 1
29 N S LRG RAISED RND HD SCREW M4X10 PASS SST 1
30 2186192 1 S ROCKER SWITCH, 3POS. 1
31 N S BUTTON MOUNT, WELDED 1
663
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 629
TUBE HOUSING SPACER 2144560 (Continued)
A B
37 10
39
11
40
37
38
30
35
800PL6
31
A 4 32
33
6 34
4
7
3 8
9
12
13
14
B
C 1
23
21 24
RENEWAL PARTS
21
5
17 28
18
26 15 29 16 41 25
27 19
20
664
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 629
TUBE HOUSING SPACER 2144560 (Continued)
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
32 N S CAPTIVE NUT M4 THK=1.7/2.5 STL 4
35 2104795 1 S 800PL6 TUBE HOUSING ARM DISTRIBUTION BOARD 1
36 N S SET OF CABLES, TUBE HOUSING SPACER (SEE ILL. 630 ) 1
RENEWAL PARTS
665
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 630
SET OF CABLES, TUBE HOUSING SPACER 2109334
3
W49
1
W36
2
W48
4
W53
5
W56
RENEWAL PARTS
6
W75
W76
666
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 630
SET OF CABLES, TUBE HOUSING SPACER 2109334
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
N SET OF CABLES, TUBE HOUSING SPACER PL
1 2139272 1 S CABLE (TUBE HOUSING ARM BUTTON) (W36) 1
2 2200315 1 S FILTER MOTOR (W48) 1
3 45553539 1 S TUBE ANGULATION MOTOR (W49) 1
4 45553543 1 S OPTOINTERRUPTER (FILTERS POS) (W53) 1
5 45553546 1 S OPTOINTERRUPTER (TUBE HOUSING POS) (W56) 1
6 36006829 1 S FAN WIRED (XRAY TUBE) (W75) (W76) 2
7 N S PUSHBUTTON: USE 2139272 (ITEM 1) 3
RENEWAL PARTS
667
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 631
IMAGE RECEPTOR 2142583
IMAGE RECEPTOR DMR V2 WITHOUT CELL 2150322

24

A
16

37
13
14
35
13
14
B 1 4 5 7 32
6 8 33
34
15
A
22
23
24 X 30 SIZE
SWITCH
30
31
21
B
2 9
3 10
12
18
17
20
RENEWAL PARTS
C
C
30
31
15
CASSETTE PRESENT
SWITCH
668
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 631
IMAGE RECEPTOR 2142583
IMAGE RECEPTOR DMR V2 WITHOUT CELL 2150322
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
2219112 N IMAGE RECEPTOR PL A
2215923 1 Y IMAGE RECEPTOR DMR V2 WITHOUT CELL TYPE 2 PL B
1 45067222 2 S BALL RACE 1 A,B
2 91389008 2 S BALL SPRING PUSHBUTTON M8 STL 1 A,B
3 N S HEX NUT M8 PASS SST 1 A,B
4 2182963 1 S PHOTOCELL ASSEMBLY (SEE ILL. 632) 1 A
5 N S HEX SKT HD CAP SCREW M3X10/10 PASS SST 2 A,B
6 N S FLAT WASHER M3 N STL 2 A,B
8 N S FLAT WASHER Z3 U STL 2 A,B
9 N S HEX SCREW M3X16/16 PASS SST 2 A,B
11 21152842 1 S 800PL10 IMAGE RECEPTOR BOARD 1 A,B
12 N S FORK 1 A,B
15 45067349 1 S ROLLER MICROSWITCH 1POS 1 A,B
16 36002774 1 S PIN 1 A,B
17 2124041 2 S LEVER 1 A,B
18 N S HDLS SCREW M3X5 BLACK STL FLAT END 1 A,B
19 2142628 2 S SET OF CABLES, IMAGE RECEPTOR 1 A,B
20 2191892 1 Y S S KIT MOTOR OF GRID ASSY. (W28) 1 A,B
21 45560236 2 S WELDED COVER 1 A,B
22 N S HEX SKT HD CAP SCREW M4X8/8 PASS SST 2 A
22 N S HEX SCREW M4X10/10 PASS SST 2 B

RENEWAL PARTS
23 N S FLAT WASHER M4 U PASS SST 2 A,B
24 45560189 1 S MOBILE COVER 1 A,B
25 N S SPRING WASHER DYNA 8X4.2X0.3 STL 2 A,B
27 N S FLAT WASHER 8X4X0.8 PASS SST 4 A,B
669
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 631
IMAGE RECEPTOR 2142583 (Continued)
IMAGE RECEPTOR DMR V2 WITHOUT CELL 2150322 (Continued)

24

A
16

37
13
14
35
13
14
B 1 4 5 7 32
6 8 33
34
15
A
22
23
24 X 30 SIZE
SWITCH
30
31
21
B
2 9
3 10
12
18
17
20
RENEWAL PARTS
C
C
30
31
15
CASSETTE PRESENT
SWITCH
670
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 631
IMAGE RECEPTOR 2142583 (Continued)
IMAGE RECEPTOR DMR V2 WITHOUT CELL 2150322 (Continued)
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
28 N S FLAT WASHER M4 U NYLON 2 A,B
29 N S HEX NUT SNEP H130 M4 SST 2 A,B
30 99198123 1 S BALL SPRING PUSHBUTTON M12 SST 2 A
30 N S BALL SPRING PUSHBUTTON M12 STL 2 B
31 N S HEX NUT M12 GALV STL 2 A,B
32 N S HEX SKT HD CAP SCREW M5X25/22 PASS SST PL A,B
33 N S WASHER WITH CONVEX FACE 5.2X10.5X2 BRUNISHED STL PL A,B
34 N S WASHER WITH CONCAVE FACE 6X10.5X2.1 BRUNISHED STL PL A,B
35 N S FLAT WASHER Z3 U STL 2 A,B
36 N S MAGNET HOLDER ASSEMBLY 1 A,B
37 91671876 2 S S MAGNET 1 A,B
RENEWAL PARTS
671
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 632
PHOTOCELL ASSEMBLY 2144918
1
RENEWAL PARTS
672
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 632
PHOTOCELL ASSEMBLY 2144918
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
2182963 1 Y PHOTOCELL ASSEMBLY PL
1 2143783 1 S PHOTOMULTIPLIER KIT 1
2 N S PLUG 1
3 N S STOPPER 1
4 N S PLASTIC GUIDE 1
5 56052519 1 CELL DISASSEMBLY TOOL (FOR PLUG 2133745) 1
RENEWAL PARTS
673
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 633
PADDLE FASTENER ASSEMBLY 4560085
A
21
4 5 6 3 7 8
12
9 11 22
10
20
13
17 18
RENEWAL PARTS
18 19
800PL9 800PL8
15 14
16 16
674
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 633
PADDLE FASTENER ASSEMBLY 4560085
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
45560085 1 PADDLE FASTENER ASSEMBLY PL
1 91513131 1 S BALL LATCH 11
2 N S HEX NUT M8 PASS SST
3 N S COMMAND SHAFT 1
4 N S SELFLUBRICATING BUSHING D=6X10X6 BRONZE 4
5 N S WASHER BELLEVILLE 12.5X6.2X0.5 STL 10
6 N S EXT CIRCLIP D=6 TYPE 81 2
7 36005384 1 S COMMAND BUTTON 2
8 N S HEX SKT HDLS SCREW CUP END M3X8/8 PASS SST 2
11 N S PCB SUPPORT 1
13 91671876 2 S MAGNET D=4X20 1
14 45561125 2 S PADDLE FASTENER RIGHT COVER 1
15 45561126 2 S PADDLE FASTENER LEFT COVER 1
16 N S FLSTR HD SCREW M4X10/10 PASS SST 2
18 N S HEX SCREW M3X8 PASS SST 5
19 45554410 1 S 800PL8 PADDLE BOARD 1
20 45553536 1 S CABLE (PADDLE FINEMOVEMENT) 1
21 N S FLAT WASHER Z6 U GALV STL 4
RENEWAL PARTS
675
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 634
ELECTROMAGNET MOUNT ASSEMBLY 45560090
7 4 8 9
6 5 3 1 10
RENEWAL PARTS
676
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 634
ELECTROMAGNET MOUNT ASSEMBLY 45560090
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
N ELECTROMAGNET MOUNT ASSEMBLY PL
1 45553531 1 S ELECTROMAGNET WIRED (LOCK) 1
3 45554473 2 S FORK JOINT 1
4 N S CYLINDRICAL SELFLUBRICATING BUSHING BRONZE 1
5 N S COMPRESSION SPRING 1
6 45562514 1 S LOCKING PIN GLUED 1
7 91671876 2 S S MAGNET D=4X20 1
8 45554472 2 S FORK JOINT SHAFT 1
9 N S SMOOTH SELFLOCKING RING 1
10 N S RUBBER WASHER 6X12X1 2
RENEWAL PARTS
677
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 635
SID BRAKING SYSTEM 2107675
1
RENEWAL PARTS
678
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 635
SID BRAKING SYSTEM 2107675
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
2107675 2 SID BRAKING SYSTEM PL
1 2108751 2 S EQUIPPED BELT 1
RENEWAL PARTS
679
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 636
SET OF CABLES, COMPRESSION ARM 2108737
1
W37
2
W38
3
W39
5 6
W43
7
W44
RENEWAL PARTS
8
W45
9
W47
680
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 636
SET OF CABLES, COMPRESSION ARM 2108737
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
N SET OF CABLES, COMPRESSION ARM PL
1 45553527 2 S CABLE (SID) (W37) 1
2 45553528 1 S CABLE (IMAGE RECEPTOR) (W38) 1
3 45553529 1 S WIRED MOTOR (COMPRESSION) (W39) 1
4 N S CABLE (ELEVATOR/ROTATION PUSHBUTTONS) (W40) 1
5 2186192 1 S S ROCKER SWITCH, 3POS. 8
6 45553533 1 S CABLE (PADDLE SHIFT) (W43) 1
7 45553534 1 S CABLE (TILT) (W44) 1
8 45553535 2 S CABLE (MAGNIFICATION) (W45) 1
9 45553537 1 S CABLE (PADDLE POSITION ENCODER) (W47) 1
10 45559795 N S PROTECTIVE CABLE (W65) 1
RENEWAL PARTS
681
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 637
ACCESSORIES 2109225
10
5 7
14 27 8
9
11 22
24
2116257
15
21
13
20
18
17
RENEWAL PARTS
26
682
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 637
ACCESSORIES 2109225
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
ACCESSORIES PL
1 2147760 1 Y S BUCKY 18X24 PLASTIC CDRH 1
2 N S S BUCKY 18X24 PLASTIC 1
3 N S S S BUCKY 18X24, SEMIASSEMBLED 1
4 45067325 1 S S S ANTISCATTER GRID 18X24 1
2183181 1 S S S CASSETTE SENSOR 1
5 2177486 1 N S KIT FOR CENTERING DEVICE AND CASSETTE STOP 1
6 N S S GRID CENTERING DEVICE 1
36003586 N S S PIN 2
45559485 N S S SPRING 2
45554427 N S S SHAFT 2
7 N S S CASSETTE PRESS SPRING 1
8 2120592 N S S CASSETTE STOP BRACKET 2
9 2120590 N S S CASSETTE SPRING 2
10 2165450 1 S PADDLE 18X24 INJECTED TYPE 2 1
11 45475446 2 S CENTERED PADDLE (INJECTED) 1
12 45559489 1 S AXILLARY PADDLE * 1
13 C808649 1 S S AUXILIARY PLATE 1
14 N S S SLIDER 1
15 2114797 2 S LINE SUPPLY CABLE 1
16 2144911 1 S EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT (SEE ILLUSTRATION 638) 1
17 36003928 1 S SHOULDER GUARD PACKED 1
18 2162958 1 S MANUAL FILM MARKING DEVICE (MAIN SET) 1
* FOR COUNTRIES SUBJECT TO MQSA (E.G. US AND CANADA),

RENEWAL PARTS
ORDER FMI 11468 (PART NO. 2308834) AT THE SAME TIME.
683
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 637
ACCESSORIES 2109225 (Continued)
10
5 7
14 27 8
9
11 22
24
2116257
15
21
13
20
18
17
RENEWAL PARTS
26
684
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 637
ACCESSORIES 2109225 (Continued)
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
19 1 S MAGNIFICATION ASSY CDRH 1
20 36006471 N S S MAGNIFICATION UNIT 1
21 91671876 2 S S S MAGNET D=4X20 1
22 2147919 1 S MAGNIFICATION CASSETTE HOLDER 18X24 PLASTIC CDRH 1
23 N S S CASSETTE HOLDER 18X24 (PLASTIC) 1
24 2116257 1 S SERVICE TERMINAL CABLE EMC 1
25 45560622 2 S SENOGRAPHE INSTALLATION KIT 1
N S S JACK SCREW 4
45560621 2 S S JACK SUPPORT 4
45560509 N S S COVER (PEDESTAL) 7
45559940 1 S S PLASTIC COVER (USE KIT SET OF CAPS: 2120544) 30
N S S HEX SKT HD CAP SCREW M8X80/80 CHROME STL 6
N S S WASHER 26X11X4 3
N S S GRID ADJUSTMENT TOOL 1
N S S WASHER 8
N S S STABILIZER 4
N S S EXPANSION BOLT M10 6
N S S FLAT WASHER M10N PASS SST 3
26 2150064 1 S CABLE ASSEMBLY (CONSOLE/GENERATOR, L=10M) 1
27 2109224 1 KIT OF 2 GRID SUPPORT 1
N S GRID SUPPORT FOR 18X24 1
N S GRID SUPPORT FOR 24X30 1
RENEWAL PARTS
685
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 638
EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT 2144911
RENEWAL PARTS
686
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 638
EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT 2144911
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
2144911 1 EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT PL
N S TEST CABLE 64C 1
N S FLSTR HD SCREW M4X16X16 PASS SST 2
N S LRG RAISED RND HD SCREW M4X10 PASS SST 2
N S FLAT WASHER Z4 N PASS SST 2
N S HEX SKT HD CAP SCREW M5X50/16 BLACK STL 1
N S FLSTR HD SCREW M4X8/8 PASS SST 1
N S CAP (USE KIT SET OF CAPS: 2120544) 1
N S FAST FUSE 6X32 2.0A 250V C 100A ULL 2
N S FAST FUSE 6X32 10A 380V C 10KA ULL 2
91684676 1 S FAST FUSE 27X27 125A 150V AC ULR 1
99184154 1 S FAST FUSE 27X60 35A 600V C 100 KA ULL 3
N S SLOWBLOW FUSE 6X32 2.5A 250V C 100A ULL 3
N S SLOWBLOW FUSE 6X32 3.2A 250V C 100A ULL 1
N S SLOWBLOW FUSE 6X32 10A 250V C 200A ULL 2
N S BAG OF LANGUAGE STICKON LABELS 1
N S S GERMAN PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION LABEL 25
N S S ITALIAN PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION LABEL 25
N S S SPANISH PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION LABEL 25
N S S FRENCH PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION LABEL 25
N S S GERMAN PRODUCT SPECIFICATION LABEL 25

RENEWAL PARTS
N S S ITALIAN PRODUCT SPECIFICATION LABEL 2
N S S SPANISH PRODUCT SPECIFICATION LABEL 2
687
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 638
EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT 2144911 (Continued)
RENEWAL PARTS
688
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 638
EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT 2144911 (Continued)
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
N S S FRENCH PRODUCT SPECIFICATION LABEL 2
N S S OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1
N S CABLE TIE 4
N S TOOL BOX 1
N S TEST BOARD64 1
N S GRID ADJUSTMENT TOOL 1
N S PIN 1
N S AXIS 1
N S FLAT WASHER M3 N PASS SST 1
N S DUMMY BOARD 1
N S SHUNT TUBE (FOR SINGLE PHASE) 1
N S FLAT WASHER Z3 U STL 1
N S CAPTIVE NUT M4 THK=1.2/1.6 STL 2
RENEWAL PARTS
689
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 639
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
20
11
14
15
16
17
19
4
10
3
RENEWAL PARTS
7 9
690
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 639
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
1 36006772 1 S STANDARD XRAY SHIELD (CENTRAL PANEL) 1
2 45554827 2 S S GLASS WINDOW FOR XRAY SHIELD 1
3 36005901 1 S HANDSWITCH KIT 1
N S S COMPONENTS FOR HANDSWITCH 1
4 46270800G3 1 S S S HANDSWITCH ONLY 1
N S S S END CAP 1
5 46315241P1 1 S S S SPIRAL CABLE 1
N S S STIRRUP 1
N S S FLSTR HD SCREW N440 UNC L=1/4 SST 2
N S S FLSTR HD SCREW M4X16/16 PASS SST 2
N S S FLAT WASHER M4 U PASS SST 1
N S S CABLE TIE 1
N S S INSULATING SMOOTH SPACER 4.2X8X3 NYLON 2
N S S DATA 36005901104 HANDSWITCH DMR 1
6 N S SENOGRAPHE PATIENT CHAIR 1
7 N S ACCESSORY TROLLEY 1
8 45554823 1 S S ACCESSORY TROLLEY WHEEL 4
9 45554824 1 S S ACCESSORY TROLLEY FOAM 1
10 N S STEREOTIX 2 CDRH EMC 1
N S 24X30 OPTION 1
11 2145097 1 Y S S BUCKY 24X30 CDRH 1
12 N S S S BUCKY 24X30 1
RENEWAL PARTS
13 N S S S S BUCKY 24X30 SEMIEQUIPPED 1
14 36006129 2 S S S S S CASSETTE PRESS SPRING 1
15 45554550 2 S S S S S GRID CENTERING DEVICE 1
16 1 S S S S S CASSETTE STOP BRACKET 2
17 45559685 1 S S S S STOP (PLASTIC) 2
18 45067326 1 S S S S ANTISCATTER GRID 24X30 1
691
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 639
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES (Continued)
20
11
14
15
16
17
19
4
10
3
RENEWAL PARTS
7 9
692
REV 3 sm 2308530100
ILLUSTRATION 639
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES (Continued)
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
19 22457642 1 S S COMPRESSION PADDLE 24X30 (EXCEPT US, CANADA) 1
2346852 1 S S COMPRESSION PADDLE 24X30 (US, CANADA ONLY) 1
20 2164645 N S MANUAL FILM MARKING DEVICE (OPTION SET)
N S DATAFLASH 1
N S DATAFLASH CABLE 20M 1
1 S PADDLE 18X24 INJECTED TYPE 2 1
N S SQUARE SPOT PADDLE 1
N S ROUND SPOT PADDLE 1
RENEWAL PARTS
693
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Blank page.
RENEWAL PARTS
694
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHAPTER 7 PLANNED MAINTENANCE
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains recommendations for planned maintenance of the Senographe DMR
mammography system.
71
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Blank page
72
REV 3 sm 2308530100
SENOGRAPHE DMR V2_P Job Card PM001 1 of 2
Purpose: DMR PLANNED MAINTENANCE STEERING Version No.:

Date : July 2002
Time: n/a Personnel: 1 field engineer
Recommended planned maintenance tasks for the Senographe DMR mammography system are listed below.
The Job Cards referred to are in the present Service Manual.
Task Title Job Card Interval

(months)
Site Status PM002 12
Remove System Covers PM003 12
Analyze Gantry and Generator Error Codes Chapter 4 12
Check AEC Max Exposure Time Safety PM004 12
Check Emergency Stop Buttons PM005 12
Check Compression Safety PM006 12
Check Cable Ground and XRay Tube Safety PM008 12
Inspect Lead Glass Shield PM009 12
Check HV Unit and HV Cable Connections PM010 36
Clean System PM011 12
Check +5V Supply on Generator CPU Board PM012 24
Check Column Up/Down Movement PM013 12
Check Arm Rotation PM014 12
Check Compression Force PM015 24
Check Breast Thickness Measurement PM016 24
Check Photocell Positioning PM018 12
Check Format Control PM019 24
Check Tube Housing Arm Detents PM020 24
Check Magnification Sensors and SID Sensors PM021 24
Check Bucky and Test Bucky PM022 12
Check Stereotix Option PM023 12
Check Chair Option PM024 12
ReInstall System Covers PM003 12
Summarize the PM Visit With the Customer none 12
Put All Task Set Data Sheets in Log Book none 12
73
REV 3 sm 2308530100
DMR PLANNED MAINTENANCE STEERING

Job Card PM001 2 of 2
Blank page
74
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: SITE STATUS Version No.:

Date : July 2002
Time: 15 min Personnel: 1 field engineer
SECTION 1
SITE LOGBOOK
1. Review the site Logbook to identify recently applied FMI procedures and last Planned Maintenance
Operation Report.
2. Verify the presence of the following log diskettes with the site logbook:
Data calibration diskette
PM diskette
SECTION 2
REVIEW SYSTEM OPERATION WITH CUSTOMER
1. Discuss with customer to find out if there are any specific problems with the system. Make a list of
problems and distinguish between problems that can be solved by:
Corrective maintenance
Planned maintenance
2. Propose solution(s) with the customer and come to an agreement on what actions are to be taken.
75
REV 3 sm 2308530100
SITE STATUS
Blank page
76
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: REMOVE SYSTEM COVERS Version No.:

Date : July 2002
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Metric Allen wrenches (including 5.5 mm).
D Large flat screwdriver.
D Slim flat blade (knife or similar).
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
BEFORE BEGINNING WORK, SHUT DOWN THE EQUIPMENT AND

WARNING SWITCH OFF THE SENOGRAPHE HOSPITAL SUPPLY CIRCUIT
BREAKER. LOCK IT IN THE OFF POSITION OR MARK IT CLEARLY
WITH A WARNING SIGN TO PREVENT OTHERS FROM APPLYING
POWER.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
77
REV 3 sm 2308530100
REMOVE SYSTEM COVERS

SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 Covers to be removed

D First, look at the list of PM operations to be carried out.
Use the following table to decide which covers need to be removed:
If these operations are to be carried out: Remove these covers: Refer to

PM Group Task Title Section
Generator Any (except Check Generator Calibration) Generator covers 5.2
Gantry Column Movement Both gantry half-covers 5.3
Gantry Check X-ray Tube Tube Housing Spacer 5.5
covers
Gantry Check Compression Compression arm cover 5.4
Gantry Replace Gantry CPU Lithium Battery Left gantry half-cover only 5.3
78
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.2 Remove/replace generator covers

Refer to the illustration below for screw and panel locations.
1. Remove all power from the Senographe.
2. Remove the four plastic plugs covering the generator top panel securing screws.
3. Use an Allen wrench to remove the four generator top panel retaining screws (1).
4. Remove generator top panel by lifting upwards.
5. It is not normally necessary to remove the rear panel or the right-hand side panel for PM operations.
6. For the front panel (panel with operator switches, ref. 2), and for the left-hand side panel (3):
1. Remove the two screws securing the panel.
2. Slightly lift the panel upwards and towards yourself.
3. Disconnect the panels ground wire at the Generator end to avoid risk of creating a short circuit.
7. Perform the procedure in reverse order for replacement.
Be sure to reconnect the ground wires.
Take care when replacing the Generator Cabinet covers, especially if the conditioner air and water pipes have
been disturbed. Check that the covers do not block the pipes.
1
3 2
79
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.3 Remove/replace left or right gantry half-cover

1. Remove all power from the Senographe.
2. Use a hex wrench to remove screw (3).
3. Remove the plastic plugs and two screws (4) from the top of the column half-cover.
4. DO NOT touch two screws (5). Undo hex bolt (6) by 2 or 3 turns (accessible through a slot at rear of the
base); this method retains correct alignment of the cover with the safety stop switch.
5. Slide the complete half-cover towards you to remove it.
6. Perform the procedure in reverse order for replacement.

BE CAREFUL NOT TO PINCH OR DAMAGE CABLES.
5
3
710
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.4 Remove/replace compression arm covers

1. Set the compression arm in the horizontal position, tube on the right, and unlock the tube housing arm to
set it at 27 degrees, with the tube below the horizontal.
2. Switch OFF the Senographe electrical power.
3. Refer to the illustration below. Use a flat screwdriver and 4 mm Allen wrench to remove the two left hand
cover securing screws (1 and 2).
4. Remove the left half-cover by slightly lifting it on the compression motor side, and then gently pulling it
to the left.
5. Switch the Senographe electrical power back on.
6. Reset the tube housing arm to 0 degrees.
7. Rotate the compression arm through 180 degrees and unlock the housing arm to set the tube 27 degrees
downwards.
8. Switch OFF the Senographe electrical power.
9. Use the flat screwdriver and 4 mm Allen wrench, remove the two right hand cover securing screws.
10. Remove the right half-cover by slightly lifting it on the compression motor side, and then gently pulling
it to the right.
11. Remove spacer plate (on the top of the sensor indicator plate) and remove the indicator plate by gently pull-
ing it towards the bottom of the compression arm.
12. To reinstall the compression arm covers, carry out the above operations in reverse order.
When replacing the covers, reinstall the spacer plate as quickly as possible.
CAUTION It will stay in place when one of the half-covers has been reinstalled. To pre-
vent the indicator plate from falling, do not set the compression arm in the
vertical position until at least one half-cover has been installed.
711
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.5 Remove/replace tube housing spacer covers
BE CAREFUL WHEN TOUCHING THE TUBE HOUSING, AS ITS TEM-

WARNING PERATURE CAN BE UP TO 80 _C (ABOUT 180 F)
D Refer to the following illustration and instructions:
5 B 6
7
8
3
P
4
1. Remove strip B (clipped in position).
2. Set the tube housing arm horizontal, with the head on the right.
3. Remove the plastic covers and screws 3, 5 and 7.
4. Remove the left half-cover.
5. Rotate the arm through 180 degrees (head on the left).
6. Remove the plastic covers and screws 4, 6 and 8.
7. Remove the right half-cover.
8. To reinstall the tube housing spacer covers, carry out the above operations in reverse order.
Take care to install the short screws in positions 3 and 4.
712
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CHECK AEC MAX EXPOSURE TIME SAFETY Version No.:

Date : July 2002
SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED
D Engineers standard toolkit
D Phantom (not mandatory)
D 7 cm of plexiglass
SECTION 2
PROCEDURE
1. Place the following items on bucky so that the photocell is completely covered:
7 cm of plexiglass
phantom or a film cassette
2. Insert a film cassette into the bucky.
3. Make a note of the Film Density Control (FDC) value on the console.
4. On the console, set the FDC to the value 5 (maximum value).
5. Set up an AEC exposure with: Mo/Mo/LF/24 kV
6. Take the AEC exposure.
NO exposure should be made. The following error message MUST appear on the console:
S03 Exposure aborted by AEC
7. On the console, return the FDC to its original value as noted above.
713
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHECK AEC MAX EXPOSURE TIME SAFETY

Blank page
714
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CHECK EMERGENCY STOP BUTTONS Version No.:

Date : July 2002
SECTION 1
PROCEDURE
Note: Be sure to check each emergency stop button at a moment during the PM visit when you need to power
down the system. Do not test all three buttons successively over a short time interval.
Pressing any one of the three emergency stop buttons (located on either side of the gantry column and on
console) should result in a complete powerdown of both the generator and gantry.
715
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHECK EMERGENCY STOP BUTTONS

Blank page
716
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CHECK COMPRESSION SAFETY Version No.:

Date : July 2002
SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED
D Mammo compression tool PN 46194427P407 or equivalent (accuracy +/ 0.5 daN)
SECTION 2
PROCEDURE
1. Install the mammo compression tool between the cassette holder and the compression paddle.
2. Increase compression gradually until the compression value on the tool displays 3 daN.
When compression is >= 3 daN, column up/down movement and arm rotation MUST both be pro-
hibited.
3. During decompression movement, press downward on the top of the compression paddle:
Decompression movement MUST stop automatically as soon as you apply 3 daN or more force
against the deompression movement.
717
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHECK COMPRESSION SAFETY

Blank page
718
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CHECK CABLE GROUNDING AND XRAY Version No.:

TUBE SAFETY Date : July 2002
SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED
D Standard toolkit
SECTION 2
CHECKING CABLE GROUNDING
1. Power off the system by pressing an emergency stop button that you have not yet tested during this
PM visit.
2. Remove all power from the Senographe DMR by turning off the wallmounted circuit breaker.
3. Check grounding of the following cables:
Anode starter motor cable (2109187) at Xray tube end. The shield of this cable is terminated
with a metal grounding clip which must be securely fixed as shown in the illustration on the next
page.
Generator AC Incoming Line cable. Check tightness of connections for incoming phase, neutral
and ground wires.
HV cable. To ensure proper grounding of the HV cable, tighten the 1.5 mm allen screw on the top
of the cable locking ring at both ends of the HV cable.
Note: If the HV cable is not properly grounded, then intermittent console lockup and random error messages
could occur in such an event, check the grounding at both ends of the cable.
Anode return cable (2109238). Check that Xray tube anode return wire (marked BLOC + HT)
is connected to the threaded stud marked with a ground symbol on the top of the HV unit (for more
information click the Anode return cable button).
Anode return cable 2109238
(marked BLOC +HT)
719
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHECK CABLE GROUNDING AND XRAY

TUBE SAFETY Job Card PM008 2 of 2
SECTION 3
CHECKING XRAY TUBE SAFETY
1. Switch on system power.
2. Check operation of fans in Xray tube compartment.
3. Check thermal switches in Xray tube compartment:
Disconnect connector XJ4 from board 800PL6 and check that the message: TUBE HOUSING OVER
TEMPERATURE is displayed on the console.
HV Connector
XJ4 on board 800PL6
Anode Starter Cable 2109187
Thermal Switch
720
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: INSPECT LEAD GLASS SHIELD Version No.:

Date : July 2002
SECTION 1
PROCEDURE
Visually inspect lead glass shield condition security:
D Make sure it is stable.
D Glass is not cracked or broken.
D Check for cracks or openings in the frame or between frame and glass.
721
REV 3 sm 2308530100
INSPECT LEAD GLASS SHIELD

Blank page
722
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CHECK HV UNIT AND HV CABLE Version No.:

CONNECTIONS Date : July 2002
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D HV Grease C333633
D HV Oil C158117 (Z30118) (available in 30-liter tin only)
SECTION 2
TOOLS
None
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

POWER.
723
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHECK HV UNIT AND HV CABLE CONNEC-

TIONS Job Card PM010 2 of 2
SECTION 4
PROCEDURE
4.1 To check the HV Unit, refer to the illustration below, and proceed as follows:
1. Remove HV connector and visually inspect earth braid continuity.
2. Check presence of oil or grease in HV connector. If necessary, add the appropriate product.
3. Reconnect HV connector and secure the locking screw.
4. Check for presence of oil leakage around the connectors on the top of the HV unit. If there is oil leakage,
replace the HV unit as per D/R Job Card HV and kV/mA Tank.
5. Check that vent screw is open.
6. Perform a visual check of connectors on HV unit.
Primary Winding
HV Measurement
Vent Screw
HV Connector
4.2 To check the HV connection to the Xray tube, proceed as follows:
Be careful when touching the tube housing, as its temperature can be up to

CAUTION 80 deg. C (about 180 deg. F).
1. Remove HV connector and visually inspect earth braid continuity.
2. Check presence of oil or grease in HV connector. If necessary, add the appropriate product.
3. Reconnect HV connector and secure the locking screw.
724
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CLEAN SYSTEM Version No.:

Date : July 2002
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Vacuum cleaner: 46194427P392 (for 120V supply) or 46194427P391 (for 220V supply)
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

POWER.
SECTION 4
PROCEDURE
1. Use a suitable vacuum cleaner to remove accumulated dust from the inside the tube compartment, genera-
tor cabinet and bottom of the column.
2. Check that there is no dust on the collimator diaphragm blades. If necessary, remove the dust with a clean
dry cloth.
3. Check that collimator diaphragm blades move smoothly with no hard spots. If necessary, clean the sliders
with a clean dry cloth.
725
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CLEAN SYSTEM
Blank page
726
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CHECK +5V SUPPLY ON GENERATOR CPU Version No.:

BOARD Date : July 2002
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D Potentiometer locking varnish
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Accurate digital voltmeter (Fluke 87 or equivalent)
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
727
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHECK +5V SUPPLY ON GENERATOR CPU

BOARD Job Card PM012 2 of 4
SECTION 4
PROCEDURE
4.1 Measuring the +5V Supply Voltage

1. On the 400PL3 Generator CPU Board, measure DC voltage between TP110 (VCC) and TP111 (GND).
The voltage should be in the range +5.05 to +5.15 VDC (see illustration below).
300PL4 CPU BOARD
TP 111 () TP 110 (+)
2. If the measured voltage is in the specified range, stop here.

3. If the measured voltage is out of range, perform the corrective action in the following section.
728
REV 3 sm 2308530100

4.2 Adjusting the +5V Supply Voltage

Note: Do not perform this procedure unless the voltage measured in the previous section is outside the speci-
fied range.
1. On the 400PL3 Generator CPU Board, measure DC voltage between TP110 (VCC) and TP111 (GND).
2. Adjust the potentiometer on the power supply unit to obtain 5.10VDC on the voltmeter (see illustration
below).
3. Apply potentiometer locking varnish to the potentiometer to prevent further movement.
POTENTIOMETER LOCATION IN POWER SUPPLY
Potentiometer
729
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Blank page
730
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CHECK COLUMN UP/DOWN MOVEMENT Version No.:

Date : July 2002
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D Lubricant 46194427P85
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Standard toolkit
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
BEFORE BEGINNING WORK ON THE COLUMN MECHANISM, SHUT

WARNING DOWN THE EQUIPMENT AND SWITCH OFF THE SENOGRAPHE
HOSPITAL SUPPLY CIRCUIT BREAKER. LOCK IT IN THE OFF POSI-
TION OR MARK IT CLEARLY WITH A WARNING SIGN TO PREVENT
OTHERS FROM APPLYING POWER.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Remove the Gantry Column covers. Refer to the PM Job Card Remove System Covers.
731
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHECK COLUMN UP/DOWN MOVEMENT

SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 Check column movement

1. With the compression paddle out of compression, check that all four sets of column up/down control but-
tons are operational (check each button for up and down movement of column).
2. Move column to its upper and lower limits. Optical sensors should stop movement. If optical sensors have
failed, mechanical safety stops halt movement. Total one-way movement time (going either up or down)
between upper and lower limits should be 16 2 seconds. This time includes initial acceleration, which lasts
3 seconds.
3. During column movement, check for any noise which might indicate excessive friction or binding.
5.2 Check and clean the column mechanism

Refer to the illustration below, and proceed as follows:
1. Raise the column to its maximum height, to facilitate access to the column mechanism.
2. Switch off system power (see the Warning above).
3. Check for any sign of oil leakage from the gas spring (1). Leakage may indicate the need to change the
spring.
4. Clean and lubricate the jack screw (2) and guide rails (3). Use 46-194427P85.
5. Check the motor drive belt (4) manually for adequate tension.
6. Clean the optical encoder disk (5).

1
5 3
732
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CHECK ARM ROTATION Version No.:

Date : July 2002
SECTION 1
PROCEDURE
1. With the compression paddle out of compression, check that all four arm rotation control buttons are opera-
tional (check each button for release and re-locking of arm rotation).
Note: Rotation does not work if compression is greater than 3 kg.
2. Rotate arm through its full range of +/180deg. Check in several positions that electro-brake is sufficient,
by manual action on the handles.
733
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHECK ARM ROTATION

Blank page
734
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CHECK COMPRESSION FORCE Version No.:

Date : July 2002
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D Light oil suitable for lubrication of compression guide rail.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Compression measurement tool: GAMMEX RMI model 817 or Mammo compression scale
p/n 46-194427P407 (digital display).
D Standard toolkit.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
BEFORE BEGINNING WORK ON THE COMPRESSION MECHANISM,

WARNING SHUT DOWN THE EQUIPMENT AND SWITCH OFF THE SENO-
GRAPHE HOSPITAL SUPPLY CIRCUIT BREAKER. LOCK IT IN THE
OFF POSITION OR MARK IT CLEARLY WITH A WARNING SIGN TO
PREVENT OTHERS FROM APPLYING POWER.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Remove the Compression Arm covers. Refer to the PM Job Card Remove System Covers.
735
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHECK COMPRESSION FORCE

SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 Check compression.

1. Check the compression paddle mounting for signs of cracks or other damage.
2. Verify that both sets of compression/decompression pedals and the manual compression knobs located on
the paddle holder all function correctly (i.e., the paddle moves up or down in response to each command).
3. Use the mammo compression scale placed between the cassette holder and the compression paddle to
check calibration of the compression force display on the gantry readout. Measure one point at 5 daN, one
point at 15 daN, and one point at 20 daN. The value on the gantry readout must agree within 1 daN. If
it does not, perform Job Card Calibration of Compression Force Detector in Service Manual.
Note: If the recommended compression measurement tool is not available, this verification can be done
by lowering the paddle close to the top surface of the cassette holder, installing the magnification
device in the upper pair of holes, and connecting a spring dynamometer (calibrated from 0 to
20 daN) between the compression paddle and the magnification device.
736
REV 3 sm 2308530100

5.2 Check and clean the compression mechanism

Refer to the illustration below, and proceed as follows:
1. Switch off system power (see the Warning above).
2. Check the small compression drive belt (1) manually for adequate tension.
3. Check the large compression drive belt (2) manually for adequate tension.
4. Clean and lubricate the guide rail (3).
5. Check the full length of the steel belt (4) for any signs of wear or breaking.
1
2
737
REV 3 sm 2308530100

Blank page
738
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CHECK BREAST THICKNESS Version No.:

MEASUREMENT Date : July 2002
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Plexiglass in thickness increments of 0.5 cm
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
1. Install the bucky and place 10 mm of plexiglass in the center of the bucky.
2. Lower the compression paddle into contact with the plexiglass.
3. Slowly increase compression force on the plexiglass while watching the breast thickness display on the
gantry readout. The displayed value should remain in the range 10 mm +/5 mm for any value of compres-
sion force (as displayed on the gantry readout) between 5 and 15 daN.
4. Replace 10 mm of plexiglass with 50 mm of plexiglass and repeat the above check. Now the displayed val-
ue should remain in the range 50 mm +/5 mm for any value of compression force (as displayed on the
gantry readout) between 5 and 15 daN.
5. If either or both of the above checks does not give a satisfactory result, perform Job Card Calibration of
Breast Thickness Measurement.
739
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHECK BREAST THICKNESS MEASUREMENT

Blank page
740
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CHECK PHOTOCELL POSITIONING Version No.:

Date : July 2002
SECTION 1
TOOLS
None
SECTION 2
PROCEDURE
Check photocell in all positions. Detents should be distinct and movement between detents should be
smooth and free of hard spots.
741
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHECK PHOTOCELL POSITIONING

Blank page
742
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CHECK FORMAT CONTROL Version No.:

Date : July 2002
SECTION 1
PROCEDURE
Check that repeated pressing of each of the two format control pushbuttons, gives the sequence:
1) light centering device lights; 2) first format reduction; 3) second format reduction; 4) full format.
743
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHECK FORMAT CONTROL

Blank page
744
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CHECK TUBE HOUSING ARM DETENTS Version No.:

Date : July 2002
SECTION 1
PROCEDURE
1. Activate the tube housing arm locking lever and rotate the tube housing arm to its +/ 15 deg. and +/ 27
deg. detents. When tube housing arm is locked in each of these four positions, the error message Incorrect
X_Ray Incidence should appear on the console display.
2. Rotate the tube housing arm so that it is floating between detents. After five seconds, the error message
Tube Housing Arm Unlocked should appear on the console display and Arm Unlocked should appear on
the gantry readout.
745
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHECK TUBE HOUSING ARM DETENTS

Blank page
746
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CHECK MAGNIFICATION SENSORS AND SID Version No.:

SENSORS Date : July 2002
SECTION 1
PROCEDURE
1. Set SID to 660 mm.
2. With magnification device removed, the gantry readout should show a magnification of 1.0.
3. Install the magnification device into the lower, middle and upper holes succcessively. The gantry readout
should show a magnification of 1.5, 1.8 and 1.9, respectively.
4. Leaving the magnification device in the upper holes, change the SID to 610, 560 and 510 mm successively.
The gantry readout should show a magnification of 1.7, 1.6 and 1.5, respectively.
Upper hole
Middle hole
Lower hole
510

SID 560
610
660
747
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHECK MAGNIFICATION SENSORS AND SID

SENSORS Job Card PM021 2 of 2
Blank page
748
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CHECK BUCKY AND TEST BUCKY Version No.:

Date : July 2002
SECTION 1
PROCEDURE
1. Check cassette centering blade spring function.
2. Check that paddle and cassette do not move when arm is rotated from 90 to +90 deg.
3. Repeat two previous steps with cassette holder installed.
4. Check bucky fixing.
5. Check cassette detection (cassette size sensor) as follows:
1. With bucky removed, activate the light centering device.
2. Install the 24x30 bucky, or, if not available, activate the cassette size sensor switch located on
the top of the image receptor support.
The format size should increase, as indicated by the size of the field illuminated by the
light centering device.
6. Check grid movement as follows:
1. With the bucky removed, press the 1st trigger button on the console. There should not be move-
ment of the grid drive train, and there should not be any error message.
2. Manually place the grid carriage at left endoftravel.
3. Slowly tilt the examination arm to the right:

The carriage should move to the opposite end of travel BEFORE you reach a tilt angle
of 45 deg.
4. Manually place the grid carriage at right endoftravel.
5. Slowly tilt the examination arm to the left:

The carriage should move to the opposite end of travel BEFORE you reach a tilt angle
of 45 deg.
6. If the carriage does not move to the ends of travel as indicated above, schedule the following
corrective action:
Service Note SN4308 DMR Grid Lines, Section entitled Play Adjustment of Cam Roll-
ers.
749
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHECK BUCKY AND TEST BUCKY

Blank page
750
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CHECK STEREOTIX OPTION Version No.:

Date : July 2002
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Densitometer
D Stereotix test phantom
D Stereotix 2 Operator Manual
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Refer to safety precautions given in Stereotix 2 Operator Manual
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
1. Install the Stereotix 2 on the Senographe as described in the section Stereotix 2 Installed on Senographe
DMR in the Stereotix 2 Operator Manual.
2. Make a test film as described in the section Exposure With Phantom in the Stereotix 2 Operator Manual.
3. Check that the Stereotix 2 is operating correctly by performing the following sections in the Stereotix 2
Operator Manual:
Using the Controller Unit and the Puncture Device

Selecting a Second Point
4. If the results from the above checks are incorrect, schedule corrective maintenance on the Senographe: Job
Card Stereotix 2 Calibration in Stereotix 2 Service Manual.
5. On the test film, use the densitometer to check the O.D. on the left and right exposures. Measured O.D.
should correspond to the reference O.D. in normal exposure.
751
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHECK STEREOTIX OPTION

Blank page
752
REV 3 sm 2308530100
Purpose: CHECK CHAIR OPTION Version No.:

Date : July 2002
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
PROCEDURE
1. Check chair functions (all knobs function correctly, all adjustments hold firmly, no excessive loose-
ness).
2. Check wheel safety (brakes function correctly).
3. Check armrest safety.
753
REV 3 sm 2308530100
CHECK CHAIR OPTION

Blank page
754
Technical
Publications
2308530100
Revision 3
SENOGRAPHE DMR V2_P

sm
Service Manual
do not duplicate
CopyrightE 2001, 2002 by General Electric Co.

Senographe DMR

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Senographe DMR

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Technical

SENOGRAPHE DMR V2_P

CopyrightE 2001, 2002 by General Electric Co.

CHAPTER TITLE PAGE

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

CHAPTER TITLE PAGE

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

CHAPTER TITLE PAGE

JOB CARD IST 022 CHECKING BASIC SUPPLY VOLTAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3135

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

CHAPTER TITLE PAGE

 34#& -*()3 #& $)".(&% 3/ #&$/-& 

MQSA paddle adjustment. BUCge81771.

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION

Title page 3 3-1 through 3-276 3 6i & 6-ii 3

i through vi 3 4-1 through 4-20 3 6-1 through 6-94 3

1-1 through 146 3 5-i & 5-ii 3 71 through 754 3

2-1 through 24 3 5-1 through 5-54 3

NUMBER FORMAT REVISION

This document is using the Conditional selection. It is a slave

12 Inspection for Damage

D See the Pre-installation Manual for a description of the delivered equipment.

32 Application and Installation modes

33 Description of the Console

application mode, press the SETUP key again.

mode, the SETUP key is pressed for the first time.

34 Accessing the Generator or Gantry Installation Mode from the Console

Menu access paths: SETUP/GENE/INSTAL OR SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL

1. Press the SETUP key .

Illustration 13 shows the sequence for accessing generator installation mode.

SMALL AUTO AUTO +0 A

35 Installation Menu Tree Structure

indicates that rotation of the kV knob will either display

Enter your password

installation steering step

MAX COMPRESS FORCE daN: (value)

KEY has been entered. See illustration 15.

CHECKSUM OF SAVED PARAM GENERATOR CALIBRATION

REINITIALIZING THE TUBE

RESET TUBE ENERGY (Reset done)

indicates that rotation of the kV knob will either display

indicates that the 2nd trigger button must be pressed in

THIS MENU IS ONLY ACCESSIBLE WHEN

indicates that the 2nd trigger button must be pressed in

FOCAL BIAS VOLT modif x=(value)

FOCAL BIAS VOLT measure meas=(value) 1st pt 2nd pt calcul MEASUR

THIS MENU IS ONLY ACCESSIBLE WHEN NEXT VALID

FREQ/HV HV/DAC PM/PM_HV calibration

FREQ/PM_HV GAIN change F/HV=(value)

FREQUENCY/PM_HV GAIN ref=(value)

Send PM/HV ref FREQ/PM_HV calcul

THIS MENU IS CURRENTLY

FILM/SCREEN CALIBRATION mAs CALIB OD_MS CALC CELL MODE SELECTION

REF ENERGY calculation for Stereotix 2 mode

LNRT PARAM display x=(3 values) MAGNIFICATION CALIB. Config:contact/magnify

CALIB REF_ENERGY OF LNRT mAs=(value)

CALIB REF. ENERGY calc

5253 5258 5272 * 5172

5255 Not used for DMR 5277 5278

5260 5261 5274/5275

ILLUSTRATION 113 (ARMINSTAL)

indicates that several values can be displayed by rotat-

34#& -*()3 #& $)".(&% 3/ #&$/-&